2007 WRX & STI Owners Manual

Black plate (1,1)

北米Model "A1940BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 23

Foreword

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’sManual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU inexcellent condition and to properly maintain the emission controlsystem for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to readthis manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle andits operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contactthe dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearestSUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in thismanual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVYINDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications anddesigns at any time without prior notice and without incurring anyobligation to make the same or similar changes on vehiclespreviously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models andcovers all equipment, including factory installed options. Someexplanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in yourvehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. Thenext owner will need the information found herein.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

*C copyright 2007 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

Black plate (2,1)


This manual describes the following vehicle types.

1) 4-door2) 5-door and OUTBACK

Black plate (3,1)


Warranties

& Warranties for U.S.A.All SUBARU vehicles distributed bySubaru of America, Inc. and sold at retailby an authorized SUBARU dealer in theUnited States come with the followingwarranties:. SUBARU Limited Warranty. Emission Control Systems Warranty. Emissions Performance Warranty

All warranty information, including detailsof coverage and exclusions, is in the“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.Please read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties for CanadaAll SUBARU vehicles distributed bySubaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail byan authorized SUBARU dealer in Canadacome with the following warranties:. SUBARU Limited Warranty. Anti-Corrosion Warranty. Emission Control Warranty

All warranty information, including detailsof coverage and exclusions, is in the“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Pleaseread these warranties carefully.

How to use this Owner’sManual

& Using your Owner’s ManualBefore you operate your vehicle, carefullyread this manual. To protect yourself andextend the service life of your vehicle,follow the instructions in this manual.Failure to observe these instructions mayresult in serious injury and damage to yourvehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteenchapters. Each chapter begins with a brieftable of contents, so you can usually tell ata glance if that chapter contains theinformation you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRSairbagsThis chapter informs you how to use theseat and seatbelt and contains precau-tions for the SRS airbags.Chapter 2: Keys and doorsThis chapter informs you how to operatethe keys, locks and windows.Chapter 3: Instruments and controlsThis chapter informs you about the opera-tion of instrument panel indicators andhow to use the instruments and otherswitches.

Chapter 4: Climate controlThis chapter informs you how to operatethe climate control.Chapter 5: AudioThis chapter informs you how to operateyour audio system.Chapter 6: Interior equipmentThis chapter informs you how to operateinterior equipment.Chapter 7: Starting and operatingThis chapter informs you how to start andoperate your SUBARU.Chapter 8: Driving tipsThis chapter informs you how to drive yourSUBARU in various conditions and ex-plains some safety tips on driving.Chapter 9: In case of emergencyThis chapter informs you what to do if youhave a problem while driving, such as aflat tire or engine overheating.Chapter 10: Appearance careThis chapter informs you how to keep yourSUBARU looking good.Chapter 11: Maintenance and serviceThis chapter informs you when you needto take your SUBARU to the dealer forscheduled maintenance and informs youhow to keep your SUBARU runningproperly.

1

– CONTINUED –

0

Black plate (4,1)


2

Chapter 12: SpecificationsThis chapter informs you about dimen-sions and capacities of your SUBARU.Chapter 13: Consumer information andReporting safety defectsThis chapter informs you about Uniformtire quality grading standards and Report-ing safety defects.Chapter 14: IndexThis is an alphabetical listing of all that’s inthis manual. You can use it to quickly findsomething you want to read.

& Safety warningsYou will find a number of WARNINGs,CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.These safety warnings alert you to poten-tial hazards that could result in injury toyou or others.Please read these safety warnings as wellas all other portions of this manual care-fully in order to gain a better understand-ing of how to use your SUBARU vehiclesafely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation inwhich serious injury or death couldresult if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation inwhich injury or damage to yourvehicle, or both, could result if thecaution is ignored.

NOTEA NOTE gives information or sugges-tions how to make better use of yourvehicle.

& Safety symbol

You will find a circle with a slash through itin this manual. This symbol means “Donot”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let thishappen”, depending upon the context.

Vehicle symbols

There are some of the symbols you maysee on your vehicle.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Power door lock and unlock

Passengers’ windows lockand unlock

Fuel

Front fog lights

Hazard warning flasher

Engine hood

Black plate (5,1)


Mark Name

Trunk lid (4-door)

Seat heater

Child restraint top tether an-chorages

Child restraint lower an-chorages

Horn

Windshield wiper deicer

Wiper intermittent

Windshield wiper and washer

Rear window wiper

Rear window washer

Lights

Mark Name

Parking lights, tail lights, li-cense plate light and instru-ment panel illumination

Headlights

Turn signal

Illumination brightness

Fan speed

Instrument panel outlets

Instrument panel outlets andfoot outlets

Foot outlets

Windshield defroster and footoutlets

Windshield defroster

Rear window defogger/Out-side mirror defogger

Mark Name

Air recirculation

Engine oil

Washer

Door lock (Transmitter)

Door unlock (Transmitter)

Trunk lid (4-door) or rear gate(5-door) (Transmitter)

3

0

Black plate (6,1)


4

Safety precautions whendriving

& Seatbelt and SRS airbag

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle shouldfasten their seatbelts BEFOREthe vehicle starts to move. Other-wise, the possibility of seriousinjury becomes greater in theevent of a sudden stop or acci-dent.

. To obtain maximum protection inthe event of an accident, thedriver and all passengers in thevehicle should always wear seat-belts when the vehicle is moving.The SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem) airbag does not do awaywith the need to fasten seatbelts.In combination with the seat-belts, it offers the best combinedprotection in case of a seriousaccident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increasesthe chance of severe injury ordeath in a crash even when thevehicle has the SRS airbag.

. The SRS airbags deploy withconsiderable speed and force.Occupants who are out of properposition when the SRS airbagdeploys could suffer very seriousinjuries. Because the SRS airbagneeds enough space for deploy-ment, the driver should alwayssit upright and well back in theseat as far from the steeringwheel as practical while stillmaintaining full vehicle controland the front passenger shouldmove the seat as far back aspossible and sit upright and wellback in the seat.

Carefully read the “Seatbelts” and “*SRSairbag (Supplemental Restraint Systemairbag)” sections in chapter 1 for instruc-tions and precautions concerning theseatbelt system and SRS airbag system.

& Child safety

WARNING

. Never hold a child on your lap orin your arms while the vehicle ismoving. The passenger cannotprotect the child from injury in acollision, because the child willbe caught between the passen-ger and objects inside the vehi-cle.

. While riding in the vehicle, in-fants and small children shouldalways be placed in the REARseat in an infant or child restraintsystem which is appropriate forthe child’s age, height andweight. If a child is too big for achild restraint system, the childshould sit in the REAR seat andbe restrained using the seatbelts.According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seat-ing positions. Never allow a childto stand up or kneel on the seat.

. Put children aged 12 and under inthe REAR seat properly re-strained at all times in a childrestraint device or in a seatbelt.

Black plate (7,1)


The SRS airbag deploys withconsiderable speed and forceand can injure or even kill chil-dren, especially if they are 12years of age and under and arenot restrained or improperly re-strained. Because children arelighter and weaker than adults,their risk of being injured fromdeployment is greater.

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARDFACING CHILD SEAT IN THEFRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKSSERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TOTHE CHILD BY PLACING THECHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TOTHE SRS AIRBAG.

. Always turn the child safety locksto the “LOCK” position whenchildren sit on the rear seat.Serious injury could result if achild accidentally opens the doorand falls out. Refer to the “Childsafety locks” section in chapter2.

. Always lock the passenger’s win-dows using the lock switch whenchildren are riding in the vehicle.Failure to follow this procedurecould result in injury to a childoperating the power window. Re-fer to the “Windows” section in

chapter 2.

. Never leave unattended childrenin the vehicle. They could acci-dentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent op-eration of the vehicle. Also, onhot or sunny days, temperaturein a closed vehicle could quicklybecome high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuriesto them.

. Help prevent young children fromlocking themselves in the trunk.When leaving the vehicle, eitherclose all windows and lock alldoors or cancel the inside trunklid release. Also make certainthat the trunk is closed. On hotor sunny days, the temperaturein a trunk could quickly becomehigh enough to cause death orserious heat-related injuries in-cluding brain damage to anyonelocked inside, particularly forsmall children.

Carefully read the “Child restraint sys-tems”, “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Re-straint System airbag)” and “Seatbelts”sections in chapter 1 for instructions andprecautions concerning the child restraintsystem, seatbelt system and SRS airbag

system.

& Engine exhaust gas (Carbonmonoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.Engine exhaust gas containscarbon monoxide, a colorlessand odorless gas which is dan-gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-gine exhaust system to preventengine exhaust gas from enter-ing the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closedspace, such as a garage, exceptfor the brief time needed to drivethe vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parkedvehicle for a lengthy time whilethe engine is running. If that isunavoidable, then use the venti-lation fan to force fresh air intothe vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilatorinlet grille free from snow, leavesor other obstructions to ensurethat the ventilation system al-ways works properly.

5

– CONTINUED –

0

Black plate (8,1)


6

. If at any time you suspect thatexhaust fumes are entering thevehicle, have the problemchecked and corrected as soonas possible. If you must driveunder these conditions, driveonly with all windows fully open.

. Keep the trunk lid or rear gateclosed while driving to preventexhaust gas from entering thevehicle.

& Drinking and driving

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Alcohol in the blood-stream delays your reaction timeand impairs your perception, judg-ment and attentiveness. If you driveafter drinking – even if you drink justa little – it will increase the risk ofbeing involved in a serious or fatalaccident, injuring or killing yourself,your passengers and others. Inaddition, if you are injured in theaccident, alcohol may increase theseverity of that injury.

Please don’t drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the mostfrequent causes of accidents. Since alco-hol affects all people differently, you mayhave consumed too much alcohol to drivesafely even if the level of alcohol in yourblood is below the legal limit. The safestthing you can do is never drink and drive.However if you have no choice but todrive, stop drinking and sober up comple-tely before getting behind the wheel.

& Drugs and driving

WARNING

There are some drugs (over thecounter and prescription) that candelay your reaction time and impairyour perception, judgment and at-tentiveness. If you drive after takingthem, it may increase your, yourpassengers’ and other persons’ riskof being involved in a serious orfatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check withyour doctor or pharmacist or read theliterature that accompanies the medicationto determine if the drug you are taking canimpair your driving ability. Do not driveafter taking any medications that canmake you drowsy or otherwise affect yourability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If

you have a medical condition that requiresyou to take drugs, please consult withyour doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influenceof any illicit mind-altering drugs. For yourown health and well-being, we urge younot to take illegal drugs in the first placeand to seek treatment if you are addictedto those drugs.

& Driving when tired or sleepy

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, yourreaction time will be delayed andyour perception, judgment and at-tentiveness will be impaired. If youdrive when tired or sleepy, your,your passengers’ and other per-sons’ chances of being involved ina serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive butinstead find a safe place to rest if youare tired or sleepy. On long trips, youshould make periodic rest stops to refreshyourself before continuing on your journey.When possible, you should share thedriving with others.

Black plate (9,1)


& Modification of your vehicle

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modifiedother than with genuine Subaruparts and accessories. Other typesof modifications could affect itsperformance, safety or durability,and may even violate governmentalregulations. In addition, damage orperformance problems resultingfrom modification may not be cov-ered under warranties.

& Car phone/cell phone anddriving

CAUTION

Do not use a car phone/cell phonewhile driving; it may distract yourattention from driving and can leadto an accident. If you use a carphone/cell phone, pull off the roadand park in a safe place beforeusing your phone. In some States/Provinces, only hands-free phonesmay legally be used while driving.

& Driving with petsUnrestrained pets can interfere with yourdriving and distract your attention fromdriving. In a collision or sudden stop,unrestrained pets or cages can be thrownaround inside the vehicle and hurt you oryour passengers. Besides, the pets canbe hurt under these situations. It is also fortheir own safety that pets should beproperly restrained in your vehicle. Re-strain a pet with a special travelingharness which can be secured to the rearseat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrierwhich can be secured to the rear seat byrouting a seatbelt through the carrier’shandle. Never restrain pets or pet carriersin the front passenger’s seat. For furtherinformation, consult your veterinarian,local animal protection society or petshop.

& Tire pressuresCheck and, if necessary, adjust thepressure of each tire (including the spare)at least once a month and before any longjourney.

Check the tire pressure when the tires arecold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust thetire pressures to the values shown on thetire placard.

For detailed information, refer to the “Tiresand wheels” section in chapter 11.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-sively low tire pressures can causethe tires to deform severely and torapidly become hot. A sharp in-crease in temperature could causetread separation, and destruction ofthe tires. The resulting loss ofvehicle control could lead to anaccident.

7

– CONTINUED –

0

Black plate (10,1)


8

& California proposition 65warning

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its consti-tuents, and certain vehicle compo-nents contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids in vehicles andcertain components of product wearcontain or emit chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm.

Black plate (1,1)

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

Keys and doors 2

Instruments and controls

Climate control 4

Audio 5

Interior equipment 6

Starting and operating 7

Driving tips 8

In case of emergency 9

Appearance care 10

Maintenance and service 11

Specifications 12

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13

Index 14

3

北米Model "A1940BE-B" Edited: 2007/ 7/ 23

Black plate (12,1)


10

Illustrated index

& Exterior

1) Engine hood (page 11-5)2) Headlight switch (page 3-28)3) Replacing bulbs (page 11-46)4) Wiper switch (page 3-32)5) Door locks (page 2-4)6) Tire pressure (page 11-33)7) Flat tires (page 9-4)8) Tire chains (page 8-11)9) Front fog light switch (page 3-30)10) Tie-down hooks (page 9-13)11) Towing hook (page 9-13)

Black plate (13,1)


1) Rear window defogger button(page 3-34)

2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4)3) Child safety locks (page 2-19)4) Tie-down hook (page 9-14)5) Trunk (page 2-21)6) Rear gate (page 2-23)7) Towing hook (page 9-14)

11

– CONTINUED –

0

Black plate (14,1)


12

& Interior

! Passenger compartment area

1) Lower anchorages for child restraintsystem (page 1-29)

2) Seatbelt (page 1-9)3) Parking brake lever (page 7-34)4) Front seat (page 1-2)5) Rear seat (page 1-6)

Black plate (15,1)


1) Center console (page 6-4)2) Cup holder (page 6-5)3) Front power supply socket (page 6-6)4) Glove box (page 6-4)

13

– CONTINUED –

0

Black plate (16,1)


14

& Instrument panel 1) Door locks (page 2-4)2) Outside mirror switch (page 3-38)3) Illumination brightness control

(page 3-29)4) Light control lever (page 3-27)5) Combination meter (page 3-5/page 3-9)6) Wiper control lever (page 3-31)7) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-5)8) Audio (page 5-1)9) Gear shift lever (MT) (page 7-14)/

Selector lever (AT) (page 7-16)10) Climate control (page 4-1)11) Cruise control (page 7-36)12) Horn (page 3-41)13) SRS airbag (page 1-35)14) Tilt/telescopic steering (page 3-40)15) Audio control buttons (page 5-26)16) Fuse box (page 11-43)17) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(page 7-31)18) Hood lock release knob (page 11-5)19) Power windows (page 2-19)

Black plate (17,1)


& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Windshield wiper (page 3-32)2) Mist (page 3-33)3) Windshield washer (page 3-33)4) Rear window wiper and washer switch

(page 3-33)5) Wiper control lever (page 3-31)6) Light control switch (page 3-27)7) Fog light switch (page 3-30)8) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-28)9) Headlight flasher High/Low beam

change (page 3-28)10) Turn signal (page 3-29)

15

– CONTINUED –

0

Black plate (18,1)


16

& Combination meter

! U.S.-spec. vehicles (Turbo models)

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-12)2) Tachometer (page 3-11)3) Speedometer (page 3-10)4) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-9)5) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-10)6) Selector lever and gear position indicator

(AT models) (page 3-24)7) Temperature gauge (page 3-9)

Black plate (19,1)


! U.S.-spec. vehicles (Non-turbo models) 1) Tachometer (page 3-11)2) Speedometer (page 3-10)3) Fuel gauge (page 3-12)4) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter


(AT models) (page 3-24)7) Coolant temperature warning/indicator

light (page 3-17)

17

– CONTINUED –

0

Black plate (20,1)


18

! Canada-spec. vehicles (Turbo models) 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-12)2) Tachometer (page 3-11)3) Speedometer (page 3-10)4) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter


(AT models) (page 3-24)7) Temperature gauge (page 3-9)

Black plate (21,1)


! Canada-spec. vehicles (Non-turbo models) 1) Tachometer (page 3-11)2) Speedometer (page 3-10)3) Fuel gauge (page 3-12)4) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter


(AT models) (page 3-24)7) Coolant temperature warning/indicator

light (page 3-17)

19

– CONTINUED –

0

Black plate (22,1)


20

& WARNING AND INDICATORLIGHTS

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light 3-13

Front passenger’s seat-belt warning light 3-13

SRS airbag systemwarning light 3-15

or Front passenger’s fron-tal airbag ON indicator 3-15

or Front passenger’s fron-tal airbag OFF indicator 3-15

CHECK ENGINEwarning light/Malfunctionindicator lamp

3-16

Coolant temperature lowindicator light/Coolanttemperature high warn-ing light

3-17

Charge warning light 3-17

Mark Name Page

Oil pressure warninglight 3-17

AT OIL temperaturewarning light (AT vehi-cles)

3-18

/ ABS warning light 3-19

/ Brake system warninglight 3-20

Door open warning light 3-21

All-Wheel Drive warninglight (AT vehicles) 3-21

Hill start assist warninglight 3-21

Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol operation indicatorlight (if equipped)

3-22

Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol warning light (ifequipped)/Vehicle Dy-namics Control OFF in-dicator light (if equipped)

3-22

Turn signal indicatorlights

3-24

Mark Name Page

High beam indicator light 3-24

Front fog indicator light(if equipped) 3-25

Security indicator light 2-3,2-14

Headlight indicator light(if equipped) 3-25

Cruise control indicatorlight 3-24

Cruise control set indi-cator light 3-25

Low fuel warning light 3-21

Low tire pressure warn-ing light (U.S.-spec.models)

3-18

SPORT mode indicatorlight (AT vehicles) 3-24

Black plate (23,1)


& Tire changing tools 1) Jack (page 9-4/page 9-19)2) Jack handle (page 9-4/page 9-18)3) Spare tire (page 9-2/page 9-4)

21

0

Black plate (24,1)


22

Function settings

A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contactthe nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, the settings for some of these functionscan be changed using the monitor. For details, please refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the monitor.

Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page

Alarm system Alarm system Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-14

Monitoring start delay time (after closureof doors)

0 second / 30 seconds 30 seconds 2-15

Impact sensor operation (only vehicleswith shock sensors (dealer option))

Operation / Non-operation Non-operation 2-18

Passive arming Operation / Non-operation Non-operation 2-17

Dome light illumination ON/OFF OFF 2-14

Remote keyless entry sys-tem

Hazard warning flasher Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-7

Audible signal Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-9

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-6

Remote engine start system(dealer option)

Horn chirp confirmation ON/OFF ON 7-12

Rear window defogger Rear window defogger Operation for 15 minutes /Continuous operation

Operation for 15 minutes 3-34

Windshield wiper deicer (ifequipped)

Windshield wiper deicer Operation for 15 minutes /Continuous operation

Operation for 15 minutes 3-35

Dome light Operation in conjunction with remotekeyless entry system

OFF / Short / Normal / Long Normal 6-2

Battery drainage preventionfunction

Battery drainage prevention function Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-5

Black plate (1,1)


Front seats........................................................... 1-2Fore and aft adjustment....................................... 1-3Reclining the seatback ........................................ 1-3Seat cushion height adjustment(Driver’s seat) ................................................... 1-4

Head restraint adjustment (if equipped)................ 1-4Active head restraint (if equipped) ....................... 1-4

Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-5Rear seats............................................................ 1-6

Armrest (if equipped)........................................... 1-6Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-7Folding down the rear seatback........................... 1-8

Seatbelts .............................................................. 1-9Seatbelt safety tips.............................................. 1-9Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-10Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-10

Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-11Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-12Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-19

Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-19System monitors ................................................ 1-20

System servicing ............................................... 1-21Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-22

Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-22Where to place a child restraint system.............. 1-23Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-25Installing child restraint systems with A/ELRseatbelt ........................................................... 1-25

Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-28Installation of child restraint systems by use oflower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-29

Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-32*SRS airbag (Supplemental RestraintSystem airbag)................................................ 1-35Vehicle with SRS airbags and lap/shoulderrestraints for driver, front passenger, andwindow-side rear passengers........................... 1-35

Subaru advanced frontal airbag system.............. 1-39SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-51SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-57SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-59Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-59

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1

Black plate (28,1)


1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seats

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-ing to avoid the possibility ofloss of vehicle control and ofpersonal injury.

. Before adjusting the seat, makesure the hands and feet of rearseat passengers and cargo areclear of the adjusting mechan-ism.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-straint when the occupant sitswell back and upright in the seat.To reduce the risk of slidingunder the seatbelt in a collision,the front seatbacks should bealways used in the upright posi-tion while the vehicle is running.If the front seatbacks are notused in the upright position in acollision, the risk of sliding underthe lap belt and of the lap beltsliding up over the abdomen willincrease, and both can result inserious internal injury or death.

. The SRS airbags deploy withconsiderable speed and force.Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbagdeploys could suffer very seriousinjuries. Because the SRS airbagneeds enough space for deploy-ment, the driver should alwayssit upright and well back in theseat as far from the steeringwheel as practical while stillmaintaining full vehicle controland the front passenger shouldmove the seat as far back aspossible and sit upright and wellback in the seat.

WARNING

Put children aged 12 and under inthe rear seat properly restrained atall times. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and forceand can injure or even kill children,especially if they are 12 years of ageand under and are not restrained orimproperly restrained. Because chil-dren are lighter and weaker thanadults, their risk of being injuredfrom deployment is greater. For thatreason, we strongly recommendthat ALL children (including thosein child seats and those that haveoutgrown child restraint devices) sitin the REAR seat properly re-strained at all times in a childrestraint device or in a seatbelt,whichever is appropriate for thechild’s age, height and weight. Se-cure ALL types of child restraintdevices (including forward facingchild seat) in the REAR seats at alltimes.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONTSEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUSINJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILDBY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEADTOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seating posi-tions than in the front seating posi-tions. For instructions and precau-

Black plate (29,1)


tions concerning child restraint sys-tems, refer to the “Child restraintsystems” section in this chapter.

& Fore and aft adjustment

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat tothe desired position. Then release thelever and move the seat back and forth tomake sure that it is securely locked intoplace.

& Reclining the seatback

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust theseatback to the desired position. Thenrelease the lever and make sure theseatback is securely locked into place.The seatback placed in a reclined positioncan spring back upward with force whenreleased. When operating the reclininglever to return the seatback, hold it lightlyso that it may be raised back gradually.

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-ing under the seatbelt in the event ofa collision, always put the seatbackin the upright position while thevehicle is in motion. Also, do notplace objects such as cushionsbetween the passenger and theseatback. If you do so, the risk ofsliding under the lap belt and of thelap belt sliding up over the abdomenwill increase, and both can result inserious internal injury or death.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3

– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (30,1)



& Seat cushion height adjust-ment (Driver’s seat)

1) When the lever is pushed down, the seatis lowered.

2) When the lever is pulled up, the seatrises.

The height of the seat can be adjusted bymoving the seat cushion adjustment leverup and down.

& Head restraint adjustment (ifequipped)

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.To lower it, push the head restraint downwhile pressing the release button on thetop of the seatback.The head restraint should be adjusted sothat the center of the head restraint isclosest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle with thehead restraints removed becausethey are designed to reduce the riskof serious neck injury in the eventthat the vehicle is struck from therear.

& Active head restraint (ifequipped)

The front seats of your vehicle areequipped with active head restraints. Theyautomatically tilt forward slightly in theevent the vehicle is struck from the rear,decreasing the amount of rearward headmovement and thus reducing the risk ofwhiplash. For maximum effectiveness, thehead restraint should be adjusted so thatthe center of the head restraint is closestto the top of the occupant’s ears.

CAUTION

. Each active head restraint iseffective only when its height isproperly adjusted and driver/pas-senger sits in the correct posi-

Black plate (31,1)


tion on the seat.

. If your vehicle is involved in arear-end collision, have anauthorized SUBARU dealer in-spect the active head restraints.

. The active head restraints maynot operate in the event thevehicle experiences only a slightimpact in the rear.

. The active head restraints may bedamaged if they are pushed hardfrom behind or subjected toshock. As a result, they may notfunction if the vehicle suffers arear impact.

Seat heater (if equipped)

1) HI – Rapid heating2) LO – Normal heatingA) Driver’s sideB) Front passenger’s side

The seat heater operates when the igni-tion switch is either in the “Acc” or “ON”position.

To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO”or “HI” position on the switch, as desired,depending on the temperature. Selectingthe “HI” position will cause the seat to heatup quicker.

The indicator located on the switch comeson when the seat heater is in operation.When the vehicle’s interior is warmedenough or before you leave the vehicle,

be sure to turn the switch off.

CAUTION

. There is a possibility that peoplewith delicate skin may sufferslight burns even at low tempera-tures if they use the seat heaterfor a long period of time. Whenusing the heater, always be sureto warn the persons concerned.

. Do not put anything on the seatwhich insulates against heat,such as a blanket, cushion, orsimilar items. This may cause theseat heater to overheat.

NOTEUse of the seat heater for a long periodof time while the engine is not runningcan cause battery discharge.


1

Black plate (32,1)



Rear seats

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re-straint when the occupant sits wellback and upright in the seat. Do notput cushions or any other materialsbetween occupants and seatbacksor seat cushions. If you do so, therisk of sliding under the lap belt andof the lap belt sliding up over theabdomen will increase, and both canresult in serious internal injury ordeath.

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargohigher than the top of the seatbackbecause it could tumble forward andinjure passengers in the event of asudden stop or accident.

& Armrest (if equipped)

To lower the armrest, pull on the top edgeof the armrest.

WARNING

To avoid the possibility of seriousinjury, passengers must never beallowed to sit on the center armrestwhile the vehicle is in motion.

Black plate (33,1)


& Head restraint adjustment

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle with thehead restraints removed becausethey are designed to reduce the riskof serious neck injury in the eventthat the vehicle is struck from therear.

! Rear windows side seating position

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended tobe used at the lowest position.Before sitting on the seat, raise thehead restraint to an appropriateposition depending on your sittingheight.

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.To lower it, push the head restraint downwhile pressing the release button on thetop of the seatback.The head restraint should be adjusted sothat the center of the head restraint isclosest to the top of the occupant’s ears.When the seats are not occupied, lowerthe head restraints to improve rearwardvisibility.

! Rear center seating position

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended tobe used at the lowest position.Before sitting on the seat, raise thehead restraint to an appropriateposition depending on your sitting

height.

To raise the head restraint, pull it up whilepressing the release button on the top ofthe seatback.To lower it, push the head restraint downwhile pressing the release button.When the rear-center seating position isoccupied, raise the head restraint to anappropriate position depending on yoursitting height. When the rear center seat-ing position is not occupied, lower thehead restraint to improve rearward visibi-lity.


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (34,1)



& Folding down the rear seat-back

WARNING

. After returning the rear seatbackto its original position, be certainto place all of the seatbelts andthe tab attached to the seatcushion above the seat cushion.And make certain that theshoulder belts are fully visible.

. Never allow passengers to rideon the folded rear seatback or inthe cargo area or trunk. Doing somay result in serious injury ordeath.

. Secure all objects and especiallylong items properly to preventthem from being thrown aroundinside the vehicle and causingserious injury during a suddenstop, a sudden steering maneu-ver or a rapid acceleration.

! 4-door models

1. Lower the head restraints.2. Unlock the seatback by pulling therelease strap and then fold the seatbackdown.To return the seatback to its originalposition, raise the seatback until it locksinto place and make sure that it is securelylocked.

You can keep the seatbacks locked whenyou leave your vehicle and valet key at aparking facility. 1. Pull the lock release strap behind the

seatback out from its holder.2. Raise the seatback until it locks intoplace with the lock release strap hangingin the trunk. Make sure that the seatbackis securely locked.

Black plate (35,1)


In this case, perform the following steps tofold the seatback down again.1. Open the trunk lid. Refer to the “Trunklid (4-door)” section in chapter 2.2. Access the lock release strap from thetrunk, and fold the seatback forward whilepulling the strap down.

! 5-door models

1. Lower the head restraints.2. Unlock the seatback by pulling therelease knob and then fold the seatbackdown.To return the seatback to its originalposition, raise the seatback until it locksinto place and make sure that it is securelylocked.

Seatbelts

& Seatbelt safety tips

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle shouldfasten their seatbelts BEFOREthe vehicle starts to move. Other-wise, the possibility of seriousinjury becomes greater in theevent of a sudden stop or acci-dent.

. All belts should fit snugly in orderto provide full restraint. Loosefitting belts are not as effective inpreventing or reducing injury.

. Each seatbelt is designed tosupport only one person. Neveruse a single belt for two or morepersons – even children. Other-wise, in an accident, seriousinjury or death could result.

. Replace all seatbelt assembliesincluding retractors and attach-ing hardware worn by occupantsof a vehicle that has been in aserious accident. The entire as-sembly should be replaced evenif damage is not obvious.

. Put children aged 12 and under in

the rear seat properly restrainedat all times. The SRS airbagdeploys with considerable speedand force and can injure or evenkill children, especially if they are12 years of age and under andare not restrained or improperlyrestrained. Because children arelighter and weaker than adults,their risk of being injured fromdeployment is greater. For thatreason, we strongly recommendthat ALL children (includingthose in child seats and thosethat have outgrown child re-straint devices) sit in the REARseat properly restrained at alltimes in a child restraint deviceor in a seatbelt, whichever isappropriate for the child’s heightand weight.

Secure ALL types of child re-straint devices (including for-ward facing child seats) in theREAR seats at all times.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARDFACING CHILD SEAT IN THEFRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKSSERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TOTHE CHILD BY PLACING THECHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TOTHE SRS AIRBAG.


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (36,1)



According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seat-ing positions. For instructionsand precautions concerning thechild restraint system, refer tothe “Child restraint systems”section in this chapter.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crashsensing and diagnostic module, which willrecord the use of the seatbelt by the frontpassenger when any of the SRS frontaland side airbags deploy.

! Infants or small children

Use a child restraint system that issuitable for your vehicle. Refer to the“Child restraint systems” section in thischapter.

! Children

If a child is too big for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rear seatand be restrained using the seatbelts.According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seating positions than in the frontseating positions. Never allow a child tostand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses

the face or neck, adjust the shoulder beltanchor height (window-side seating posi-tions only) and then if necessary move thechild closer to the belt buckle to helpprovide a good shoulder belt fit. Care mustbe taken to securely place the lap belt aslow as possible on the hips and not on thechild’s waist. If the shoulder portion of thebelt cannot be properly positioned, a childrestraint system should be used. Neverplace the shoulder belt under the child’sarm or behind the child’s back.

! Expectant mothers

Expectant mothers also need to use theseatbelts. They should consult their doctorfor specific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips, not over the waist.

& Emergency Locking Retrac-tor (ELR)

The driver’s seatbelt has an EmergencyLocking Retractor (ELR).The emergency locking retractor allowsnormal body movement but the retractorlocks automatically during a sudden stop,impact or if you pull the belt very quicklyout of the retractor.

& Automatic/Emergency Lock-ing Retractor (A/ELR)

Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR). The Automatic/Emergency LockingRetractor normally functions as an Emer-gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/ELR has an additional locking mode“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode” intended to secure a child restraintsystem. When the seatbelt is once drawnout completely and is then retracted evenslightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt inthat position and the seatbelt cannot beextended. As the belt is rewinding, clickswill be heard which indicate the retractorfunctions as an ALR. When the seatbelt isretracted fully, the ALR mode is released.

When securing a child restraint system onthe rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,the seatbelt must be changed over to the

Black plate (37,1)


Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

When the child restraint system is re-moved, make sure that the seatbeltretracts fully and the retractor returned tothe Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)mode.For instructions on how to convert theretractor to the ALR mode and restore it tothe ELR mode, refer to the “Child restraintsystems” section in this chapter.

& Seatbelt warning lightand chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbeltwarning device at the driver’s and frontpassenger’s seat, as required by currentsafety standards.With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”position, this device reminds the driverand front passenger to fasten their seat-belts by illuminating the warning lights inthe locations indicated in the followingillustration and sounding a chime.

Driver’s warning light (Turbo models)

Driver’s warning light (Non-Turbo models)

Front passenger’s warning light

! Operation

If the driver and/or front passenger have/has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position, the seatbelt warning light(s) willflash for 6 seconds, to warn that theseatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime willalso sound simultaneously.

NOTE. If the driver’s and/or front passen-ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened6 seconds later, the seatbelt warningdevice operates as follows accordingto the vehicle speed.

. At speeds lower than approxi-mately 9 mph (15 km/h)


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (38,1)



The warning light(s) for unfastenedseatbelt(s) will alternate betweensteady illumination and flashing at15-second intervals. The chime willnot sound.. At speeds higher than approxi-mately 9 mph (15 km/h)The warning light(s) for unfastenedseatbelt(s) will alternate betweenflashing and steady illumination at15-second intervals and the chimewill sound while the warning light(s)is/are flashing.

. It is possible to cancel the warningoperation that follows the 6-secondwarning after turning ON the ignitionswitch. When the ignition switch isturned ON next time, however, thecomplete sequence of the warningoperation resumes. For further detailsabout canceling the warning operation,please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If there is no passenger on the frontpassenger’s seat, the seatbelt warningdevice for the front passenger’s seat willbe deactivated. The front passenger’soccupant detection system monitorswhether or not there is a passenger onthe front passenger’s seat.Observe the following precautions. Failureto do so may prevent the device fromfunctioning correctly or cause the device

to fail.. Do not install any accessory such as atable or TV onto the seatback.. Do not store a heavy load in theseatback pocket.. Do not allow the rear seat occupant toplace his/her hands or legs on the frontpassenger’s seatback, or allow him/her topull the seatback.. Do not use front seats with their back-ward-forward position and seatback notbeing locked into place securely. If any ofthem are not locked securely, adjust themagain. For adjusting procedure, refer tothe “Front seats” section in chapter 1.

If the seatbelt warning device for the frontpassenger’s seat does not function cor-rectly (e.g., it is activated even when thefront passenger’s seat is empty or it isdeactivated even when the front passen-ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),take the following actions.. Ensure that no article is placed on theseat other than a child restraint systemand the child occupant, although westrongly recommended that all childrensit in the rear seat properly restrained.. Ensure that there is no article left in theseatback pocket.. Ensure that the backward-forward po-sition and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely bymoving the seat back and forth.

If the seatbelt warning device for frontpassenger’s seat still does not functioncorrectly after taking relevant correctiveactions described above, immediatelycontact your SUBARU dealer for aninspection.

& Fastening the seatbelt

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted orreversed. In an accident, this canincrease the risk or severity ofinjury.

. Keep the lap belt as low aspossible on your hips. In a colli-sion, this spreads the force of thelap belt over stronger hip bonesinstead of across the weakerabdomen.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-straint when the occupant sitswell back and upright in the seat.To reduce the risk of slidingunder the seatbelt in a collision,the front seatbacks should bealways used in the upright posi-tion while the vehicle is running.

Black plate (39,1)


If the front seatbacks are notused in the upright position in acollision, the risk of sliding underthe lap belt and of the lap beltsliding up over the abdomen willincrease, and both can result inserious internal injury or death.

. Do not put cushions or any othermaterials between occupantsand seatbacks or seat cushions.If you do so, the risk of slidingunder the lap belt and of the lapbelt sliding up over the abdomenwill increase, and both can resultin serious internal injury ordeath.

WARNING

Never place the shoulder belt underthe arm or behind the back. If anaccident occurs, this can increasethe risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt canbecome very hot in a vehicle thathas been closed up in sunny weath-er; they could burn an occupant. Donot touch such hot parts until theycool.

! Front seatbelts

1. Adjust the seat position:Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to theupright position. Move the seat as far fromthe steering wheel as practical while stillmaintaining full vehicle control.Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-back to the upright position. Move the seatas far back as possible.2. Sit well back in the seat.3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull thebelt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. Ifthe belt stops before reaching the buckle,return the belt slightly and pull it out more

slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,let the belt retract slightly after giving it astrong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckleuntil you hear a click.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (40,1)



the shoulder belt.6. Place the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips, not on your waist.

! Adjusting the front seat shoulderbelt anchor height

The shoulder belt anchor height should beadjusted to the position best suited for thedriver/front passenger.To lower the anchor height, pull therelease knob and slide the anchor down.To raise the anchor height, slide theanchor up. Pull down on the anchor tomake sure that it is locked in place.

Always adjust the anchor height so thatthe shoulder belt passes over the middleof the shoulder without touching the neck.

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, makesure the shoulder portion of thewebbing does not pass over yourneck. If it does, adjust the seatbeltanchor to a lower position. Placingthe shoulder belt over the neck mayresult in neck injury during suddenbraking or in a collision.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.Before closing the door, make sure thatthe belts are retracted properly to avoidcatching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear seatbelts (except rear centerseatbelt)

1. Sit well back in the seat.2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull thebelt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. Ifthe belt stops before reaching the buckle,return the belt slightly and pull it out moreslowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,let the belt retract slightly after giving astrong pull on it, then pull it out slowlyagain.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckleuntil you hear a click.

Black plate (41,1)


4. To make the lap part tight, pull up onthe shoulder belt.5. Place the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips, not on your waist.


Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure thatthe belts are retracted properly to avoidcatching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear center seatbelt

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate2) Connector (tongue)3) Connector (buckle)4) Center seatbelt buckle


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (42,1)



WARNING

Fastening the seatbelt with the web-bing twisted can increase the risk orseverity of injury in an accident.When fastening the belt after it ispulled out from the retractor, espe-cially when inserting the connec-tor’s tongue plate into the matingbuckle (on right-hand side), alwayscheck that the webbing is nottwisted.

WARNING

Be sure to fasten both tongue platesto the respective buckles. If theseatbelt is used only as a shoulderbelt (with the connector’s tongueplate not fastened to the connec-tor’s buckle on the right-hand side),it cannot properly restrain the wear-er in position in an accident, possi-bly resulting in serious injury ordeath.

5-door models

The rear center seat belt is stowed in theseat belt holder on the right side of thecargo area.

1. Remove the tongue plate from the belt

holder and pull out the seatbelt slowly.

5-door models

2. For 5-door models, after drawing outthe seatbelt, pass it through the belt guideas follows: First insert one edge of the beltinto the open gap in the belt guide; thenslide the rest of the belt in, so that thewhole belt fits inside.

Black plate (43,1)


3. After confirming that the webbing is nottwisted, insert the connector (tongue)attached at the webbing end into thebuckle on the right-hand side until a clickis heard.

If the belt stops before reaching thebuckle, return the belt slightly and pull itout more slowly. If the belt still cannot beunlocked, let the belt retract slightly aftergiving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowlyagain.

4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plateinto the center seatbelt buckle marked“CENTER” on the left-hand side until itclicks.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up onthe shoulder belt.

6. Place the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips, not on your waist.


Push the release button of the centerseatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) tounfasten the seatbelt.

NOTEWhen the seatback is folded down forgreater cargo area, it is necessary todisconnect the connector.


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (44,1)



1. Insert a key or other hard pointedobject into the slot in the connector(buckle) on the right-hand side and pushit in, and the connector (tongue) plate willdisconnect from the buckle.

5-door models

2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.You should hold the webbing end andguide it back into the retractor while it isrolling up. Insert the connector (tongue)into the belt holder.

5-door models

CAUTION

. Do not allow the retractor to rollup the seatbelt too quickly.Otherwise, the metal tongueplates may hit against the trim,resulting in damaged trim.

. Have the seatbelt fully rolled upso that the tongue plates areneatly stored. A hanging tongueplate can swing and hit againstthe trim during driving, causingdamage to the trim.

Black plate (45,1)


& Seatbelt maintenanceTo clean the seatbelts, use a mild soapand lukewarm water. Never bleach or dyethe belts because this could seriouslyaffect their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachmentsincluding the webbing and all hardwareperiodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.Replace the seatbelts even if only minordamage is found.

CAUTION

. Keep the belts free of polishes,oils, chemicals and particularlybattery acid.

. Never attempt to make modifica-tions or changes that will preventthe seatbelt from operating prop-erly.

Front seatbelt pretensioners

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. Theseatbelt pretensioners are designed to beactivated in the event of an accidentinvolving a moderate to severe frontalcollision.

The pretensioner sensor also serves asthe frontal SRS airbag sensor. If thesensor detects a certain predeterminedamount of force during a frontal collision,the front seatbelt is quickly drawn back inby the retractor to take up the slack so thatthe belt more effectively restrains the frontseat occupant.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,an operating noise will be heard and a

small amount of smoke will be released.These occurrences are normal and notharmful. This smoke does not indicate afire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has beenactivated, the seatbelt retractor remainslocked. Consequently, the seatbelt can notbe pulled out and retracted and thereforemust be replaced.

NOTE. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-signed to activate in minor frontalimpacts, in side or rear impacts or inroll-over accidents.. The driver’s seat and passenger’sseat pretensioners and frontal SRSairbag operate simultaneously.. Pretensioners are designed to func-tion on a one-time-only basis. In theevent that a pretensioner is activated,both the driver’s and front passenger’sseatbelt retractor assemblies must bereplaced only by an authorizedSUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-belt retractor assemblies, use onlygenuine SUBARU parts.. If either front seatbelt does notretract or cannot be pulled out due toa malfunction or activation of thepretensioner, contact your SUBARUdealer as soon as possible.


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (46,1)



. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-bly or surrounding area has beendamaged, contact your SUBARU dealeras soon as possible.. When you sell your vehicle, we urgeyou to explain to the buyer that it hasseatbelt pretensioners by alerting himto the contents of this section.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection,the occupants should sit in anupright position with their seat-belts properly fastened. Refer tothe “Seatbelts” section in thischapter.

. Do not modify, remove or strikethe front seatbelt retractor as-semblies or surrounding area.This could result in accidentalactivation of the seatbelt preten-sioners or could make the sys-tem inoperative, possibly result-ing in serious injury. Seatbeltpretensioners have no user-ser-viceable parts. For required ser-vicing of front seatbelt retractorsequipped with seatbelt preten-sioners, see your nearestSUBARU dealer.

. When discarding front seatbelt

retractor assemblies or scrap-ping the entire vehicle due tocollision damage or for otherreasons, consult your SUBARUdealer.

& System monitors

SRS airbag system warning light (Turbomodels)

SRS airbag system warning light (Non-turbo models)

A diagnostic system continually monitorsthe readiness of the seatbelt pretensionerwhile the vehicle is being driven. Theseatbelt pretensioners share the controlmodule with the SRS airbag system.Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in aseatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbagsystem warning light will illuminate. TheSRS airbag system warning light will shownormal system operation by lighting forapproximately 6 seconds when the igni-tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.

The following components are monitoredby the indicator:. Front sub sensor (right-hand side). Front sub sensor (left-hand side)

Black plate (47,1)


. Airbag control module (including im-pact sensors). Frontal airbag module (driver’s side). Frontal airbag module (front passen-ger’s side). Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-hand side). Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand side). Side airbag module (driver’s side). Side airbag module (front passenger’sside). Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheelhouse right-hand side). Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheelhouse left-hand side). Curtain airbag module (right side). Curtain airbag module (left side). Satellite safing sensor (under the rearcenter seat). Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side). Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-ger’s side). Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-ger’s side). Front passenger’s seatbelt tensionsensor. Front passenger’s occupant detectionsystem weight sensor. Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ONand OFF indicator. All related wiring

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any ofthe following conditions, there maybe a malfunction in the seatbeltpretensioners and/or SRS airbagsystem. Immediately take your vehi-cle to your nearest SUBARU dealerto have the system checked. Unlesschecked and properly repaired, theseatbelt pretensioners and/or SRSairbag will not operate properly inthe event of a collision, which mayincrease the risk of injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-ing light

. No illumination of the warninglight when the ignition switch isfirst turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of thewarning light

. Illumination of the warning lightwhile driving

& System servicing

WARNING

. When discarding a seatbelt re-tractor assembly or scrappingthe entire vehicle damaged by acollision, consult your SUBARUdealer.

. Tampering with or disconnectingthe system’s wiring could resultin accidental activation of theseatbelt pretensioner and/orSRS airbag or could make thesystem inoperative, which mayresult in serious injury. Do notuse electrical test equipment onany circuit related to the seatbeltpretensioner and SRS airbagsystems. For required servicingof the seatbelt pretensioner, con-sult your nearest SUBARU deal-er.


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (48,1)



CAUTION

The front sub sensors are locatedon both the right and left sides at thefront of the vehicle, and the SRSairbag control module including theimpact sensors is located under thecenter console. If you need serviceor repair in those areas or near thefront seatbelt retractors, have thework performed by your authorizedSUBARU dealer.

NOTEIf the front part of the vehicle isdamaged in an accident to the extentthat the seatbelt pretensioner does notoperate, contact your SUBARU dealeras soon as possible.

& Precautions against vehiclemodification

Always consult your SUBARU dealer ifyou want to install any accessory parts toyour vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the followingmodifications. Such modificationscan interfere with proper operation

of the seatbelt pretensioners.

. Attachment of any equipment(bush bar, winches, snow plow,skid plate, etc.) other than genu-ine SUBARU accessory parts tothe front end.

. Modification of the suspensionsystem or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of differentsize and construction from thetires specified on the vehicleplacard attached to the driver’sdoor pillar or specified for indivi-dual vehicle models in this Own-er’s Manual.

Child restraint systems

Infants and small children should alwaysbe placed in an infant or child restraintsystem in the rear seat while riding in thevehicle. You should use an infant or childrestraint system that meets Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standards or CanadaMotor Vehicle Safety Standards, is com-patible with your vehicle and is appro-priate for the child’s age and size. All childrestraint systems are designed to besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts orthe lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt(except those covered in “Installation ofchild restraint systems by use of lower andtether anchorages (LATCH)”).Children could be endangered in anaccident if their child restraints are not

Black plate (49,1)


properly secured in the vehicle. Wheninstalling the child restraint system, care-fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seating positions than in the frontseating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provincesrequire that infants and small children berestrained in an approved child restraintsystem at all times while the vehicle ismoving.

WARNING

Never let a passenger hold a childon his or her lap or in his or herarms while the vehicle is moving.The passenger cannot protect the

child from injury in a collision,because the child will be caughtbetween the passenger and objectsinside the vehicle.

Additionally, holding a child in yourlap or arms in the front seat exposesthat child to another serious danger.Since the SRS airbag deploys withconsiderable speed and force, thechild could be injured or even killed.

WARNING

Children should be properly re-strained at all times. Never allow achild to stand up, or to kneel on anyseat. Unrestrained children will bethrown forward during sudden stop

or in an accident and can be injuredseriously.

Additionally, children standing up orkneeling on or in front of the frontseat are exposed another seriousdanger. Since the SRS airbag de-ploys with considerable speed andforce, the child could be injured oreven killed.

& Where to place a child re-straint system

The following are SUBARU’s recommen-dations on where to place a child restraintsystem in your vehicle.


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (50,1)



A: Front passenger’s seatYou should not install a child restraintsystem (including a booster seat) due tothe hazard to children posed by thepassenger’s airbag.

B: Rear seat, window-side seatingpositionsRecommended positions for all types ofchild restraint systems.In these positions, Automatic/EmergencyLocking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts andlower anchorages (bars) are provided forinstalling a child restraint system.Some types of child restraints might not beable to be secured firmly due to projectionof the seat cushion.In this seating position, you should useonly a child restraint system that has abottom base that fits snugly against thecontours of the seat cushion and can besecurely retained using the seatbelt.

C: Rear seat, center seating positionInstalling a child restraint system is notrecommended, although the A/ELR seat-belt and an upper anchorage (tetheranchorage) are provided in this position.Some types of child restraints might not beable to be secured firmly due to projectionof the seat cushion.In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has abottom base that fits snugly against thecontours of the seat cushion and can besecurely retained using the seatbelt.If it is unavoidable to install a childrestraint system in the rear seat’s centerseating position, lower the center headrestraint to the lowest position and installthe child restraint system by correctlypassing the rear center seatbelt throughthe belt guide.

WARNING

Put children aged 12 and under inthe rear seat properly restrained atall times. The SRS airbag deployswith considerable speed and forceand can injure or even kill children,especially if they are 12 years of ageand under and are not restrained orimproperly restrained. Because chil-dren are lighter and weaker thanadults, their risk of being injuredfrom deployment is greater.

For that reason, be sure to secureALL types of child restraint devices(including forward facing childseats) in the REAR seats at all times.You should choose a restraint de-vice which is appropriate for thechild’s age, height and weight. Ac-

cording to accident statistics, chil-dren are safer when properly re-strained in the rear seating posi-tions than in the front seating posi-tions.

WARNING

S I N CE YOUR VEH I C L E I SEQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’SSRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL AREARWARD FAC ING CH ILDSAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS-SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKSSERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TOTHE CHILD BY PLACING THECHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TOTHE SRS AIRBAG.

Black plate (51,1)


& Choosing a child restraintsystem

Choose a child restraint system that isappropriate for the child’s age and size(weight and height) in order to provide thechild with proper protection. The childrestraint system should meet all applic-able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi-cle Safety Standards for the United Statesor of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards for Canada. It can be identified bylooking for the label on the child restraintsystem or the manufacturer’s statement ofcompliance in the document attached tothe system.Also it is important for you to make surethat the child restraint system is compa-tible with the vehicle in which it will beused.

& Installing child restraint sys-tems with A/ELR seatbelt

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-belts can become hot in a vehiclethat has been closed up in sunnyweather; they could burn a smallchild. Check the child restraintsystem before you place a childin it.

. Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint system in your vehicle.Unsecured child restraint sys-tems can be thrown around in-side of the vehicle in a suddenstop, turn or accident; they canstrike and injure vehicle occu-pants as well as result in seriousinjuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraintsystem, follow the manufacturer’sinstructions supplied with it. Afterinstalling the child restraint system,check to ensure that it is heldsecurely in position. If it is not heldtight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in theevent of an accident may be in-creased.

! Installing a rearward facing childrestraint

1. Place the child restraint system in therear seating position.2. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the child restraint systemfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer.3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckleuntil you hear a click.


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (52,1)



4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from theretractor to change the retractor over fromthe Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)function. Then, allow the belt to rewindinto the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,clicks will be heard which indicate theretractor functions as ALR.

6. Push and pull the child restraintsystem forward and from side to side tocheck if it is firmly secured. Sometimes achild restraint can be more firmly securedby pushing it down into the seat cushionand then tightening the seatbelt.7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the beltto confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALRproperly functioning).

8. To remove the child restraint system,press the release button on the seatbeltbuckle and allow the belt to retractcompletely. The belt will return to theELR mode.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONTPASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SORISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATHTO THE CHILD BY PLACING THECHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THESRS AIRBAG.

Black plate (53,1)


NOTEWhen the child restraint system is nolonger in use, remove it and restore theELR function of the retractor. Thatfunction is restored by allowing theseatbelt to retract fully.

! Installing forward facing child re-straint

1. Place the child restraint system in therear seating position.2. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the child restraint systemfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer.3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckleuntil you hear a click.

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from theretractor to change the retractor over fromthe Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)function. Then, allow the belt to rewindinto the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,clicks will be heard which indicate theretractor functions as ALR.

6. Before having a child sit in the childrestraint system, move it back and forthand right and left to check if it is firmlysecured. Sometimes a child restraint canbe more firmly secured by pushing it downinto the seat cushion and then tighteningthe seatbelt.7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the beltto confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALRproperly functioning).


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (54,1)



4-door

5-door

8. If the child restraint system requires atop tether, latch the hook onto the toptether anchorage and tighten the toptether. Refer to “Top tether anchorages”

in this section for additional instructions.

9. To remove the child restraint system,press the release button on the seatbeltbuckle and allow the belt to retractcompletely. The belt will return to theELR mode.

NOTEWhen the child restraint system is nolonger in use, remove it and restore theELR function of the retractor. Thatfunction is restored by allowing theseatbelt to retract fully.

& Installing a booster seat

WARNING


. Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint system in your vehicle.Unsecured child restraint sys-tems can be thrown around in-side of the vehicle in a suddenstop, turn or accident; they canstrike and injure vehicle occu-pants as well as result in seriousinjuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraintsystem, follow the manufacturer’sinstructions supplied with it. Afterinstalling the child restraint system,check to ensure that it is heldsecurely in position. If it is not heldtight and secure, the danger of yourchild suffering personal injury in theevent of an accident may be in-

Black plate (55,1)


creased.

1. Place the booster seat in the rearseating position and sit the child on it. Thechild should sit well back on the boosterseat.2. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the booster seat and the childfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer.3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckleuntil you hear a click. Take care not totwist the seatbelt.Make sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the center of child’s shoulder andthat the lap belt is positioned as low aspossible on the child’s hips.

4. To remove the booster seat, press therelease button on the seatbelt buckle andallow the belt to retract.

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted orreversed. In an accident, this canincrease the risk or severity ofinjury to the child.

. Never place the shoulder beltunder the child’s arm or behindthe child’s back. If an accidentoccurs, this can increase the riskor severity of injury to the child.

. The seatbelt should fit snugly inorder to provide full restraint.Loose fitting belts are not as

effective in preventing or redu-cing injury.

. Place the lap belt as low aspossible on the child’s hips. Ahigh-positioned lap belt will in-crease the risk of sliding underthe lap belt and of the lap beltsliding up over the abdomen, andboth can result in serious inter-nal injury or death.

. Make sure the shoulder belt ispositioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. Placing theshoulder belt over the neck mayresult in neck injury during sud-den braking or in a collision.

& Installation of child restraintsystems by use of lower andtether anchorages (LATCH)

WARNING


. Do not leave an unsecured child


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (56,1)



restraint system in your vehicle.Unsecured child restraint sys-tems can be thrown around in-side of the vehicle in a suddenstop, turn or accident; they canstrike and injure vehicle occu-pants as well as result in seriousinjuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraintsystem, follow the manufacturer’sinstructions supplied with it. Afterinstalling the child restraint system,check to ensure that it is heldsecurely in position. If it is not heldtight and secure, the danger of yourchild suffering personal injury in theevent of an accident may be in-creased.

Some types of child restraint systems canbe installed on the rear seat of yourvehicle without use of the seatbelts. Suchchild restraint systems are secured to thedesignated anchorages provided on thevehicle body. The lower and tether an-chorages are sometimes referred to as theLATCH system (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren).

Your vehicle is equipped with four loweranchorages (bars) and three upper an-chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-modating such child restraint systems.

The lower anchorages (bars) are used forinstalling a child restraint system only onthe rear seat window-side seating posi-tions. For each window-side seating posi-tion, two lower anchorages are provided.Each lower anchorage is located wherethe seat cushion meets the seatback.

Black plate (57,1)


*: For the Latin American models, a tetheranchorage is not provided in this centerlocation.

The tether anchorages (upper an-chorages) are provided at the locationsshown in the above illustration.

You will find marks “ ” at the bottom ofthe rear seat seatbacks. These marksindicate the positions of the lower an-chorages (bars).

Each lower anchorage is located wherethe seat cushion meets the seatback.

1. Use the “ ” marks to locate the twolower anchorages (bars) for the positionwhere you want to install the child restraintsystem.

2. While following the instructions sup-plied by the child restraint system manu-facturer, connect the lower hooks onto thelower anchorages located at “ ” marks onthe bottom of the rear seatback. When thehooks are connected, make sure theadjacent seatbelts are not caught.


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (58,1)



3. [If your child restraint system is of aflexible attachment type (which usestether belts to connect the child restraintsystem properly to the lower anchorages)]While pushing the child restraint into theseat cushion, pull both left and right lowertether belts up to secure the child restraintsystem firmly by taking up the slack in thebelt.4. Connect the top tether hook to thetether anchorage and firmly tighten thetether.For information on how to set the toptether, refer to “Top tether anchorages” inthis section.

5. Before seating a child in the childrestraint system, try to move seat backand forth and right and left to verify that itis held securely in position.6. To remove the child restraint system,follow the reverse procedures of installa-tion.

If you have any question concerning thistype of child restraint system, ask yourSUBARU dealer.

& Top tether anchoragesYour vehicle is equipped with two or threetop tether anchorages so that a childrestraint system having a top tether canbe installed in the rear seat. Wheninstalling a child restraint system usingtop tether, proceed as follows, whileobserving the instructions by the childrestraint system manufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additionalstability by offering another connectionbetween a child restraint system and thevehicle, we recommend that you use a toptether whenever one is required or avail-able.

Black plate (59,1)


! Anchorage location

! 4-door

1) For left seat2) For center seat3) For right seat

Three upper anchorages are installed onthe rear shelf behind the rear seat.

! 5-door

1) For left seat2) For center seat (For the Latin American

models, a tether anchorage is not pro-vided in this center location.)

3) For right seat


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (60,1)



There are two or three anchorages foreach seating position on the rear wall ofthe cargo area.

! To hook the top tether

! 4-door

1. Attach the child restraint top tetherhook to the appropriate upper anchorage.2. Tighten the top tether securely.

Please contact your SUBARU dealer ifyou have any question regarding theinstallation of a child restraint system.

! 5-door

1. Remove the headrest at the window-side seating position where the childrestraint system has been installed withthe lower anchorages or seatbelt; lift upthe headrest while pressing the releasebutton. Store the headrest in the cargoarea. Avoid placing the headrest in thepassenger compartment to prevent it frombeing thrown around in the passengercompartment in a sudden stop or a sharpturn.

2. For both window-side seating posi-tions, remove the cover for the appropriateupper anchorage.

NOTEFor Latin America model, there is a toptether cover on the floor cover.

Black plate (61,1)


3. Attach the child restraint top tetherhook to the appropriate upper anchorage.4. Tighten the top tether securely.

Please contact your SUBARU dealer ifyou have any question regarding theinstallation of a child restraint system.

CAUTION

Always remove the headrest whenmounting a child restraint systemwith a top tether. Otherwise, the toptether cannot be fastened tightly.

*SRS airbag (SupplementalRestraint System airbag)

*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-straint system. This name is used be-cause the airbag system supplements thevehicle’s seatbelts.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crashsensing and diagnostic module, which willrecord the use of the seatbelt by the frontpassenger when any of the SRS frontal,side and curtain airbags deploys.

& Vehicle with SRS airbags andlap/shoulder restraints fordriver, front passenger, andwindow-side rear passengers

Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-mental restraint system in addition to alap/shoulder belt at each front seatingposition and each rear window-side seat-ing positions. The supplemental restraintsystem (SRS) consists of six airbags.The configurations are as follows:. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontalairbags. Driver’s and front passenger’s sideairbags. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-senger, and window-side rear passen-

gers)

These SRS airbags are designed onlyas a supplement to the primary protec-tion provided by the seatbelt.The system also controls front seatbeltpretensioners. For operation instructionsand precautions concerning the seatbeltpretensioner, refer to the “Front seatbeltpretensioners” section in this chapter.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection inthe event of an accident, thedriver and all passengers in thevehicle should always wear seat-belts when the vehicle is moving.The SRS airbag is designed onlyas a supplement to the primaryprotection provided by the seat-belt. It does not do away with theneed to fasten seatbelts. In com-bination with the seatbelts, itoffers the best combined protec-tion in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increasesthe chance of severe injury ordeath in a crash even when thevehicle has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautionsconcerning the seatbelt system,


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (62,1)



refer to the “Seatbelts” section inthis chapter.

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarilyclose to the SRS airbag. Becausethe SRS airbag deploys withconsiderable speed – faster thanthe blink of an eye – and force toprotect in high speed collisions,the force of an airbag can injurean occupant whose body is tooclose to SRS airbag.

It is also important to wear yourseatbelt to help avoid injuriesthat can result when the SRSairbag contacts an occupant notin proper position such as onethrown forward during pre-acci-dent braking.

Even when properly positioned,there remains a possibility thatan occupant may suffer minorinjury such as abrasions andbruises to the face or armsbecause of the SRS airbag de-ployment force.

. The SRS airbags deploy withconsiderable speed and force.Occupants who are out of properposition when the SRS airbagdeploys could suffer very seriousinjuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-ment, the driver should alwayssit upright and well back in theseat as far from the steeringwheel as practical while stillmaintaining full vehicle controland the front passenger shouldmove the seat as far back aspossible and sit upright and wellback in the seat.

. Do not place any objects over ornear the SRS airbag cover orbetween you and the SRS airbag.If the SRS airbag deploys, thoseobjects could interfere with itsproper operation and could bepropelled inside the vehicle andcause injury.

WARNING

. Put children aged 12 and under inthe rear seat properly restrainedat all times. The SRS airbagdeploys with considerable speedand force and can injure or evenkill children, especially if they are12 years of age and under andare not restrained or improperlyrestrained. Because children arelighter and weaker than adults,their risk of being injured fromdeployment is greater.

For that reason, we stronglyrecommend that ALL children(including those in child seatsand those that have outgrownchild restraint devices) sit in theREAR seat properly restrained atall times in a child restraintdevice or in a seatbelt, whicheveris appropriate for the child’s age,height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child re-straint devices (including for-ward facing child seats) in theREAR seats at all times.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seating

Black plate (63,1)


positions than in the front seat-ing positions.

For instructions and precautionsconcerning the child restraintsystem, refer to the “Child re-straint systems” section in thischapter.

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARDFACING CHILD SEAT IN THEFRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKSSERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TOTHE CHILD BY PLACING THECHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TOTHE SRS AIRBAG.

. Never allow a child to stand up,or to kneel on the front passen-ger’s seat, or never hold a childon your lap or in your arms. TheSRS airbag deploys with consid-erable force and can injure oreven kill the child.

CAUTION

. When the SRS airbag deploys,some smoke will be released.This smoke could cause breath-ing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or otherbreathing trouble. If you or yourpassengers have breathing pro-

blems after SRS airbag deploys,get fresh air promptly.

. A deploying SRS airbag releaseshot gas. Occupants could getburned if they come into directcontact with the hot gas.

NOTEWhen you sell your vehicle, we urgeyou to explain to the buyer that it isequipped with SRS airbags by alertinghim or her to the applicable section inthis Owner’s Manual.


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (64,1)



! Components

1) Airbag control module (including impactsensors)

2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s

side)4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)

5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand

side)

9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-hand side)

10) Airbag wiring (yellow)11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s

side)13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

right-hand side)14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side)15) Curtain airbag module (right side)16) Curtain airbag module (left side)17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s

side)18) Front passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-

sor19) Front passenger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor20) Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator22) SRS airbag system warning light23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear

center seat)

Black plate (65,1)


& Subaru advanced frontal air-bag system

Your vehicle is equipped with a Subaruadvanced frontal airbag system that com-plies with the new advanced frontal airbagrequirements in the amended FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)No. 208.The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys-tem automatically determines the deploy-ment force of the driver’s SRS frontalairbag at the time of deployment as well aswhether or not to activate the frontpassenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, ifactivated, the deployment force of theSRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy-ment.Your vehicle has warning labels on thedriver’s and front passenger’s sun visorsbeginning with the phrase “EVEN WITHADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tagattached to the glove box lid beginningwith the phrase “Even with Advanced AirBags”. Make sure that you carefully readthe instructions on the warning labels andtag.Always wear your seatbelt. The Subaruadvanced frontal airbag system is asupplemental restraint system and mustbe used in combination with a seatbelt. Alloccupants should wear a seatbelt or beseated in an appropriate child restraint

system.The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowedin the center portion of the steering wheel.The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagis stowed near the top of the dashboardunder an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision,the driver’s and front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbags deploy and supplement theseatbelts by reducing the impact on thedriver’s and front passenger’s head andchest.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONTSEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUSINJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEADTOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

Never allow a child to stand up, or tokneel on the front passenger’s seat.The SRS airbag deploys with con-siderable force and can injure oreven kill the child.


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (66,1)



WARNING

Never hold a child on your lap or inyour arms. The SRS airbag deployswith considerable force and caninjure or even kill the child.

WARNING

The SRS airbag deploys with con-siderable speed and force. Occu-pants who are out of proper positionwhen the SRS airbag deploys couldsuffer very serious injuries. Be-cause the SRS airbag needs enoughspace for deployment, the drivershould always sit upright and wellback in the seat as far from thesteering wheel as practical whilestill maintaining full vehicle controland the front passenger shouldmove the seat as far back aspossible and sit upright and wellback in the seat.

It is also important to wear your

seatbelt to help avoid injuries thatcan result when the SRS airbagcontacts an occupant not in properposition such as one thrown towardthe front of the vehicle during pre-accident braking.

WARNING

Do not put any objects over thesteering wheel pad and dashboard.If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,those objects could interfere with itsproper operation and could be pro-pelled inside the vehicle and causeinjury.

Black plate (67,1)


WARNING

Do not attach accessories to thewindshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-ror over the rear view mirror. If theSRS airbag deploys, those objectscould become projectiles that couldseriously injure vehicle occupants.

! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses adual stage inflator. The inflator operates indifferent ways depending on the severityof impact.

Have the system inspected by yourSUBARU dealer immediately if the SRSairbag system warning light illuminates.

NOTEThe driver’s SRS side airbag, SRScurtain airbag and seatbelt preten-sioner are not controlled by the Subaruadvanced frontal airbag system.

! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-bag

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbaguses a dual stage inflator. The inflatoroperates in different ways depending onthe severity of impact.The total load on the seat is monitored bythe occupant detection system’s weightsensor located under the seat.The system has another sensor thatmonitors the tension of the front passen-ger seatbelt. Using the total seat load andseatbelt tension data from the sensors,the occupant detection system determineswhether the front passenger’s SRS frontalairbag should or should not be inflated.The occupant detection system may notinflate the front passenger’s SRS frontalairbag even when the driver’s SRS frontalairbag deploys. This is normal.Observe the following precautions. Failureto do so may prevent the Subaru ad-vanced frontal airbag system from func-tioning correctly or cause the system tofail.. Do not apply any strong impact to the

front passenger’s seat such as by kicking.. Do not spill liquid on the front passen-ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it offimmediately.. Do not remove or disassemble the frontpassenger’s seat.. Do not install any accessory (such asan audio amplifier) other than a genuineSUBARU accessory under the front pas-senger’s seat.. Do not place anything (shoes, umbrel-la, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat.. The front passenger’s seat must not beused with the head restraint removed.. Do not leave any article including achild restraint system on the front passen-ger’s seat or the seatbelt tongue andbuckle engaged when you leave yourvehicle.. Do not place a magnet near theseatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.. Do not use front seats with their back-ward-forward position and seatback notbeing locked into place securely. If any ofthem are not locked securely, adjust themagain. For adjusting procedure, refer tothe “Front seats” section in this chapter.

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or frontpassenger’s occupant detection systemhave failed, the SRS airbag systemwarning light will illuminate. Have the


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (68,1)



system inspected by your SUBARU deal-er immediately if the SRS airbag systemwarning light comes on.If your vehicle has sustained impact, thismay affect the proper function of theSubaru advanced frontal airbag system.Have your vehicle inspected at yourSUBARU dealer.

NOTEThe front passenger’s SRS side airbag,SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pre-tensioner are not controlled by theSubaru advanced frontal airbag sys-tem.

! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON andOFF indicators

ON or : Front passenger’s frontal airbagON indicator

or : Front passenger’s frontal airbagOFF indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ONand OFF indicators show you the status ofthe front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.The indicators are located next to theclock in the center portion of the dash-board.When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, both the ON and OFFindicators illuminate for 6 seconds duringwhich time the system is checked. Follow-ing the system check, both indicatorsextinguish for 2 seconds. After that, oneof the indicators illuminates depending on

the status of the front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbag determined by the Subaruadvanced frontal airbag system monitor-ing.If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagis activated, the passenger’s frontal airbagON indicator will illuminate while the OFFindicator will remain extinguished.If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagis deactivated, the passenger’s frontalairbag ON indicator will remain extin-guished while the OFF indicator willilluminate.With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”position, if both the ON and OFF indica-tors remain lit or extinguished simulta-neously even after the system checkperiod, the system is faulty. Contact yourSUBARU dealer immediately for an in-spection.

! Conditions in which front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag is notactivated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagwill not be activated when any of thefollowing conditions are met regarding thefront passenger’s seat:. The seat is empty.. The seat is equipped with a rearwardfacing child restraint system and an infantis restrained with it. (See WARNING that

Black plate (69,1)


follows.). The seat is equipped with a forwardfacing child restraint system and a smallchild is restrained with it. (See WARNINGthat follows.). The seat is equipped with a boosterseat and a small child is in the boosterseat. (See WARNING that follows.). The seat is relieved of the occupantload for a time exceeding the predeter-mined monitoring time period.. The seat is occupied by a child whohas outgrown a child restraint system(See WARNING that follows.) or by asmall adult.. The front passenger’s occupant detec-tion system is faulty.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONTPASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THEFRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Besure to install it in the REAR seat ina correct manner. Also, it is stronglyrecommended that any forward fa-cing child seat or booster seat beinstalled in the REAR seat, and thateven children who have outgrown achild restraint system be also

seated in the REAR seat. This isbecause children sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat may be killed orseverely injured should the frontpassenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-ploy. REAR seats are the safestplace for children.

When the front passenger’s seat is occu-pied by a child, observe the followingprecautions. Failure to do so may increasethe load on the front passenger’s seat,activating the front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbag even though that seat isoccupied by a child.. Do not place any article on the seatother than the child occupant and a childrestraint system.. Do not place more than one child onthe seat.. Do not install any accessory such as atable or TV onto the seatback.. Do not store a heavy load in theseatback pocket.. Do not allow the rear seat occupant toplace his/her hands or legs on the frontpassenger’s seatback, or allow him/her topull the seatback.

! If the front passenger’s frontal air-bag ON indicator illuminates and theOFF indicator extinguishes evenwhen an infant or a small child is ina child restraint system (includingbooster seat)

Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”position if the front passenger’s frontalairbag ON indicator illuminates and theOFF indicator extinguishes even when aninfant or a small child is in a child restraintsystem (including booster seat). Removethe child restraint system from the seat. Byreferring to the child restraint manufac-turer’s recommendations as well as thechild restraint system installation proce-dures in the “Child restraint systems”section in this chapter, correctly installthe child restraint system. Turn the ignitionswitch to the “ON” position and make surethat the front passenger’s frontal airbagON indicator goes out and the OFFindicator comes on.

If still the ON indicator remains illuminatedwhile the OFF indicator extinguishes, takethe following actions.. Ensure that no article is placed on theseat other than the child restraint systemand the child occupant.. Ensure that there is no article left in theseatback pocket.


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (70,1)



. Ensure that the backward-forward po-sition and seatback of front passenger’sseat are locked into place securely bymoving the seat back and forth.

If the ON indicator still illuminates whilethe OFF indicator extinguishes after takingrelevant corrective actions describedabove, relocate the child restraint systemto the rear seat and immediately contactyour SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTEWhen a child who has outgrown a childrestraint system or a small adult isseated in the front passenger’s seat,the Subaru advanced frontal airbagsystem may or may not activate thefront passenger’s SRS frontal airbagdepending on the occupant’s seatingposture. If the front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbag is activated (the ONindicator illuminates while the OFFindicator extinguishes), take the follow-ing actions.. Ensure that no article is placed onthe seat other than the occupant.. Ensure that there is no article left inthe seatback pocket.

If the ON indicator still illuminates whilethe OFF indicator extinguishes despitethe fact that the actions noted above

have been taken, seat the child/smalladult in the rear seat and immediatelycontact your SUBARU dealer for aninspection. Even if the system haspassed the dealer inspection, it isrecommended that on subsequent tripsthe child/small adult always take therear seat.

Children who have outgrown a childrestraint system should always wear theseatbelt irrespective of whether the airbagis deactivated or activated.

! Conditions in which front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagwill be activated for deployment uponimpact when any of the following condi-tions are met regarding the front passen-ger’s seat.. When the seat is occupied by an adult.. When a heavy article is placed on theseat.

When the front passenger’s seat is occu-pied by an adult, observe the followingprecautions. Failure to do so may lessenthe load on the front passenger’s seat,deactivating the front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbag despite the fact that the seatis occupied by an adult.. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

lift the front passenger’s seat cushionusing his/her feet.. Do not place any article under the frontpassenger’s seat, or squeeze any articlefrom behind and under the seat. This maylift the seat cushion.. Do not squeeze any article betweenthe front passenger’s seat and side trim/pillar, door or center console box. Thismay lift the seat cushion.

! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFFindicator illuminates and the ONindicator extinguishes even whenthe front passenger’s seat is occu-pied by an adult

This can be caused by the adult incor-rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”position. Ask the front passenger to setthe seatback to the upright position, sit upstraight in the center of the seat cushion,correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/her legs out forward, and adjust the seat tothe rearmost position. Turn the ignitionswitch to the “ON” position. If the OFFindicator remains illuminated while the ONindicator remains extinguished, take thefollowing actions.. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”position.. Ensure that there are no articles,

Black plate (71,1)


books, shoes, or other objects trappedunder the seat, at the rear of the seat, oron the side of the seat.. Ensure that the backward-forward po-sition and seatback of front passenger’sseat are locked into place securely bymoving the seat back and forth.. Next, turn the ignition switch to the“ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allowthe system to complete self-checking.Following the system check, both indica-tors extinguish for 2 seconds. Now, theON indicator should illuminate while theOFF indicator remains extinguished.

If the OFF indicator still illuminates whilethe ON indicator remains extinguished,ask the occupant to move to the rear seatand immediately contact your SUBARUdealer for an inspection.

! Effect vehicle modifications madefor persons with disabilities mayhave on Subaru advanced frontalairbag system operation (U.S. only)

Changing or moving any parts of the frontseats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,front side frame, radiator panel, instrumentpanel, combination meter, steering wheel,steering column, tire, suspension or floorpanel can affect the operation of theSubaru advanced airbag system. If youhave any questions, you may contact the

following Subaru distributors:

<Continental U.S., Alaska and the Districtof Columbia>Subaru of America, Inc.Customer Dealer Services DepartmentP.O. Box 6000Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-60001-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

<Hawaii>Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,HI 96819808-839-2273

<Guam>Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-bile491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,Guam671-633-2698

<Puerto Rico>Trebol MotorsP.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico00910787-793-2828

There are currently no Subaru distributorsin any other U.S. territories. If you are insuch an area, please contact the Subarudistributor or dealer from which you

bought your vehicle.


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (72,1)



! Operation

A) Driver’s sideB) Passenger’s side1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not

obstructed.

The SRS airbag can function only whenthe ignition switch is in the “ON” position.The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys-tem is designed to determine the activa-tion or deactivation condition of the frontpassenger’s SRS frontal airbag depend-ing on the total load on the front passen-ger’s seat monitored by the front passen-ger’s occupant detection system weightsensor. For this reason, only the driver’sSRS frontal airbag may deploy in theevent of a collision, but this does not meanfailure of the system.

If the front sub sensors and the impactsensors in the airbag control moduledetect a predetermined amount of forceduring a frontal collision, the controlmodule sends signals to the airbagmodule(s) (only driver’s module or bothdriver’s and front passenger’s modules)instructing the module(s) to inflate theSRS frontal airbag(s). The driver’s andfront passenger’s SRS frontal airbags usedual stage inflators.

Black plate (73,1)


The two inflators of each airbag aretriggered either sequentially or simulta-neously, depending on the severity ofimpact, in the case of the driver’s SRSfrontal airbag and depending on theseverity of impact and the total load onthe seat in the case of the front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag. After deploy-ment, the SRS airbag immediately startsto deflate so that the driver’s vision is notobstructed. The time required from detect-ing impact to the deflation of the SRSairbag after deployment is shorter than theblink of an eye.

Both when only the driver’s SRS frontalairbag deploys and the driver’s and frontpassenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbeltpretensioners operate at the same time.

Although it is highly unlikely that the SRSairbag would activate in a non-accidentsituation, should it occur, the SRS airbagwill deflate quickly, not obscuring visionand will not interfere with the driver’sability to maintain control of the vehicle.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,fairly loud inflation noise will be heard andsome smoke will be released. Theseoccurrences are a normal result of thedeployment. This smoke does not indicatea fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag systemcomponents around the steeringwheel and dashboard with barehands right after deployment. Doingso can cause burns because thecomponents can be very hot as aresult of deployment.

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and frontpassenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-signed to deploy in the event of anaccident involving a moderate to severefrontal collision. It is basically not designedto deploy in lesser frontal impacts be-cause the necessary protection can beachieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, theyare basically not designed to deploy inside or rear impacts or in roll-over acci-dents because deployment of only thedriver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’sand front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagswould not help the occupant in thosesituations. The driver’s and front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed tofunction on a one-time-only basis.

SRS airbag deployment depends on thelevel of force experienced in the passen-ger compartment during a collision. Thatlevel differs from one type of collision toanother, and it may have no bearing on

the visible damage done to the vehicleitself.

! Example of accident in which thedriver’s/driver’s and front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will mostlikely deploy.

A head-on collision against a thick con-crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activatesonly the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or bothdriver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontalairbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-vated when the vehicle is exposed to afrontal impact similar in fashion andmagnitude to the collision describedabove.


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (74,1)



! Examples of the types of accidentsin which it is possible that thedriver’s/driver’s and front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de-ploy.

Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag orboth driver’s and front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbags may be activated when thevehicle sustains a hard impact in theundercarriage area from the road surface(such as when the vehicle plunges into adeep ditch, is severely impacted orknocked hard against an obstacle on theroad such as a curb).

Black plate (75,1)


! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’sand front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur.

1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as atelephone pole or sign pole.

2) The vehicle slides under the load bed ofa truck.

3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offsetfrontal impact.

4) The vehicle sustains an offset sidecollision.


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (76,1)



There are many types of collisions whichmight not necessarily require deploymentof driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’sSRS frontal airbag(s). In the event ofaccidents like those illustrated, the dri-ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-ing on the level of accident forces in-volved.

! Examples of the types of accidentsin which the driver’s/driver’s andfront passenger’s SRS frontalairbag(s) will basically not deploy.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbags are designed basically not

to deploy if the vehicle is struck from theside or from behind, or if it rolls onto itsside or roof, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision.

1) First impact2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle isimpacted more than once, the driver’sand/or front passenger’s SRS frontalairbag(s) will deploy only once on the firstimpact.

Example: In the case of a double collision,first with another vehicle, then against aconcrete wall in immediate succession,once either or both of the driver’s and frontpassenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/areactivated on the first impact, it/they will notbe activated on the second impact.

Black plate (77,1)


& SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag

The SRS side airbag is stored in the doorside of each front seat seatback, whichbears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.In a moderate to severe side impactcollision, the SRS side airbag on theimpacted side of the vehicle deploysbetween the occupant and the door paneland supplements the seatbelt by reducingthe impact on the occupant’s chest andwaist. The SRS side airbag operates onlyfor front seat occupants.The SRS curtain airbag on each side ofthe cabin is stored in the roof side(between the front pillar and a point overthe rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark islocated at the top of each center pillar.In a moderate to severe side impactcollision, the SRS curtain airbag on theimpacted side of the vehicle deploysbetween the occupant and the sidewindow and supplements the seatbelt byreducing the impact on the occupant’shead.

WARNING

The SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag are designed as onlya supplement to the primary protec-tion provided by the seatbelt. They

do not do away with the need tofasten seatbelts. It is also importantto wear your seatbelt to help avoidinjuries that can result when anoccupant is not seated in a properupright position.

WARNING

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarilyclose to either front door. TheSRS side airbag is stored in bothfront seat seatbacks next to thedoor, and it provides protectionby deploying rapidly (faster thanthe blink of an eye) in the event ofa side impact collision. However,the force of SRS side airbagdeployment may cause injuries

if your head or other parts of thebody are too close to the SRSside airbag.

. Since your vehicle is equippedwith SRS curtain airbags, do notsit or lean unnecessarily close tothe front or rear door on eitherside. Also, do not put your head,arms and hands out of the win-dow. The SRS curtain airbag oneach side of the cabin is stored inthe roof side (between the frontpillar and a point over the rearseat), and it provides protectionby deploying rapidly (faster thanthe blink of an eye) in the event ofa side impact. However, the forceof its deployment may causeinjuries if your head is too closeto it.


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (78,1)



WARNING

Do not rest your arm on either frontdoor or its internal trim. It could beinjured in the event of SRS sideairbag deployment.

WARNING

. Never allow a child to kneel onthe front passenger’s seat facingthe side window or to wrap his/her arms around the front seatseatback. In the event of anaccident, the force of the SRSside airbag deployment couldinjure the child seriously be-cause his/her head or arms orother parts of the body are tooclose to the SRS side airbag.

Since your vehicle is alsoequipped with a front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag, childrenaged 12 and under should beplaced in the rear seat anywayand should be properly re-strained at all times.

. Never allow a child to kneel onany passenger’s seat facing theside window or put their head,arms and hands out of the win-dow. In the event of an accident,the force of the SRS curtainairbag deployment could injurethe child seriously because his/her head is close to the SRScurtain airbag.

Black plate (79,1)


WARNING

. Do not attach accessories to thedoor trim or near either SRS sideairbags and do not place objectsnear the SRS side airbags. In theevent of the SRS side airbagdeployment, they could be pro-pelled dangerously toward thevehicle’s occupants and causeinjuries.

. Do not attach a hands-free micro-phone or any other accessory toa front pillar, a center pillar, a rearpillar, the windshield, a side win-dow, an assist grip, or any othercabin surface that would be neara deploying SRS curtain airbag.

A hands-free microphone orother accessory in such a loca-tion could be propelled throughthe cabin with great force by thecurtain airbag, or it could preventcorrect deployment of the curtainairbag. In either case, the resultcould be serious injuries.

. Never hang or place coat hangersor other hard or pointed objectsnear the side windows. If suchitems are present when the SRScurtain airbags deploy, theycould be thrown through thepassenger compartment andcause serious injuries. Theycould also prevent proper opera-tion of the SRS curtain airbags.

WARNING

Do not put any kind of cover orclothes or other objects over eitherfront seatback and do not attachlabels or stickers to the front seatsurface on or near the SRS sideairbag. They could prevent properdeployment of the SRS side airbag,reducing protection available to thefront seat’s occupant.

! Operation

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtainairbag can function only when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRSside airbags and SRS curtain airbags


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (80,1)



deploy independently of each other sinceeach has its own impact sensor. There-fore, they may not both deploy in the sameaccident. Also, the SRS side airbag andSRS curtain airbag deploys independentlyof the driver’s and front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbags in the steering wheel andinstrument panel.

An impact sensor, which senses impactforce, is located in each of the left andright center pillars and rear wheel houses.Another impact sensor, which also sensesimpact force, is located under the rearcenter seat. If one of the center pillarimpact sensors and the impact sensor thatis located under the rear center seattogether sense an impact force above apredetermined level in a side collision, thecontrol module causes both the SRS sideairbag and curtain airbag on the impactedside to inflate regardless of whether therear wheel house impact sensor on thesame side senses an impact. If one of therear wheel house impact sensors and theimpact sensor that is located under therear center seat together sense a suffi-ciently strong impact force, the controlmodule causes only the SRS curtainairbag on the impacted side to inflate.After the deployment, the SRS side airbagimmediately starts to deflate. The timerequired from detection of an impact to

deflation of an SRS side airbag afterdeployment is shorter than the blink ofan eye.The SRS curtain airbag remains inflatedfor a while following deployment thenslowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtainairbag deploy even when no one occupiesthe seat on the side on which an impact isapplied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loudinflation noise will be heard and somesmoke will be released. These occur-rences are a normal result of the deploy-ment. This smoke does not indicate a firein the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbagsystem components around thefront seat seatback with bare handsright after deployment. Doing so cancause burns because the compo-nents can be very hot as a result ofdeployment.

After deployment, do not touch anypart of the SRS curtain airbagsystem (from the front pillar to thepart of the roof side over the rear

seat). Doing so can cause burnsbecause the components can bevery hot as a result of deployment.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtainairbag are designed to deploy in the eventof an accident involving a moderate tosevere side impact collision. It is basicallynot designed to deploy in a lesser sideimpact. Also, it is basically not designed todeploy in frontal or rear impacts becauseSRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbagdeployment would not help the occupantin those situations.Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtainairbag are designed to function on a one-time-only basis.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbagdeployment depend on the level of forceexperienced in the passenger compart-ment during a side impact collision. Thatlevel differs from one type of collision toanother, and it may have no bearing onthe visible damage done to the vehicleitself.

Black plate (81,1)


! Example of the type of accident inwhich the SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag will most likely de-ploy.

A severe side impact near the front seatactivates the SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag.


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (82,1)



! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag are unlikely to deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in an obliqueside-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-onimpact in an area outside the vicinity ofthe passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole orsimilar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-onimpact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.

There are many types of collisions whichmight not necessarily require SRS sideairbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy-ment. In the event of accidents like thoseillustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag may not deploy dependingon the level of accident forces involved.

Black plate (83,1)


! Examples of the types of accidentsin which the SRS side airbag andSRS curtain airbag will basically notdeploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collisionwith another vehicle (moving or station-ary).

2) The vehicle is struck from behind.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtainairbag are basically not designed todeploy if the vehicle is involved in a frontalcollision or is struck from behind. Exam-ples of such accidents are illustrated.

1) First impact2) Second impactA) SRS curtain airbagB) SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is struckfrom the side more than once, the SRSside airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployonly once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double sideimpact collision, first with one vehicle andimmediately followed by another from thesame direction, once the SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag are activated onthe first impact, they will not be activatedon the second.

& SRS airbag system monitors

Turbo models


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (84,1)



Non-turbo models

A diagnostic system continually monitorsthe readiness of the SRS airbag system(including front seatbelt pretensioners)while the vehicle is being driven. TheSRS airbag system warning light “AIR-BAG” will show normal system operationby lighting for approximately 6 secondswhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position.

The following components are monitoredby the indicator:. Front sub sensor (right-hand side). Front sub sensor (left-hand side). Airbag control module (including im-pact sensors). Frontal airbag module (driver’s side). Frontal airbag module (front passen-

ger’s side). Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-hand side). Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand side). Side airbag module (driver’s side). Side airbag module (front passenger’sside). Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheelhouse right-hand side). Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheelhouse left-hand side). Curtain airbag module (right side). Curtain airbag module (left side). Satellite safing sensor (under the rearcenter seat). Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side). Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-ger’s side). Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-ger’s side). Front passenger’s seatbelt tensionsensor. Front passenger’s occupant detectionsystem weight sensor. Front passenger’s occupant detectioncontrol module. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ONand OFF indicator. All related wiring

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any ofthe following conditions, there maybe a malfunction in the seatbeltpretensioners and/or SRS airbagsystem. Immediately take your vehi-cle to your nearest SUBARU dealerto have the system checked. Unlesschecked and properly repaired, theseatbelt pretensioners and/or SRSairbag will not operate properly inthe event of a collision, which mayincrease the risk of injury.





Black plate (85,1)


& SRS airbag system servicing

WARNING

. When discarding an airbag mod-ule or scrapping the entire vehi-cle damaged by a collision, con-sult your SUBARU dealer.

. The SRS airbag has no user-serviceable parts. Do not useelectrical test equipment on anycircuit related to the SRS airbagsystem. For required servicing ofthe SRS airbag, see your nearestSUBARU dealer. Tampering withor disconnecting the system’swiring could result in accidentalinflation of the SRS airbag orcould make the system inopera-tive, which may result in seriousinjury.

CAUTION

If you need service or repair in areasindicated in the following list, havean authorized SUBARU dealer per-form the work. The SRS airbagcontrol module, impact sensorsand airbag modules are stored inthese areas.

. Under the center console

. On both the right and left sides atthe front of the vehicle

. Steering wheel and column andnearby areas

. Top of the dashboard on frontpassenger’s side and nearbyareas

. Each front seat and nearby area

. Inside each center pillar

. In each roof side (from the frontpillar to a point over the rear seat)

. Between the rear seat cushionand rear wheel house on eachside

. Under the rear center seat

In the event that the SRS airbag isdeployed, replacement of the systemshould be performed only by an author-ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-nents of the SRS airbag system arereplaced, use only genuine SUBARUparts.

NOTEIn the following cases, contact yourSUBARU dealer as soon as possible.. The front part of the vehicle wasinvolved in an accident in which only

the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or bothdriver’s and front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbags did not deploy.. The pad of the steering wheel, thecover over the front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbag, or either roof side (fromthe front pillar to a point over the rearseat) is scratched, cracked, or other-wise damaged.. Center pillar, rear wheel house orrear sub frame, or an area near theseparts, was involved in an accident inwhich the SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag did not deploy.. The fabric or leather of either frontseatback is cut, frayed, or otherwisedamaged.

& Precautions against vehiclemodification

WARNING

. To avoid accidental activation ofthe system or rendering the sys-tem inoperative, which may re-sult in serious injury, no modifi-cations should be made to anycomponents or wiring of the SRSairbag system.

This includes following modifica-tions:


– CONTINUED –

1

Black plate (86,1)



. Installation of custom steeringwheels

. Attachment of additional trimmaterials to the dashboard

. Installation of custom seats

. Replacement of seat fabric orleather

. Installation of additional fabricor leather on the front seat

. Attachment of a hands-freemicrophone or any other ac-cessory to a front pillar, acenter pillar, a rear pillar, thewindshield, a side window, anassist grip, or any other cabinsurface that would be near adeploying SRS curtain airbag.

. Installation of additional elec-trical/electronic equipmentsuch as a mobile two-wayradio on or near the SRSairbag system componentsand/or wiring is not advisable.This could interfere with prop-er operation of the SRS airbagsystem.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the followingmodifications. Such modificationscan interfere with proper operationof the SRS airbag system.

. Attachment of any equipment(bush bar, winches, snow plow,skid plate, etc.) other than genu-ine SUBARU accessory parts tothe front end.

. Modification of the suspensionsystem or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of differentsize and construction from thetires specified on the vehicleplacard attached to the driver’sdoor pillar or specified for indivi-dual vehicle models in this Own-er’s Manual.

. Attachment of any equipment(side steps or side sill protectors,etc.) other than genuine SUBARUaccessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer ifyou want to install any accessory parts onyour vehicle.

Black plate (3,1)


Keys ..................................................................... 2-2Key number plate................................................ 2-2

Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-2Security ID plate.................................................. 2-3Security indicator light ........................................ 2-3Key replacement ................................................. 2-4

Door locks ........................................................... 2-4Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-4Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-5

Power door locking switches............................. 2-6Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-6

Remote keyless entry system ............................ 2-7Locking the doors ............................................... 2-8Unlocking the doors ............................................ 2-8Unlocking the trunk lid/rear gate.......................... 2-9Illuminated entry ................................................. 2-9Vehicle finder function......................................... 2-9Sounding a panic alarm....................................... 2-9Selecting audible signal operation ....................... 2-9Replacing the battery ......................................... 2-10Replacing lost transmitters ................................. 2-10

Alarm system..................................................... 2-14System operation............................................... 2-14Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-14If you have accidentally triggered the alarmsystem ............................................................ 2-14

Arming the system ............................................ 2-15Disarming the system ........................................ 2-16Valet mode ........................................................ 2-16Passive arming.................................................. 2-17Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-18Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-18

Child safety locks .............................................. 2-19Windows............................................................. 2-19

Power windows ................................................. 2-19Trunk lid (4-door) ............................................... 2-21

To open and close the trunk lid from outside...... 2-21To open the trunk lid from inside........................ 2-21To lock and unlock the trunk lid releaselever................................................................ 2-22

Internal trunk lid release handle ......................... 2-22Rear gate (5-door).............................................. 2-23

Keys and doors

2

Black plate (88,1)


2-2 Keys and doors

Keys

1) Master key (Black)2) Submaster key (Black)3) Valet key (Gray)4) Key number plate5) Security ID plate

Three types of keys are provided for yourvehicle:Master key, submaster key and valet key.

The master key and submaster key fit alllocks on your vehicle.. Ignition switch. Driver’s door. Trunk lid release lever (4-door). Glove box

The valet key fits only the ignition switch

and driver’s door lock. You can keep thetrunk and glove box locked when youleave your vehicle and valet key at aparking facility.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder orkey case to either key. If it bangsagainst your knees while you aredriving, it could turn the ignitionswitch from the ON position to theAcc or OFF position, thereby stop-ping the engine.

& Key number plateThe key number is stamped on the keynumber plate attached to the key set.Write down the key number and keep it inanother safe place, not in the vehicle. Thisnumber is needed to make a replacementkey if you lose your key or lock it inside thevehicle.

Immobilizer

The immobilizer system is designed toprevent an unauthorized person fromstarting the engine. Only keys registeredwith your vehicle’s immobilizer system canbe used to operate your vehicle. Even ifan unregistered key fits into the ignitionswitch and can be turned to the “START”position, the engine will automatically stopafter several seconds.

Each immobilizer key contains a trans-ponder in which the key’s ID code isstored. When a key is inserted into theignition switch and turned to the “ON”position, the transponder transmits thekey’s ID code to the immobilizer system’sreceiver. If the transmitted ID codematches the ID code registered in theimmobilizer system, the system allows theengine to be started. Since the ID code istransmitted and acted upon almost in-stantly, the immobilizer system does notimpede normal starting of the engine.If the engine fails to start, pull out the keyonce before trying again. Refer to the“Ignition switch” section in chapter 3.

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules and with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions: (1) This

Black plate (89,1)


device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may causeundesired operation.Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

NOTETo protect your vehicle from theft,please pay close attention to the fol-lowing security precautions:. Never leave your vehicle unattendedwith its keys inside.. Before leaving your vehicle, close allwindows and lock the doors and reargate.. Do not leave spare keys or anyrecord of your key number in thevehicle.

CAUTION

. Do not place the key under directsunlight or anywhere it maybecome hot.

. Do not get the key wet. If the keygets wet, wipe it dry with a clothimmediately.

& Security ID plate

1) Key number plate2) Security ID plate

The security ID is stamped on the securityID plate attached to the key set. Writedown the security ID and keep it inanother safe place, not in the vehicle.This number is needed to make a replace-ment key if you lose your key or lock itinside the vehicle.This number is also needed for replace-ment or repair of the engine control unit,integrated unit, and combination meter.

& Security indicator light

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

The security indicator light deters potential

Keys and doors 2-3

– CONTINUED –

2

Black plate (90,1)


2-4 Keys and doors

thieves by indicating that the vehicle isequipped with an immobilizer system. Itbegins flashing (approximately once every3 seconds) approximately 60 secondsafter the ignition switch is turned from the“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK”position or immediately after the key ispulled out.If the security indicator light does not flash,the immobilizer system may be faulty. Ifthis occurs, contact your SUBARU dealeras soon as possible.

In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g.an imitation key), the security indicatorlight comes on.

NOTEEven if the security indicator lightflashes irregularly or its fuse blows(the light does not flash if its fuse isblown), the immobilizer system willfunction normally.

& Key replacementYour key number plate and security IDplate will be required if you ever need areplacement key made. Any new key mustbe registered for use with your vehicle’simmobilizer system before it can be used.Up to four keys can be registered for usewith one vehicle.For security, all the keys registered withyour vehicle’s immobilizer system willhave their ID codes erased and re-registered when a new key is made.Therefore, all of your vehicle’s keys mustbe presented when a new key is regis-tered. Any key that is not re-registeredwhen a new key is made cannot be usedafter the other keys are re-registered. Forinformation on replacement keys and onthe registration of keys with your immo-bilizer system, contact your SUBARUdealer.

NOTEA vehicle that is equipped with theremote engine start system as a dealeroption can register up to three keys foruse with one vehicle.

Door locks

& Locking and unlocking fromthe outside

To lock the driver’s door from the outsidewith the key, turn the key toward the rear.To unlock the door, turn the key toward thefront.

Pull the outside door handle to open anunlocked door.

Black plate (91,1)


1) Rotate the lock lever rearward.2) Close the door.

To lock the door from the outside withoutthe key, rotate the lock lever rearward andthen close the door.

To lock the door from the outside using thepower door locking switch, push the frontside of the switch (“LOCK” side) and thenclose the door. In this case, all closeddoors and the rear gate (for 5-door) arelocked at the same time.

Always make sure that all doors and therear gate (for 5-door) are locked beforeleaving your vehicle.

NOTEMake sure that you do not leave the keyinside the vehicle when locking the

doors from the outside without the key.

& Locking and unlocking fromthe inside

1) Lock2) Unlock

To lock the door from the inside, rotate thelock lever rearward. To unlock the doorfrom the inside, rotate the lock leverforward.

The red mark on the lock lever appearswhen the door is unlocked.

Pull the inside door handle to open anunlocked door.

Always make sure that all doors and therear gate (for 5-door) are closed beforestarting to drive.

WARNING

Keep all doors locked when youdrive, especially when small chil-dren are in your vehicle.

Along with the proper use of seat-belts and child restraints, lockingthe doors reduces the chance ofbeing thrown out of the vehicle in anaccident.

It also helps prevent passengersfrom falling out if a door is acciden-tally opened, and intruders fromunexpectedly opening doors andentering your vehicle.

& Battery drainage preventionfunction

When a door or the rear gate (5-door) isnot completely closed and the dome light,ignition switch light, and door open warn-ing light remain illuminated as a result, thelights are automatically turned off by thebattery drainage prevention function after10 minutes of illumination to prevent thebattery from going dead. The operational/non-operational setting of this function canbe changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-tact the nearest SUBARU dealer if youwould like to change the setting.

Keys and doors 2-5

– CONTINUED –

2

Black plate (92,1)


2-6 Keys and doors

NOTE. When leaving the vehicle, pleasemake sure that all doors and the reargate (5-door) are completely closed.. The battery drainage preventionfunction does not operate while thekey is in the ignition switch.

Power door locking switches

1) Lock2) Unlock

All doors and the rear gate (for 5-door) canbe locked and unlocked by the power doorlocking switches located at the driver’sside and the front passenger’s side doors.

To lock the doors, push the front side ofthe switch.To unlock the doors, push the rear side ofthe switch.

When you close the doors after you setthe door locks, the doors remain locked.

NOTEMake sure that you do not leave the keyinside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside using the powerdoor locking switches.

& Key lock-in prevention func-tion

This function prevents the doors frombeing locked with the key still in theignition switch.

! Behavior with key lock-in preven-tion function operational

With the driver’s door open, the doors areautomatically kept unlocked even if thedoor locking switch is pushed to the front(“LOCK”) position.

! Behavior with key lock-in preven-tion function non-operational

. If the lock lever is turned to the rear(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s dooropen and the driver’s door is then closedwith the lock lever in that position, thedriver’s door is locked.. If the spare key is used to lock thedriver’s door from the outside of thevehicle, the door is locked.

This function’s operative/non-operativesetting can be changed by a SUBARUdealer. Contact a SUBARU dealer fordetails.

Black plate (93,1)


NOTEWhen leaving the vehicle, make sureyou are holding the key before lockingthe doors.

Remote keyless entry system

CAUTION

. Do not expose the transmitter tosevere shocks, such as thoseexperienced as a result of drop-ping or throwing.

. Do not take the transmitter apartexcept when replacing the bat-tery.

. Do not get the transmitter wet. If itgets wet, wipe it dry with a clothimmediately.

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules and with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions: (1) Thisdevice may not cause harmful inter-ference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may causeundesired operation.Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

Two transmitters are provided for your

vehicle.

The keyless entry system has the follow-ing functions.. Locking and unlocking the doors (andrear gate on the 5-door) without a key. Locking and unlocking the doors (andtrunk lid on the 4-door) without a key. Unlocking the rear gate on the 5-doorwithout a key. Unlocking the trunk lid on the 4-doorwithout a key. Sounding a panic alarm. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-tem. For detailed information, refer to the“Alarm system” section in this chapter.

The operable distance of the keyless entrysystem is approximately 30 feet (10meters). However, this distance will varydepending on environmental conditions.The system’s operable distance will beshorter in areas near a facility or electronicequipment emitting strong radio wavessuch as a power plant, broadcast station,TV tower, or remote controller of homeelectronic appliances.

The keyless entry system does not oper-ate when the key is inserted in the ignitionswitch.

Keys and doors 2-7

– CONTINUED –

2

Black plate (94,1)


2-8 Keys and doors

: Trunk lid/rear gate unlock button: Unlock/disarm button

: Lock/arm button

A: Panic button1) Front2) Back

& Locking the doors

Press the “ ” button to lock all doors andrear gate (5-door). An electronic chirp willsound once and the turn signal lights willflash once.If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunklid) is not fully closed, an electronic chirpwill sound five times and the turn signallights will flash five times to alert you thatthe doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) arenot properly closed. When you close thedoor, it will automatically lock and then anelectronic chirp will sound once and theturn signal lights will flash once.

& Unlocking the doors

Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’sdoor. An electronic chirp will sound twiceand the turn signal lights will flash twice.To unlock all doors and the rear gate (5-door), briefly press the “ ” button asecond time within 5 seconds.

NOTEIf the interval between the first andsecond presses of the “ ” button (forunlocking of all of the doors and therear gate) is extremely short, the sys-tem may not respond.

Black plate (95,1)


& Unlocking the trunk lid/reargate

! 4-door

The trunk lid unlocks when the “ ”button is pressed continuously for at least2 seconds. An electronic chirp will soundtwice and the turn signal lights will flashtwice.

! 5-door

Pressing the “ ” button opens the reargate.An electronic chirp will sound twice andthe turn signal lights will flash twice.

& Illuminated entryThe interior (dome) light will illuminatewhen the “ ” button is pressed. This light

stays illuminated for approximately 30seconds if any of the doors or the reargate (5-door) is not opened.If the “ ” button is pressed before 30seconds have elapsed, this light will goout. The interior light must be set to themiddle position in order for this functionto operate.A SUBARU dealer can change the illumi-nation period setting of the interior light inaccordance with your preference. Contactthe nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

& Vehicle finder functionUse this function to find your vehicleparked among many vehicles in a largeparking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “ ”button three times in a 5-second periodwill cause your vehicle’s horn to soundonce and its turn signal lights to flash threetimes.

NOTEIf the interval between presses is tooshort when you press the “ ” buttonthree times, the system may not re-spond to the signals from the remotetransmitter.

& Sounding a panic alarm

A “PANIC” button is located on the back ofthe transmitter.To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”button once.The horn will sound and the turn signallights will flash.To deactivate the panic alarm, press anybutton on the remote transmitter. Unless abutton on the remote is pressed, the alarmwill be deactivated after approximately 30seconds.

& Selecting audible signal op-eration

Using an electronic chirp, the system willgive you an audible signal when the doorslock and unlock. If desired, you may turn

Keys and doors 2-9

– CONTINUED –

2

Black plate (96,1)


2-10 Keys and doors

the audible signal off.Do the following to deactivate the audiblesignal. You can also use the same stepsto restore the function.1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut alldoors and the rear gate.2. Hold down the UNLOCK side of thepower door locking switch.3. While holding down the “UNLOCK”side of the power door locking switch, pullthe key out and re-insert it into the ignitionswitch at least 6 times within 10 secondsafter Step 2.4. Open and close the driver’s door oncewithin 10 seconds after Step 3.5. The turn signal lights flash 3 times toindicate completion of the setting.

You may have the above settings done byyour SUBARU dealer.

& Replacing the battery

CAUTION

Do not let dust, oil or water get on orin the transmitter when replacingthe battery.

When the transmitter battery begins to getweak, transmitter range will begin todecrease. Replace the battery as soon

as possible.To replace the battery:

1. Open the transmitter case using a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Remove the old battery from theholder.

1) Negative (−) side facing up

3. Replace with a new battery (typeCR2025 or equivalent) making sure toinstall the new battery with the negative(−) side facing up.4. Refit the removed half of the transmit-ter case.

After the battery is replaced, the trans-mitter must be synchronized with thekeyless entry system’s control unit.Press either the “ ” or “ ” button sixtimes to synchronize the unit.

& Replacing lost transmittersIf you lose a transmitter or want topurchase additional transmitters (up tofour can be programmed), you should re-program all of your transmitters for secur-

Black plate (97,1)


ity reasons. It is recommended that youhave your dealer program all of yourtransmitters into your system.

! Programming the transmitters

The keyless entry system is equipped witha special code learning feature that allowsyou to program new transmitter codes intothe system or to delete old ones. Thesystem can learn up to four uniquetransmitter codes. The four transmittercodes may be the same or different.Programming transmitter codes intosystem:

Bag containing transmitter

Transmitter circuit board

To register a new transmitter with thekeyless entry system, it is necessary toprogram the transmitter’s code (identifica-tion number) into the system. A labelshowing the code is affixed to the bagcontaining the transmitter, and another isaffixed to the circuit board inside thetransmitter. If there is no bag, open thetransmitter case and make a note of theeight-digit number. Program the numberinto the system in accordance with thefollowing procedure:1. Firmly close the doors and the reargate, or trunk lid.2. Open the driver’s door, sit on thedriver’s seat, and close the door.3. Perform the following steps within 45seconds.

(1) Open and close the driver’s dooronce.

1) ON2) LOCK

(2) Insert the key into the ignitionswitch, then turn it from the “LOCK”

Keys and doors 2-11

– CONTINUED –

2

Black plate (98,1)


2-12 Keys and doors

position to the “ON” position 10 timeswithin 15 seconds.

NOTE. When you complete step (2), anelectronic tone will sound once.. If you do not perform steps (1) and(2) within 45 seconds, an error willoccur. Neither an electronic tone northe buzzer will sound, and the interiorlamp will not flash. In this event, per-form the whole procedure again begin-ning with part 1.

4. Open and close the door once within15 seconds.

NOTE. When part 4 of the procedure iscompleted, an electronic tone willsound for 30 seconds.. If you do not perform the operationsin part 4 within 15 seconds, an errorwill occur and the electronic tone willnot sound. In this event, perform theregistration steps again beginning withpart 3 of the procedure.

5. Before the electronic tone stopssounding, push the lock side of the powerdoor lock switch the same number oftimes as the leftmost digit of the transmit-ter code. For example, push the lockswitch eight times if the leftmost digit ofthe code is 8.

NOTE. The electronic tone will stop sound-ing when you start entering the num-ber.. If you do not start entering thenumber using the lock switch beforethe electronic tone stops sounding, anerror will occur. In this event, performthe registration steps again beginningwith part 3 of the procedure.. If the interval between one push of

the switch and the next exceeds 5seconds, an error will occur. In thisevent, perform the procedure againbeginning with part 4. If an error occurssix times, perform the procedure againstarting with part 3.

6. When you have finished entering thenumber, push the unlock side of the lockswitch within 5 seconds.

NOTE. An electronic tone will sound.. If you push the unlock side of thelock switch when more than 5 secondshave passed, an error will occur. In thisevent, perform the procedure againbeginning with part 4. If an error occurssix times, perform the procedure againstarting with part 3.

Black plate (99,1)


7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedurefor each of the remaining digits of thetransmitter code beginning with the sec-ond digit (counting from the left) andfinishing with the eighth digit.

NOTE. When you finish entering the eighthdigit, an electronic tone will sound for30 seconds.. If the interval between one push ofthe switch and the next exceeds 5seconds, an error will occur. In thisevent, perform the procedure againbeginning with part 4. If an error occurssix times, perform the procedure againstarting with part 3.

8. Before the electronic tone stopssounding, use the power door lock switchto reenter the transmitter code beginningwith the leftmost digit.

NOTEIf you do not start entering the numberusing the lock switch before the elec-tronic tone stops sounding, an errorwill occur. In this event, perform theprocedure again beginning with part 3.

9. When you have finished entering thecode a second time, an electronic tone willsound for 1 second and automatic doorlocking and unlocking operation will take

place once to indicate completion ofregistration, provided the code enteredthe second time is identical to that enteredthe first time.

NOTEIf the code entered the second time isnot identical to the code entered thefirst time, an error will occur. In thisevent, perform the procedure againbeginning with part 5. If an error occursfive times, perform the procedure againstarting with part 3.

10. If you wish to program another trans-mitter code into the system (up to fourtransmitter codes can be programmed intothe system), perform the procedure begin-ning with part 4. When you have finishedprogramming all of the necessary trans-mitter codes into the system, remove thekey from the ignition switch.11. Test every registered transmitter toconfirm correct operation.

! Deleting old transmitter codes

The control unit of the keyless entrysystem has four memory locations to storetransmitter codes, giving it the ability tooperate with up to four transmitters. Whenyou lose a transmitter, the lost transmit-ter’s code remains in the memory. Forsecurity reasons, lost transmitter codes

should be deleted from the memory.To delete old transmitter codes, programfour transmitter codes into the system. Ifyou have only one current transmitter,program it four times. If you have twocurrent transmitters, program each onetwice. If you have three current transmit-ters, program two of them once and thethird one twice. This process will leaveonly current transmitter codes in thesystem’s memory.

NOTEMake sure no one else is operatingtheir keyless entry system within rangeof your vehicle when programmingtransmitters. If someone else were tooperate their remote transmitter whileyou are programming your transmit-ters, it is possible that their transmittercode will be programmed into yoursystem, allowing them unauthorizedaccess to your vehicle.

Keys and doors 2-13

2

Black plate (100,1)


2-14 Keys and doors

Alarm system

The alarm system helps to protect yourvehicle and valuables from theft. The hornsounds and the turn signal lights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle. The starter motor is also inter-rupted to prevent starting the vehiclewithout a key.

The system can be armed and disarmedwith the remote transmitter.The system does not operate when thekey is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle’s alarm system has been setfor activation at the time of shipment fromthe factory. You can set the system fordeactivation yourself or have it done byyour SUBARU dealer.

& System operationThe alarm system will give the followingalarms when triggered:. The vehicle’s horn will sound and theturn signal lights will flash for 30 seconds.. If any door (or the rear gate/trunk lid)remains open after the 30-second period,the horn will continue to sound for amaximum of 3 minutes. If the door (orthe rear gate/trunk lid) is closed while thehorn is sounding, the horn will stop

sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.

The alarm is triggered by:. Opening a door, the rear gate or trunklid. Physical impact to the vehicle, such asforced entry (only vehicles with shocksensors (dealer option))

NOTEThe alarm system can be set to triggerillumination of the dome light. Thedome light notification is deactivatedas the factory setting. A SUBARUdealer can activate the system. Contactyour SUBARU dealer for details.

& Activating and deactivatingthe alarm system

To change the setting of your vehicle’salarm system for activation or deactiva-tion, do the following.1. Disarm the alarm system (refer to“Disarming the system” in this section).2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut alldoors (and the rear gate if your vehicle is a5-door).3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of thedriver’s power door locking switch, open

the driver’s door within the following 1second, and wait 10 seconds withoutreleasing the switch. The setting will thenbe changed as follows:

If the system was previously activated:The odometer/trip meter screen displays“AL oF” and the horn sounds twice,indicating that the system is now deacti-vated.

If the system was previously deacti-vated:The odometer/trip meter screen displays“AL on” and the horn sounds once,indicating that the system is now acti-vated.

NOTEYou may have the above settingchange done by your SUBARU dealer.

& If you have accidentally trig-gered the alarm system

! To stop the alarm

Do any of the following operations:. Press any button on the remote trans-mitter.. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.

Black plate (101,1)


& Arming the system

! To arm the system using remotetransmitter

1. Close all windows.2. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.3. Open the doors and get out of thevehicle.4. Make sure that the engine hood (andthe trunk lid on the 4-door) are locked.5. Close all doors (and the rear gate onthe 5-door).

: Press to Arm the system.: Press to Disarm the system.

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for lessthan 2 seconds). All doors (and the reargate on the 5-door) will lock, an electronicchirp will sound once, the turn signal lights

will flash once, and the indicator lights willstart flashing rapidly. After rapid flashingfor 30 seconds (standby time), the indi-cator lights will then flash slowly (twiceapproximately every 2 seconds), indicat-ing that the system has been armed forsurveillance.

If any of the doors, (rear gate or trunk lid)is not fully closed, an electronic chirpsounds five times, the turn signal lightsflash five times to alert you that the doors(or the rear gate) are not properly closed.When you close the door, the system willautomatically arm and doors will automa-tically lock.

! To arm the system using powerdoor locking switches

1. Close all windows.2. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.3. Open the doors and get out of thevehicle.4. Make sure that the engine hood islocked.5. Close the doors (and the rear gate onthe 5-door) but leave only the driver’s dooror the front passenger’s door open.

Keys and doors 2-15

– CONTINUED –

2

Black plate (102,1)


2-16 Keys and doors

6. Push the front side (“LOCK” side) ofthe power door locking switch to set thedoor locks.7. Close the door. An electronic chirp willsound once, the turn signal lights will flashonce and the indicator lights will startflashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30seconds (standby time), the indicatorlights will then flash slowly (twice approxi-mately every 2 seconds), indicating thatthe system has been armed for surveil-lance.

NOTE. The system can be armed even if theengine hood and/or the windows areopened. Always make sure that theyare fully closed before arming thesystem.

. The 30-second standby time can beeliminated if you prefer. Have it per-formed by your SUBARU dealer.. If your vehicle is a 4-door and youunlock the trunk using the remotetransmitter’s “ ” button with thealarm system armed, the system willbe temporarily placed in a standbystate. The system will go back to thesurveillance state upon locking thetrunk.. The system is in the standby modefor a 30-second period after locking thedoors with the remote transmitter. Thesecurity indicator light will flash atshort intervals during this period.. If any of the following actions aredone during the standby period, thesystem will not switch to the surveil-lance state.

– Doors are unlocked using theremote transmitter.– Any door (including the rear gateof a 5-door or the trunk of a 4-door)is opened.– Ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position.

& Disarming the systemBriefly press the “ ” button (for less than2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. Thedriver’s door will unlock, an electronic

chirp will sound twice, the turn signallights will flash twice. The flashing of thesecurity indicator light will then changeslowly (once approximately every 3 sec-onds from twice approximately every 2seconds), indicating that the alarm systemhas been disarmed.

NOTEAfter disarming the alarm system,briefly press the “ ” button a secondtime within 5 seconds to unlock allother doors and the rear gate (5-door).

! Emergency disarming

If you cannot disarm the system using thetransmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost,broken or the transmitter battery is tooweak), you can disarm the system withoutusing the transmitter.The system can be disarmed as follows.. Turn the ignition switch from the“LOCK” to the “ON” position with aregistered key.

& Valet modeWhen you choose the valet mode, thealarm system does not operate. In valetmode, the remote transmitter is used onlyfor locking and unlocking the doors andrear gate (5-door) and panic activation.

Black plate (103,1)


To enter the valet mode, change thesetting of your vehicle’s alarm system fordeactivation mode. Refer to “Activatingand deactivating the alarm system” in thissection. The security indicator light willcontinue to flash once every 3 secondsindicating that the system is in the valetmode.

To exit valet mode, change the setting ofyour vehicle’s alarm system for activationmode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-ing the alarm system” in this section.

& Passive armingWhen passive arming mode has beenprogrammed by the dealer, arming of thesystem is automatically accomplishedwithout using the remote transmitter. Notethat in this mode, DOORS MUST BEMANUALLY LOCKED.

! To enter the passive mode

If you wish to program the passive armingmode, have it done by your SUBARUdealer.

! Arming the system

CAUTION

In passive mode, the system willautomatically activate the alarm butWILL NOT automatically lock the

doors. In order to lock the doors youmust either lock them as indicatedin step 4 below or with the key oncethey have been closed. Failure tolock the doors manually will result ina higher security risk.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.

1) ON2) LOCK

2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to“LOCK” position and remove the key fromthe ignition switch.3. Open the doors and get out of thevehicle.

4. Before closing the doors, lock all doorswith the inside door lock levers.5. Close the doors. The system willautomatically arm after one minute.

In the passive mode, the system can alsobe armed with the remote transmitter orwith the power door locking switches. Ifthe remote transmitter or power doorlocking switch is used to lock the vehicle,arming will take place immediately regard-less of whether or not the passive modehas been selected.

! Disarming the system

To disarm the system, briefly press the“ ” button on the transmitter.

Keys and doors 2-17

– CONTINUED –

2

Black plate (104,1)


2-18 Keys and doors

& Tripped sensor identificationThe security indicator light flashes whenthe alarm system has been triggered.Also, the number of flashes indicates thelocation of unauthorized intrusion or theseverity of impact on the vehicle.. When the ignition switch is turned tothe “ON” position, the indicator light willlight for 1 second and then flash asfollows:

. When a door or rear gate (5-door) orthe trunk (4-door) was opened: 5 times. When the ignition switch was turnedto the “ON” position: 3 times. When a strong impact or multipleimpacts were sensed: twice (onlyvehicles with shock sensors (dealeroption)). When a light impact was sensed:once (only vehicles with shock sen-sors (dealer option))

NOTEAny of the above indicator light flash-ings will recur each time the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position.Rearming the alarm system cancels theflashing.

& Shock sensors (dealer op-tion)

The shock sensors trigger the alarmsystem when they sense impacts appliedto the vehicle and when any of theirelectric wires are cut. The alarm systemcauses the horn to sound and the turnsignal lights to flash for a short time whenthe sensed impact is weak, but it warns ofa strong impact or multiple impacts bysounding the horn and flashing the turnsignal lights, both lasting approximately 30seconds.If you desire, your SUBARU dealer canconnect them and set them for activationor deactivation.

NOTE. The shock sensors are not alwaysable to sense impacts caused by break-ing in, and cannot sense an impact thatdoes not cause vibration (such asbreaking the glass using a rescuehammer).. The shock sensors may sense vi-bration as indicated in the followingexamples and trigger the alarm system.Select the settings of the alarm systemand shock sensors appropriately de-pending on where you usually parkyour vehicle.

Examples:Vibration from a construction siteVibration in a multistory car parkVibration from trains

. You can have the sensitivity of theshock sensors adjusted to your pre-ference by your SUBARU dealer.

Black plate (105,1)


Child safety locks

Each rear door has a child safety lock thatprevents the doors from being openedeven if the inside door handle is pulled.When the child safety lock lever is in thelock position, the door cannot be openedfrom inside regardless of the position ofthe inner door handle lock lever. The doorcan only be opened from the outside.

WARNING

Always turn the child safety locks tothe “LOCK” position when childrensit on the rear seat. Serious injurycould result if a child accidentallyopens the door and falls out.

Windows

& Power windows

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injurycaused by entrapment, you mustdo the following.

. When operating the power win-dows, be extremely careful toprevent anyone’s fingers, arms,neck or head from being caughtin the window.

. Always lock the passengers’ win-dows using the lock switch whenchildren are riding in the vehicle.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-ways remove the key from theignition switch for safety andnever allow an unattended childto remain in the vehicle. Failureto follow this procedure couldresult in injury to a child operat-ing the power window.

The power windows operate only whenthe ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

! Driver’s side switches

1) Lock switch2) For driver’s window (with one-touch auto

down feature)3) For front passenger’s window4) For rear left window5) For rear right window

All door windows can be controlled by thepower window switch cluster at the driverside door.

Keys and doors 2-19

– CONTINUED –

2

Black plate (106,1)


2-20 Keys and doors

! Operating the driver’s window

1) Open2) Automatically open3) Close

To open:Push the switch down lightly and hold it.The window will open as long as theswitch is held.This switch also has a one-touch autodown feature that allows the window to beopened fully without holding the switch.Push the switch down until it clicks andrelease it, and the window will fully open.To stop the window halfway, pull theswitch up lightly.

To close:Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. Thewindow will close as long as the switch is

held.

! Operating the passengers’ windows

To open the passengers’ windows, pushthe appropriate switch down and hold ituntil the window reaches the desiredposition.To close the window, pull the switch upand hold it until it reaches the desiredposition.

! Locking the passengers’ windows

1) Lock2) Unlock

To lock the passengers’ windows, pushthe lock switch. When the lock switch is inthe “LOCK” position, the passengers’windows cannot be opened or closed.Press the switch again to cancel thepassengers’ window locking.

Black plate (107,1)


! Passengers’ side switches

To open the window, push the switchdown and hold it until the window reachesthe desired position.To close the window, pull the switch upand hold it until the window reaches thedesired position.

When the lock switch on the powerwindow switch cluster, located on thedriver’s side door, is in the “LOCK”position, the passengers’ windows cannotbe operated with the passengers ’switches.

Trunk lid (4-door)

WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaustgas from entering the vehicle,always keep the trunk lid closedwhile driving.

. Help prevent young children fromlocking themselves in the trunk.When leaving the vehicle, eitherclose all windows and lock alldoors or cancel the inside trunklid release. Also make certainthat the trunk is closed.

On hot or sunny days, the tem-perature in the trunk couldquickly become high enough tocause death or serious heat-related injuries including braindamage to anyone locked inside,particularly for small children.

& To open and close the trunklid from outside

The trunk lid can be opened using theremote keyless entry system. Refer to the“Remote keyless entry system” section inthis chapter.To close the trunk lid, lightly press thetrunk lid down until the latch engages.

NOTEDo not leave your valuables in thetrunk when you leave your vehicle.

& To open the trunk lid frominside

Pull the trunk lid release lever upward.

Keys and doors 2-21

– CONTINUED –

2

Black plate (108,1)


2-22 Keys and doors

& To lock and unlock the trunklid release lever

When you entrust your vehicle key toanother person, you can lock the trunk lidrelease lever to prevent luggage in thetrunk from being stolen. To lock the trunklid release lever, insert the master key orsubmaster key into the key cylinder at therear of the release lever and turn itcounterclockwise. To unlock the trunk lidrelease lever, turn the key clockwise.

& Internal trunk lid releasehandle

The internal trunk lid release handle is adevice designed to open the trunk lid frominside the trunk. In the event children oradults become locked inside the trunk, the

handle allows them to open the lid. Thehandle is located on the inside of the trunklid.

To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk,pull the yellow handle upward as indicatedby the arrow on the handle.This operation unlocks the trunk lid. Then,push up the lid.

The handle is made of material thatremains luminescent for approximatelyan hour in the dark trunk space after it isexposed to ambient light even for a shorttime.

WARNING

Never allow any child to get in thetrunk and play with the releasehandle. If the driver starts the vehi-

cle without knowing that a child isinside the trunk and the child opensthe lid using the release handle, thechild could fall out and be killed orseriously injured.

CAUTION

. Do not close the lid while grip-ping the release handle. Thehandle may be damaged.

. Do not use the handle as a hookto fasten straps or ropes tosecure your cargo in the trunk.Such use may result in damageof the handle.

. Load the trunk so that cargo cannot strike the release handle. Ifthe cargo hits the handle whilethe vehicle is being driven, thehandle may be pulled up and thetrunk lid may open. That maycause cargo to fall out of thetrunk, which could create a trafficsafety hazard.

! Inspection

Perform the following steps at least twicea year to check the release handle forcorrect operation.

Black plate (109,1)


1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Use a screwdriver with a thin blade.Slide the screwdriver blade from the slitaperture of the lock assembly fully to theend until you hear a click.

This places the latch in the locked posi-

tion.

3. Move the release handle, from outsidethe vehicle, in the direction of the arrow tocheck if the latch is released.

If the latch is not released, contact yourSUBARU dealer.In that case, use the key to release thelatch, then close the trunk lid.Also, if the movement of the releasehandle feels restricted or not entirelysmooth during operation, or the handleand/or handle base is cracked, contactyour SUBARU dealer.

Rear gate (5-door)

The rear gate can be locked and unlockedusing either the keyless entry system orthe power door locking switches.Refer to the “Power door locking switches”and “Remote keyless entry system” sec-tions in this chapter.

To open the rear gate, first unlock the reargate lock then push the rear gate openerbutton.

Keys and doors 2-23

– CONTINUED –

2

Black plate (110,1)


2-24 Keys and doors

To close the rear gate, lower it slowly andpush down firmly until the latch engages.The rear gate can be lowered easily if youpull it down holding the recessed grip.

WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaustgas from entering the vehicle,always keep the rear gate closedwhile driving.

. Do not attempt to shut the reargate while holding the recessedgrip. Also avoid closing the reargate by pulling on the recessedgrip from inside the cargo space.There is a danger of your handbeing caught and injured.

CAUTION

. Do not jam a plastic bag in orplace cellophane tape on the reargate stays or scratch the stayswhile loading or unloading cargo.That could cause leakage of gasfrom the stays, which may resultin their inability to hold the reargate open.

. Be careful not to hit your head orface on the rear gate when open-ing or closing the rear gate andwhen loading or unloading car-go.

NOTEIf the rear gate cannot be unlocked dueto a discharged battery, a fault in thedoor locking/unlocking system or othercauses, you can unlock it by manuallyoperating the rear gate lock releaselever.For the procedure, refer to the “Reargate – if the rear gate cannot beunlocked” section in chapter 9 “In caseof emergency”.

Black plate (5,1)


Ignition switch ..................................................... 3-3LOCK.................................................................. 3-3Acc..................................................................... 3-4ON...................................................................... 3-4START ................................................................ 3-4Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-5Ignition switch light ............................................. 3-5

Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-5Meters and gauges (Turbo models) ................... 3-5

Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-5Canceling the function for meter/gauge needlemovement upon turning on the ignitionswitch............................................................... 3-6

Speedometer....................................................... 3-6Odometer/Trip meter............................................ 3-6Tachometer ......................................................... 3-7Fuel gauge.......................................................... 3-8Temperature gauge ............................................. 3-9

Meters and gauges (Non-turbo models) ............ 3-9Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-9Canceling the function for meter/gauge needlemovement upon turning on the ignitionswitch.............................................................. 3-10

Speedometer...................................................... 3-10Odometer/Trip meter........................................... 3-10Tachometer ........................................................ 3-11Fuel gauge......................................................... 3-12

Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-13Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-13SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-15

Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFFindicators ........................................................ 3-15

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunctionindicator lamp ................................................. 3-16

Coolant temperature low indicator light (Non-turbo models)/Coolant temperature highwarning light (Non-turbo models) ..................... 3-17

Charge warning light.......................................... 3-17Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-17AT OIL TEMPerature warning light(AT vehicles).................................................... 3-18

Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.models) ........................................................... 3-18

ABS warning light.............................................. 3-19Brake system warning light................................ 3-20Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-21Hill start assist warning light (if equipped) .......... 3-21Door open warning light .................................... 3-21All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles)......... 3-21Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicatorlight (if equipped)............................................. 3-22

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light (ifequipped)/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFFindicator light (if equipped) .............................. 3-22

Security indicator light....................................... 3-23SPORT mode indicator light (AT vehicles) .......... 3-24Selector lever and gear position indicator (ATmodels) (if equipped) ....................................... 3-24

Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-24High beam indicator light ................................... 3-24Cruise control indicator light.............................. 3-24Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 3-25


3

Black plate (6,1)



Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-25Headlight indicator light (if equipped) ................. 3-25

Clock ................................................................... 3-25Information display ............................................ 3-26

Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-26Average fuel consumption .................................. 3-27

Light control switch ........................................... 3-27Headlights.......................................................... 3-28High/low beam change (dimmer)......................... 3-28Headlight flasher ................................................ 3-28Daytime running light system ............................. 3-29

Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-29Illumination brightness control ......................... 3-29

Front fog light switch (if equipped) .................. 3-30Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-31

Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-32Rear window wiper and washer switch –5-door ............................................................. 3-33

Rear window defogger button .......................... 3-34Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped).............. 3-35Mirrors ................................................................ 3-36

Inside mirror...................................................... 3-36Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-38

Tilt steering wheel (if equipped) ....................... 3-39Tilt/telescopic steering wheel (if equipped) ..... 3-40Horn.................................................................... 3-41

Black plate (113,1)


Ignition switch

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to“LOCK” while the vehicle isbeing driven or towed becausethat will lock the steering wheel,preventing steering control. Andwhen the engine is turned off, ittakes a much greater effort thanusual to steer.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-ways remove the key from theignition switch for safety andnever allow an unattended childto remain in the vehicle. Failureto follow this procedure couldresult in injury to a child orothers. Children could operatethe power windows, the moon-roof or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder orkey case to either key. If it bangedagainst your knees or hands whileyou are driving, it could turn theignition switch from the “ON” posi-

tion to the “Acc” or “LOCK” posi-tion, thereby stopping the engine.Also, if the key is attached to akeyholder or to a large bunch ofother keys, centrifugal force may acton it as the vehicle moves, resultingin unwanted turning of the ignitionswitch.

The ignition switch has four positions:LOCK, Acc, ON and START.

NOTE. Keep the ignition switch in the“LOCK” position when the engine isnot running.. Using electrical accessories for along time with the ignition switch in the“ON” or “Acc” position can cause the

battery to go dead.. If the ignition switch will not movefrom the “LOCK” position to the “Acc”position, turn the steering wheelslightly to the left and right as you turnthe ignition switch.

& LOCKThe key can only be inserted or removedin this position. The ignition switch will lockthe steering wheel when you remove thekey.If turning the key is difficult, turn thesteering wheel slightly to the right and leftas you turn the key.

! Automatic transmission vehicles

Instruments and controls 3-3

– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (114,1)


3-4 Instruments and controls

The key can be turned from “Acc” to“LOCK” only when the selector lever is inthe “P” position.

! Manual transmission vehicles

The key can be turned from “Acc” to“LOCK” only when the key is pushed in

while turning it.

& AccIn this position the electrical accessories(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) canbe used.

& ONThis is the normal operating position afterthe engine is started.

& STARTThe engine is started in this position. Thestarter cranks the engine to start it. Whenthe key is released (after the engine hasstarted), the key automatically returns tothe “ON” position.

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the“START” position while the engineis running.

If your registered key fails to start theengine, pull out the key once (the securityindicator light will blink), and then insertthe key in the ignition switch and turn it tothe “START” position and again try to startthe engine.

NOTEThe engine may not start in the follow-ing cases:

. The key grip is touching another keyor a metallic key holder.

. The key is near another key that

Black plate (115,1)


contains an immobilizer transponder.

. The key is near or touching anothertransmitter.

& Key reminder chimeThe reminder chime sounds when thedriver’s door opens and the key is in the“LOCK” or “Acc” position. The chime stopswhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the key is removed fromthe ignition switch.

& Ignition switch lightFor easy access to the ignition switch inthe dark, the ignition switch light comes onwhen driver’s door is opened. The lightremains on for 5 seconds and goes outafter driver’s door is closed or if the key isturned to the “ON” position.

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher is used towarn other drivers when you have to parkyour vehicle under emergency conditions.The hazard warning flasher works regard-less of the position of the ignition switch.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,push the hazard warning button on theinstrument panel. To turn off the flasher,push the button again.

NOTEWhen the hazard warning flasher is on,the turn signals do not work.

Meters and gauges (Turbomodels)

NOTELiquid-crystal displays are used insome of the meters and gauges in thecombination meter. You will find theirindications hard to see if you wearpolarized glasses.

& Combination meter illumina-tion

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the various parts of thecombination meter are illuminated in thefollowing sequence:1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meterneedles and gauge needles light up.2. Meter needles and gauge needleseach show MAX position.3. Meter needles and gauge needleseach show MIN position.4. Meter and gauge dials, odometer andtrip meter back light illuminate.5. Regular illumination (for driving) be-gins.


– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (116,1)



& Canceling the function formeter/gauge needle move-ment upon turning on theignition switch

It is possible to activate or deactivate themovement of the meter needles andgauge needles that takes place when theignition switch is turned to the “ON”position.Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” or“Acc” position.Press the trip knob to show “ ” or “ ”on the odometer and trip meter display.The display can be switched as shown inthe following illustration by pressing thetrip knob.

*: “ ” or “ ” cannot be displayed whenthe ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-tion.

To change the current setting, press thetrip knob for at least 2 seconds.

: Activated: Deactivated

NOTE. Your vehicle’s initial movementsetting of the meter/gauge needleshas been set for activation “ ” at thetime of shipment from the factory.. It is not possible to cancel the initialmovement setting of the meter/gaugeneedles when the ignition switch is inthe “ON” position. Cancel the settingwhen the ignition switch is in the“LOCK” or “Acc” position.

& SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehiclespeed.

& Odometer/Trip meter

1) Trip knob

This meter displays the odometer and twotrip meters when the ignition switch is inthe “LOCK”, “Acc” or “ON” position.

If you press the trip knob when the ignitionswitch is in the “LOCK” position, theodometer/trip meter will light up. It ispossible to switch the indications whilethe odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you donot press the trip knob within 10 secondsof illumination of the odometer/trip meter,the odometer/trip meter will go off.

Black plate (117,1)


The display can be switched as shownbelow by pressing the trip knob.


For the “ ” or “ ” indication, refer to“Canceling the function for meter/gaugeneedle movement upon turning on theignition switch” in this section.

! Odometer

The odometer shows the total distancethat the vehicle has been driven.

! Double trip meter

The trip meter shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last setit to zero.To set the trip meter to zero, select the Atrip or B trip meter by pushing the knoband keep the knob pushed for more than 2seconds.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt tochange the function of the indicatorduring driving, as an accident couldresult.

NOTEIf the connection between the combina-tion meter and battery is broken for anyreason such as vehicle maintenance orfuse replacement, the data recorded onthe trip meter will be lost.

& TachometerThe tachometer shows the engine speedin thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with thepointer of the tachometer in the redzone. In this range, fuel injection willbe cut by the engine control module


– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (118,1)



to protect the engine from overrev-ving. The engine will resume run-ning normally after the engine speedis reduced below the red zone.

& Fuel gauge

1) Low fuel warning light

The fuel gauge shows the approximateamount of fuel remaining in the tank.When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”or “Acc” position, the fuel gauge shows “E”even if the fuel tank contains fuel.

The gauge may move slightly duringbraking, turning or acceleration due to fuellevel movement in the tank.If you press the trip knob while the ignitionswitch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,

the fuel gauge will light up and indicate theamount of fuel remaining in the tank.If, while the fuel gauge is indicating theamount of fuel remaining in the tank, you(a) do not press the trip knob for 10seconds or (b) open and close the driver’sdoor, the fuel gauge indication will turn off.

NOTE

You will see the “ ” sign in the fuelgauge meter.This indicates that the fuel filler door(lid) is located on the right side of thevehicle.

! Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light comes on whenthe tank is nearly empty [approximately

2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp gal)].

It only operates when the ignition switch isin the “ON” position.

NOTEThis light does not go out unless thetank is replenished up to an internalfuel quantity of approximately 4.0 USgal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-ever the low fuel warning lightcomes on. Engine misfires as aresult of an empty tank could causedamage to the engine.

Black plate (119,1)


& Temperature gauge

1) Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows enginecoolant temperature when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

The coolant temperature will vary inaccordance with the outside temperatureand driving conditions.

We recommend that you drive moderatelyuntil the pointer of the temperature gaugereaches near the middle of the range.Engine operation is optimum with theengine coolant at this temperature rangeand high revving operation when theengine is not warmed up enough shouldbe avoided.

CAUTION

If the pointer exceeds the normaloperating range, safely stop thevehicle as soon as possible.

Refer to “In case of emergency” inchapter 9.

Meters and gauges (Non-tur-bo models)

NOTELiquid-crystal displays are used insome of the meters and gauges in thecombination meter. You will find theirindications hard to see if you wearpolarized glasses.

& Combination meter illumina-tion

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the various parts of thecombination meter are illuminated in thefollowing sequence:1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meterneedles, gauge needles, odometer andtrip meter back light illuminate.2. Meter needles and gauge needleseach show MAX position.3. Meter needles and gauge needleseach show MIN position.4. Dials and indicators in meters andgauges light up.5. Regular illumination (for driving) be-gins.


– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (120,1)



& Canceling the function formeter/gauge needle move-ment upon turning on theignition switch

It is possible to activate or deactivate themovement of the meter needles andgauge needles that takes place when theignition switch is turned to the “ON”position.Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” or“Acc” position.Press the trip knob to show “ ” or “ ”on the odometer and trip meter display.The display can be switched as shown inthe following illustration by pressing thetrip knob.


To change the current setting, press thetrip knob for at least 2 seconds.

: Activated: Deactivated

NOTE. Your vehicle’s initial movementsetting of the meter/gauge needleshas been set for activation “ ” at thetime of shipment from the factory.. It is not possible to cancel the initialmovement setting of the meter/gaugeneedles when the ignition switch is inthe “ON” position. Cancel the settingwhen the ignition switch is in the“LOCK” or “Acc” position.

& SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehiclespeed.

& Odometer/Trip meter

1) Trip knob

This meter displays the odometer and twotrip meters when the ignition switch is inthe “LOCK”, “Acc” or “ON” position.

If you press the trip knob when the ignitionswitch is in the “LOCK” position, theodometer/trip meter will light up. It ispossible to switch the indications whilethe odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you donot press the trip knob within 10 secondsof illumination of the odometer/trip meter,the odometer/trip meter will go off.

Black plate (121,1)


The display can be switched as shownbelow by pressing the trip knob.


For the “ ” or “ ” indication, refer to“Canceling the function for meter/gaugeneedle movement upon turning on theignition switch” in this section.

! Odometer

The odometer shows the total distancethat the vehicle has been driven.

! Double trip meter

The trip meter shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last setit to zero.To set the trip meter to zero, select the Atrip or B trip meter by pushing the knoband keep the knob pushed for more than 2seconds.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt tochange the function of the indicatorduring driving, as an accident couldresult.

NOTEIf the connection between the combina-tion meter and battery is broken for anyreason such as vehicle maintenance orfuse replacement, the data recorded onthe trip meter will be lost.

& TachometerThe tachometer shows the engine speedin thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with thepointer of the tachometer in the redzone. In this range, fuel injection willbe cut by the engine control module


– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (122,1)



to protect the engine from overrev-ving. The engine will resume run-ning normally after the engine speedis reduced below the red zone.

NOTETo protect the engine while the “P” or“N” position is selected, the engine iscontrolled so that the engine speeddoes not become too high even if theaccelerator pedal is fully depressed.

& Fuel gauge

1) Low fuel warning light

The fuel gauge shows the approximateamount of fuel remaining in the tank.When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”

or “Acc” position, the fuel gauge shows “E”even if the fuel tank contains fuel.

The gauge may move slightly duringbraking, turning or acceleration due to fuellevel movement in the tank.If you press the trip knob while the ignitionswitch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,the fuel gauge will light up and indicate theamount of fuel remaining in the tank.If, while the fuel gauge is indicating theamount of fuel remaining in the tank, you(a) do not press the trip knob for 10seconds or (b) open and close the driver’sdoor, the fuel gauge indication will turn off.

NOTE

You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge.This indicates that the fuel filler door(lid) is located on the right side of thevehicle.

! Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light comes on whenthe tank is nearly empty [approximately2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp gal)]. It onlyoperates when the ignition switch is in the“ON” position. When this light illuminates,fill the fuel tank immediately.


Black plate (123,1)


Warning and indicator lights

Several of the warning and indicator lightscome on momentarily and then go outwhen the ignition switch is initially turnedto the “ON” position. This permits check-ing the operation of the bulbs.Apply the parking brake and turn theignition switch to the “ON” position. Thefollowing lights come on:. Seatbelt warning light. SRS airbag system warning light. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ONindicator light. Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFFindicator light. CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-function indicator lamp. Coolant temperature low indicator light(non-turbo models). Coolant temperature high warning light(non-turbo models). Charge warning light. Oil pressure warning light. AT OIL temperature warning light (ATvehicles). Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models). ABS warning light. Brake system warning light

. Low fuel warning light

. Hill start assist warning light (ifequipped). Door open warning light. All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT ve-hicles). Vehicle Dynamics Control operationindicator light (if equipped). Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light(if equipped)/Vehicle Dynamics ControlOFF indicator light (if equipped). SPORT mode indicator light (AT mod-els). Cruise control indicator light. Cruise control set indicator light

If any lights fail to come on, it indicates aburned-out bulb or a malfunction of thecorresponding system.Consult your authorized SUBARU dealerfor repair.

& Seatbelt warning lightand chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbeltwarning device at the driver’s and frontpassenger’s seat, as required by currentsafety standards.With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”position, this device reminds the driverand front passenger to fasten their seat-

belts by illuminating the warning lights inthe locations indicated in the followingillustration and sounding a chime.

Driver’s warning light (Turbo models)

Driver’s warning light (Non-turbo models)


– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (124,1)



Front passenger’s warning light

! Operation

If the driver and/or front passenger have/has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position, the seatbelt warning light(s) willflash for 6 seconds, to warn that theseatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime willalso sound simultaneously.

NOTE. If the driver’s and/or front passen-ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened6 seconds later, the seatbelt warningdevice operates as follows accordingto the vehicle speed.

. At speeds lower than approxi-mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastenedseatbelt(s) will alternate betweensteady illumination and flashing at15-second intervals. The chime willnot sound.. At speeds higher than approxi-mately 9 mph (15 km/h)The warning light(s) for unfastenedseatbelt(s) will alternate betweenflashing and steady illumination at15-second intervals and the chimewill sound while the warning light(s)is/are flashing.

. It is possible to cancel the warningoperation that follows the 6-secondwarning after turning ON the ignitionswitch. When the ignition switch isturned ON next time, however, thecomplete sequence of the warningoperation resumes. For further detailsabout canceling the warning operation,please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If there is no passenger on the frontpassenger’s seat, the seatbelt warningdevice for the front passenger’s seat willbe deactivated. The front passenger’soccupant detection system monitorswhether or not there is a passenger onthe front passenger’s seat. Observe thefollowing precautions. Failure to do somay prevent the device from functioningcorrectly or cause the device to fail.

. Do not install any accessory such as atable or TV onto the seatback.. Do not store a heavy load in theseatback pocket.. Do not allow the rear seat occupant toplace his/her hands or legs on the frontpassenger’s seatback, or allow him/her topull the seatback.. Do not use front seats with their back-ward-forward position and seatback notbeing locked into place securely. If any ofthem are not locked securely, adjust themagain. For adjusting procedure, refer tothe “Front seats” section in chapter 1 inthis Owner’s Manual.

If the seatbelt warning device for the frontpassenger’s seat does not function cor-rectly (e.g., it is activated even when thefront passenger’s seat is empty or it isdeactivated even when the front passen-ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),take the following actions.. Ensure that no article is placed on theseat other than a child restraint systemand its child occupant, although westrongly recommend that all children sitin the rear seat properly restrained.. Ensure that there is no article left in theseatback pocket.. Ensure that the backward-forward po-sition and seatback of front passenger’s

Black plate (125,1)


seat are locked into place securely bymoving the seat back and forth.

If still the seatbelt warning device for frontpassenger’s seat does not function cor-rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-tions described above, immediately con-tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-tion.

& SRS airbag systemwarning light

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the SRS airbag systemwarning light will illuminate for approxi-mately 6 seconds and turn off. This showsthat the SRS airbag, SRS side airbag,SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt preten-sioners are operating normally.

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any ofthe following conditions, there maybe a malfunction in the seatbeltpretensioners and/or SRS airbagsystem. Immediately take your vehi-cle to your nearest SUBARU dealerto have the system checked. Unlesschecked and properly repaired, theseatbelt pretensioners and/or SRSairbag will not operate properly in

the event of a collision, which mayincrease the risk of injury.





& Front passenger’s frontalairbag ON and OFF indica-tors

ON or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ONindicator

or : Front passenger’s frontal airbagOFF indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ONand OFF indicators show you the status ofthe front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.The indicators are located next to theclock in the center portion of the dash-board.When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, both the ON and OFFindicators illuminate for 6 seconds duringwhich time the system is checked. Follow-ing the system check, both indicators


– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (126,1)



extinguish for 2 seconds. After that, one ofthe indicators illuminates depending onthe status of the front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbag determined by the Subaruadvanced frontal airbag system monitor-ing.If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagis activated, the passenger’s frontal airbagON indicator will illuminate while the OFFindicator will remain extinguished.If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagis deactivated, the passenger’s frontalairbag ON indicator will remain extin-guished while the OFF indicator willilluminate.With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”position, if both the ON and OFF indica-tors remain lit or extinguished simulta-neously even after the system checkperiod, the system is faulty. Contact yourSUBARU dealer immediately for an in-spection.

& CHECK ENGINE warn-ing light/Malfunction in-dicator lamp

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE light comeson while you are driving, have yourvehicle checked/repaired by yourSUBARU dealer as soon as possi-ble. Continued vehicle operationwithout having the emission controlsystem checked and repaired asnecessary could cause serious da-mage, which may not be covered byyour vehicle’s warranty.

If this light comes on steadily or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicatethat there is a problem or potentialproblem somewhere in the emission con-trol system.

! If the light comes on steadily:

If the light comes on steadily while drivingor does not go out after the engine starts,an emission control system malfunctionhas been detected.You should have your vehicle checked byan authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-ately.

NOTEThis light also comes on when the fuelfiller cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle,the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warninglight/malfunction indicator lamp coming oncould be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.Remove the cap and retighten it until itclicks. Make sure nothing is interferingwith the sealing of the cap. Tightening thecap will not make the CHECK ENGINEwarning light turn off immediately. It maytake several driving trips. If the light doesnot go out, take your vehicle to yourauthorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

! If the light is blinking:

If the light is blinking while driving, anengine misfire condition has been de-tected which may damage the emissioncontrol system.To prevent serious damage to the emis-sion control system, you should do thefollowing.. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard acceleration.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-ble.

Black plate (127,1)


The CHECK ENGINE warning light maystop blinking and come on steadily afterseveral driving trips. You should have yourvehicle checked by an authorizedSUBARU dealer immediately.

& Coolant temperaturelow indicator light (Non-turbo models)/Coolanttemperature high warn-ing light (Non-turbomodels)

CAUTION

. After turning the ignition switchto the “ON” position, if thisindicator light/warning light re-mains illuminated in RED forapproximately more than 1 sec-ond, the electrical system may bemalfunctioning. Immediately con-tact your SUBARU dealer for aninspection.

. If this indicator light/warning lightilluminates in RED while driving,safely stop the vehicle as soonas possible, and refer to theemergency steps for the case ofengine overheating. After that,have the system checked by yournearest SUBARU dealer. Refer to

“In case of emergency” in chap-ter 9.

This coolant temperature low indicatorlight/coolant temperature high warninglight has the following two functions:. Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi-cient warming up of the engine. Illumination in RED indicates overheat-ing condition of the engine

For the system check, this indicator light/warning light illuminates in red for approxi-mately 1 second when the ignition switchis turned to the “ON” position. After that,this indicator light/warning light changes toblue and maintains illumination in blue.This blue illuminated light turns off whenthe engine is warmed up sufficiently.

If the engine is overheated, this indicatorlight/warning light illuminates in red im-mediately. At this time, safely stop thevehicle as soon as possible, and refer tothe emergency steps for the case ofengine overheating. Refer to “In case ofemergency” in chapter 9. After that, havethe system checked by your nearestSUBARU dealer.

NOTEIf the engine is restarted after a certaindriving condition, this indicator light/

warning light may illuminate in red.However, this is not a malfunction if theindicator light/warning light turns offafter a short time.

& Charge warning light

If this light comes on when the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the chargingsystem is not working properly.

If the light comes on while driving or doesnot go out after the engine starts, stop theengine at the first safe opportunity andcheck the alternator belt. If the belt isloose, broken or if the belt is in goodcondition but the light remains on, contactyour nearest SUBARU dealer immedi-ately.

& Oil pressure warninglight

If this light comes on when the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the engine oilpressure is low and the lubricating systemis not working properly.If the light comes on while driving or doesnot go out after the engine starts, stop theengine at the first safe opportunity andcheck the engine oil level. If the oil level islow, add oil immediately. If the engine oil isat the proper level but the light remains on,


– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (128,1)



contact your nearest SUBARU dealerimmediately.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with theoil pressure warning light on. Thismay cause serious engine damage.

& AT OIL TEMPeraturewarning light (AT vehi-cles)

The AT oil temperature warning lightcomes on when the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position and goes outafter the engine has started.If this light comes on when the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the automatictransmission fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, im-mediately stop the vehicle in a safe placeand let the engine idle until the warninglight turns off.

! Automatic transmission controlsystem warning

If the light flashes after the engine starts, itmay indicate that the automatic transmis-sion control system is not working prop-erly. Contact your nearest SUBARU deal-er for service immediately.

& Low tire pressurewarning light (U.S.-spec.models)

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-ing light will come on for approximately 2seconds to check that the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) is functioningproperly. If there is no problem and all tiresare properly inflated, the light will go out.Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when coldand inflated to the inflation pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufac-turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle has tires ofa different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-sure label, you should determine theproper inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehiclehas been equipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped witha TPMS malfunction indicator to indicatewhen the system is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-bined with the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects a malfunction,the telltale will flash for approximately oneminute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continueupon subsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists. When themalfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of re-placement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacingone or more tires or wheels on your

Black plate (129,1)


vehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMSto continue to function properly.Should the warning light illuminate stea-dily after blinking for approximately oneminute, have the system inspected byyour nearest SUBARU dealer as soon aspossible.

WARNING

If this light does not come on brieflyafter the ignition switch is turned ONor the light illuminates steadily afterblinking for approximately one min-ute, you should have your TirePressure Monitor ing Systemchecked at a SUBARU dealer assoon as possible.

If this light comes on while driving,never brake suddenly and keepdriving straight ahead while gradu-ally reducing speed. Then slowlypull off the road to a safe place.Otherwise an accident involvingserious vehicle damage and seriouspersonal injury could occur.

If this light still comes on whiledriving after adjusting the tire pres-sure, a tire may have significantdamage and a fast leak that causesthe tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tireas soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or awheel rim is replaced without theoriginal pressure sensor/transmitterbeing transferred, the Low tire pres-sure warning light will illuminatessteadily after blinking for approxi-mately one minute. This indicatesthe TPMS is unable to monitor allfour road wheels. Contact yourSUBARU dealer as soon as possiblefor tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting. If the lightilluminates steadily after blinkingfor approximately one minute,promptly contact a SUBARU dealerto have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring systemis NOT a substitute for manuallychecking tire pressure. The tirepressure should be checked peri-odically (at least monthly) using atire gauge. After any change to tirepressure(s), the tire pressure mon-itoring system will not re-check tireinflation pressures until the vehicleis first driven more than 20 mph (32km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-

sures, increase the vehicle speed toat least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start theTPMS re-checking of the tire infla-tion pressures. If the tire pressuresare now above the severe lowpressure threshold, the low tirepressure warning light should gooff a few minutes later. Therefore, besure to install the specified size forthe front and rear tires.

& ABS warning light

The ABS warning light comes on when theignition switch is turned to the “ON”position and goes out after approximately2 seconds.This is an indication that the ABS systemis working properly.

CAUTION

If the warning light behaves asfollows, the ABS system may notwork properly.

When the warning light is on, theABS function shuts down; however,the conventional brake system con-tinues to operate normally.

. The warning light does not comeon when the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position.


– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (130,1)



. The warning light comes on whenthe ignition switch is turned tothe “ON” position, but it does notgo out even when the vehiclespeed exceeds approximately 8mph (12 km/h).

. The warning light comes on dur-ing driving.

If any of these conditions occur,have the ABS system repaired atthe first available opportunity byyour SUBARU dealer.

With a vehicle equipped with an EBDsystem, the ABS warning light comes ontogether with the brake system warninglight if the EBD system becomes faulty.For further details of the EBD system faultwarning, refer to “Brake system warninglight”.

NOTEIf the warning light behavior is asdescribed in the following, the ABSsystem may be considered normal.. The warning light comes on rightafter the engine is started but goes outimmediately, remaining off.. The warning light remains on afterthe engine has been started, but it goesout when the vehicle speed reachesapproximately 8 mph (12 km/h).

. The warning light comes on duringdriving, but it goes out immediately andremains off.

When driving with an insufficient batteryvoltage such as when the engine is jumpstarted, the ABS warning light may comeon. This is due to the low battery voltageand does not indicate a malfunction.When the battery becomes fully charged,the light will go out.

& Brake system warninglight

WARNING

. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on is dangerous.This indicates your brake systemmay not be working properly. Ifthe light remains on, have thebrakes inspected by a SUBARUdealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whetherthe brakes are operating prop-erly, do not drive the vehicle.Have your vehicle towed to thenearest SUBARU dealer for re-pair.

This light has the following three functions:

! Parking brake warning

The light comes on with the parking brakeapplied while the ignition switch is in the“ON” position. It goes out when theparking brake is fully released.

! Brake fluid level warning

This light comes on when the brake fluidlevel has dropped to near the “MIN” levelof the brake fluid reservoir with the ignitionswitch in the “ON” position and with theparking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light shouldcome on while driving (with the parkingbrake fully released and with the ignitionswitch positioned in “ON”), it could be anindication of leaking of brake fluid or wornbrake pads. If this occurs, immediatelystop the vehicle at the nearest safe placeand check the brake fluid level. If the fluidlevel is below the “MIN” mark in thereservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Havethe vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARUdealer for repair.

! Electronic Brake Force Distribution(EBD) system warning

The brake system warning light alsoilluminates if a malfunction occurs in theEBD system. In that event, it comes ontogether with the ABS warning light.The EBD system may be malfunctioning if

Black plate (131,1)


the brake system warning light and ABSwarning light illuminate simultaneouslyduring driving.Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-tional braking system will still function.However, the rear wheels will be moreprone to locking when the brakes areapplied harder than usual and the vehi-cle’s motion may therefore become some-what harder to control.If the brake system warning light and ABSwarning light illuminate simultaneously,take the following steps:1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,flat place.2. Shut down the engine, apply theparking brake and then restart it.3. Release the parking brake. If bothwarning lights go out, the EBD systemmay be faulty. Drive carefully to thenearest SUBARU dealer and have thesystem inspected.4. If both warning lights come on againand stay illuminated after the engine hasbeen restarted, shut down the engineagain, apply the parking brake, and checkthe brake fluid level.5. If the brake fluid level is not below the“MIN” mark, the EBD system may befaulty. Drive carefully to the nearestSUBARU dealer and have the systeminspected.

6. If the brake fluid level is below the“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.Instead, have the vehicle towed to thenearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

& Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light comes on whenthe tank is nearly empty approximately 2.6US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp gal). It onlyoperates when the ignition switch is in the“ON” position. When this light illuminates,fill the fuel tank immediately.


CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-ever the low fuel warning lightcomes on. Engine misfires as aresult of an empty tank could causedamage to the engine.

& Hill start assist warninglight (if equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, the Hill start assist warning lightilluminates. After the engine starts it willturn off. While the engine is rotating, ifthere are any malfunctions, the light willilluminate.

WARNING

When the Hill start assist systemlight illuminates, have the vehicleinspected at an authorized SUBARUdealer.

& Door open warninglight

The door open warning light comes on ifany door or the rear gate is not fullyclosed.

Always make sure this light is out beforeyou start to drive.

& All-Wheel Drive warn-ing light (AT vehicles)

The All-Wheel Drive warning light comeson when the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position and goes out after the


– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (132,1)



engine has started.This light comes on when All-Wheel Driveis disengaged and the drive mechanism isswitched to Front Wheel Drive for main-tenance or similar purposes.It flashes if the vehicle is driven with tiresof differing diameters fitted on the wheelsor with an excessively low air pressure inany of the tires.

CAUTION

Continuing to drive with the AWDwarning light flashing can damagethe powertrain. If the AWD warninglight starts to flash, promptly park ina safe place and check whether thetires have differing diameters andwhether any of the tires has anexcessively low inflation pressure.

& Vehicle DynamicsControl operation indi-cator light (if equipped)

This light comes on when the ignitionswitch is ON and goes out approximately2 seconds later.It blinks when the skid suppression func-tion is activated. It illuminates when onlythe traction control function is operating.The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably faulty under any of the followingconditions. Have your vehicle checked ata SUBARU dealer immediately.. The light does not come on when theignition switch is turned to the “ON”position.. The light does not go out even after aperiod of approximately 2 seconds afterthe ignition switch has been turned to the“ON” position.

& Vehicle DynamicsControl warning light (ifequipped)/Vehicle Dy-namics Control OFF in-dicator light (ifequipped)

This warning light has both the function ofindicating faults in the Vehicle DynamicsControl system and the function of indicat-ing that the Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem has been deactivated.It comes on in the event of a fault in thesystem and is on when the system is notoperating.This warning light comes on when theignition switch is turned to the “ON”position and goes out after the enginehas started. It indicates that the VehicleDynamics Control system is in normaloperation.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warninglight

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system isprobably inoperative under any of thefollowing conditions. Have your vehiclechecked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-ately.. The warning light does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position.. The warning light comes on while thevehicle is running.. If the electrical circuit of the VehicleDynamics Control system itself becomesfaulty, the warning light only comes on. Atthis time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-tem) remains fully operational.. The warning light comes on when theelectronic control system of the ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system be-comes faulty.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control systemprovides its ABS control through theelectrical circuit of the ABS system.Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, theVehicle Dynamics Control system be-comes unable to provide ABS control. Asa result, the Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem also becomes inoperative, caus-ing the warning light to come on. Thoughboth the Vehicle Dynamics Control and

Black plate (133,1)


ABS systems are inoperative in this case,the ordinary functions of the brake systemare still available. You will be safe whiledriving with this condition, but have yourvehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer assoon as possible.

NOTEIf the warning light behavior is asdescribed below, the Vehicle DynamicsControl system may be considerednormal.. The warning light comes on rightafter the engine is started but goes outimmediately, remaining off.. The warning light comes on afterengine startup and goes off while thevehicle is subsequently being driven.. The warning light comes on duringdriving, but it goes out immediately andremains off.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-dicator light

. It comes on when the Vehicle Dy-namics Control OFF switch is pressed.. It also comes on when the VehicleDynamics Control system is deactivated.

NOTE. The light may stay on for a whileafter the engine has been started,

especially in cold weather. This doesnot indicate the existence of a problem.The light should go out as soon as theengine has warmed up.. The indicator light comes on whenthe engine has developed a problemand the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator lamp is on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system isprobably faulty under the following condi-tion. Have your vehicle checked at aSUBARU dealer as soon as possible.. The light does not go out even after thelapse of several minutes (the engine haswarmed up) after the engine has started.

& Security indicator light

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

The security indicator light deters potential


– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (134,1)



thieves by indicating that the vehicle isequipped with an immobilizer system. Itbegins flashing (approximately once every3 seconds) approximately 60 secondsafter the ignition switch is turned from the“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK”position or immediately after the key ispulled out.If the security indicator light does not flash,the immobilizer system may not be func-tioning properly. If this occurs, contactyour SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g.,an imitation key), the security indicatorlight illuminates.

NOTEEven if the security indicator lightflashes irregularly or its fuse blows(the light does not flash if its fuse isblown), the immobilizer system willfunction normally.

& SPORT mode indicatorlight (AT vehicles)

This light comes on when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position andgoes out after the engine has started.When the selector lever is moved to themanual gate, the SPORT mode is se-lected and the indicator light comes on.

Refer to the “SPORT mode” section inchapter 7.

& Selector lever and gear posi-tion indicator (AT models) (ifequipped)

This indicator shows the position of theselector lever.When the manual mode is selected, thegear position indicator (which shows thecurrent gear selection) and the upshift/downshift indicator light up. Refer to the“Automatic transmission” section in chap-ter 7.

& Turn signal indicatorlights

These lights show the operation of the turn

signal or lane change signal.If the indicator lights do not blink or blinkrapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burnedout. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.Refer to the “Replacing bulbs” section inchapter 11.

& High beam indicatorlight

This light shows that the headlights are inthe high beam mode.This indicator light also comes on whenthe headlight flasher is operated.

& Cruise control indica-tor light

The cruise control indicator light comes onwhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position and goes out after approxi-mately 3 seconds.This light comes on when the “CRUISE”main switch is pressed.If you press the main switch button whileturning the ignition switch “ON”, the cruisecontrol function is deactivated and the“CRUISE” indicator light flashes. To re-activate the cruise control function, turnthe ignition switch back to the “Acc” or“LOCK” position, and then turn it again tothe “ON” position.

Black plate (135,1)


& Cruise control set in-dicator light

The cruise control set indicator lightcomes on when the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position and goes outafter approximately 3 seconds.This light comes on when vehicle speedhas been set.

& Front fog light indicatorlight (if equipped)

This indicator light is on while the front foglights are on.

& Headlight indicatorlight (if equipped)

This indicator light comes on when theheadlight switch is placed in the “ ” or“ ” position.

Clock

The time changes by 1 minute each timethe “+” button or “−” button is pressed.Pressing the “+” button moves the dis-played time forward, while pressing the “−”button moves the displayed time back.Pressing and holding either buttonchanges the displayed time continuously.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt toset the time while driving, as anaccident from inadequate attentionto the road could result.

NOTEIf the battery is disconnected, the timewill be erased. After reconnecting thebattery, set the correct time.


3

Black plate (136,1)



Information display

1) Outside temperature indicator2) Average fuel consumption indicator

With the ignition switch in the “ON”position, the outside temperature andaverage fuel consumption are indicatedon the display.

& Outside temperature indica-tor

1) U.S.-spec. models2) Canada-spec. models

The outside temperature indicator showsthe outside temperature in a range from−22 to 1228F (−30 to 508C).

The indicator can give a false readingunder any of the following conditions:. When there is too much sun.. During idling; while running at lowspeeds in a traffic jam; when the engineis restarted immediately following a shut-down.. When the actual outside temperaturefalls outside the specified indicator range.

! Road surface freeze warning indi-cation


When the outside temperature drops to378F (38C) or lower, the temperatureindication flashes to show that the roadsurface may be frozen.If the outside temperature drops to 378F(38C) or lower while the display is givingan indication other than the outsidetemperature, the display switches to theoutside temperature indication and flashesfor 5 seconds before returning to itsoriginal indication.If the display is already indicating anoutside temperature of 378F (38C) or lowerwhen the ignition switch is turned to the

Black plate (137,1)


“ON” position, the indication does notflash.

NOTEThe outside temperature indicationmay differ from the actual outsidetemperature. The road surface freezewarning indication should be treatedonly as a guide. Be sure to check thecondition of the road surface beforedriving.

& Average fuel consumption


This indication shows the average rate offuel consumption since the trip meter waslast reset.

Pressing the trip knob toggles the indica-tion between the average fuel consump-tion corresponding to the A trip meterindication and the average fuel consump-tion corresponding to the B trip meterindication.When either of the trip meter indications isreset, the corresponding average fuelconsumption value is also reset.

NOTE. The indicated values vary in accor-dance with changes in the vehicle’srunning conditions. Also, the indicatedvalues may differ slightly from theactual values and should thus betreated only as a guide.. When either trip meter indication isreset, the average fuel consumptioncorresponding to that trip meter indica-tion is not shown until the vehicle hassubsequently covered a distance of 1mile (or 1 km).

Light control switch

CAUTION

Use of any lights for a long period oftime while the engine is not runningcan cause the battery to discharge.

The light control switch only operateswhen the ignition key is inserted into theignition switch.Regardless of the position of the lightcontrol switch, the illuminated lights areturned off when the ignition key isremoved from the ignition switch.

NOTE. Even if the ignition key is removedfrom the ignition switch, the lights canbe illuminated by operating the lightcontrol switch position from “OFF” to“ ” and “ ”.. If the lights are illuminated when theignition key is removed from the igni-tion switch, the chirp sound informsthe driver that the lights are illumi-nated.


– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (138,1)



& Headlights

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob onthe end of the turn signal lever.

first positionParking lights, instrument panel illumina-tion, tail lights, front side marker lights andlicense plate lights are on.

second positionHeadlights, parking lights, instrument pa-nel illumination, tail lights, front sidemarker lights, and license plate lights areon.

& High/low beam change (dim-mer)

To change from low beam to high beam,push the turn signal lever forward. Whenthe headlights are on high beam, the highbeam indicator light “ ” on the instru-ment panel is also on.To switch back to low beam, pull the leverback to the detent position.

& Headlight flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the levertoward you and then release it. The highbeam will stay on for as long as you holdthe lever. The headlight flasher workseven though the light switch is in the“OFF” position.

When the headlights are on high beam,the high beam indicator light “ ” on theinstrument panel also comes on.

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashingposition for more than just a fewseconds.

Black plate (139,1)


& Daytime running light system

WARNING

The brightness of the illumination ofthe high beam headlights is reducedby the daytime running light system.The light switch must always beturned to the “ ” position when itis dark outside.

The high beam headlights will automati-cally come on at reduced brightness whenthe engine has started, under the followingconditions:The selector lever is in a position otherthan the “P” position (AT vehicles).. The parking brake is fully released.. The light switch is in the “OFF” or “ ”position.

NOTEWhen the light switch is in the “ ”position, the front side marker lights,parking lights, tail lights and licenseplate lights are illuminated.

Turn signal lever

To activate the right turn signal, push theturn signal lever up. To activate the leftturn signal, push the turn signal leverdown. When the turn is finished, the leverwill return automatically. If the lever doesnot return after cornering, return the leverto the neutral position by hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turnsignal lever up or down slightly and hold itduring the lane change. The turn signalindicator lights will flash in the direction ofthe turn or lane change. The lever willreturn automatically to the neutral positionwhen you release it.

Illumination brightness con-trol

The brightness of clock display, audio, airconditioner, information display and instru-ment panel illumination dims when thelight switch is in the “ ” or “ ”positions. You can adjust brightness ofthe instrument panel illumination for bettervisibility.For turbo models, you can also adjust thebrightness of the instrument panel illumi-nation when the lighting switch is in theOFF position.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.To darken, turn the control dial downward.


– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (140,1)



NOTEWhen the control dial is turned fullyupward, the illumination brightnessbecomes the maximum and the auto-matic dimming function does not workat all.

Front fog light switch (ifequipped)

The front fog lights operate only when thelight switch is in the “ ” position.However, the front fog lights turn off whenthe headlights are switched to high beam.To turn on the front fog lights, turn the frontfog light switch on the turn signal leverupward to the “ ” position. To turn off thefront fog lights, turn the switch back downto the “OFF” position.

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

The indicator light located on the combi-nation meter will illuminate when the frontfog lights are on.

Black plate (141,1)


Wiper and washer

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use thewindshield washer until the wind-shield is sufficiently warmed by thedefroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid canfreeze on the windshield, blockingyour view.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-tinuously for more than 10 sec-onds, or when the washer fluidtank is empty. This may causeoverheating of the washer motor.Check the washer fluid levelfrequently, such as at fuel stops.

. Do not operate the wipers whenthe windshield or rear window isdry. This may scratch the glass,damage the wiper blades andcause the wiper motor to burnout. Before operating the wiperon a dry windshield or rearwindow, always use the wind-shield washer.

. In freezing weather, be sure thatthe wiper blades are not frozen tothe windshield or rear windowbefore switching on the wipers.Attempting to operate the wiperwith the blades frozen to thewindow glass could cause notonly the wiper blades to bedamaged but also the wiper mo-tor to burn out. If the wiperblades are frozen to the windowglass, be sure to operate thedefroster, windshield wiper dei-cer (if equipped) or rear windowdefogger before turning on thewiper.

. If the wipers stop during opera-tion because of ice or some otherobstruction on the window, thewiper motor could burn out evenif the wiper switch is turned off. Ifthis occurs, promptly stop thevehicle in a safe place, turn theignition switch to the “LOCK”position and clean the windowglass to allow proper wiper op-eration.

. Use clean water if windshieldwasher fluid is unavailable. Inareas where water freezes inwinter, use SUBARU WindshieldWasher Fluid or the equivalent.

Refer to the “Windshield washerfluid” section in chapter 11.

Also, when driving the vehiclewhen there are freezing tempera-tures, use non-freezing type wi-per blades.

. Do not clean the wiper bladeswith gasoline or a solvent, suchas paint thinner or benzine. Thiswill cause deterioration of thewiper blades.

NOTE. The wiper operates only when theignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc”position.. The front wiper motor is protectedagainst overloads by a circuit breaker.If the motor operates continuouslyunder an unusually heavy load, thecircuit breaker may trip to stop themotor temporarily. If this happens, parkyour vehicle in a safe place, turn off thewiper switch, and wait for approxi-mately 10 minutes. The circuit breakerwill reset itself, and the wipers willagain operate normally.. Clean your wiper blades and win-dow glass periodically with a washersolution to prevent streaking, and toremove accumulations of road salt or


– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (142,1)



road film. Keep the washer buttondepressed at least for 1 second so thatwasher solution will be sprinkled allover the windshield or rear window.. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-rial on the windshield or the wiperblade results in jerky wiper operationand streaking on the glass. If youcannot remove those streaks afteroperating the washer or if the wiperoperation is jerky, clean the outer sur-face of the windshield or rear windowand the wiper blades using a sponge orsoft cloth with a neutral detergent ormild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,rinse the window glass and wiperblades with clean water. The glass isclean if no beads form on the glasswhen you rinse with water.. If you cannot eliminate the streakingeven after following this procedure,replace the wiper blades with newones. For replacement instructions,refer to the “Replacement of wiperblades” section in chapter 11.

& Windshield wiper and washerswitches

The wiper operates only when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” or “Acc” position.

! Windshield wipers

OFF: Park: Intermittent

LO: Low speedHI: High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wipercontrol lever down.To turn the wipers off, return the lever tothe “OFF” position.

! Wiper intermittent time control

When the wiper switch is in the “ ”position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-ing interval of the wiper.

The operating interval can be adjustedcontinuously from the shortest interval tothe longest.Two click stop positions of the dial mayhelp you to aim at your desired interval.The operating interval can be adjusted innine steps.

Black plate (143,1)


! Mist (for a single wipe)

1) 5-door2) 4-door

For a single wipe of the wipers, pull thelever toward you. The wipers operate untilyou release the lever.

! Washer

To wash the windshield, push the washerbutton at the end of the wiper control lever.The washer fluid sprays until you releasethe washer button. The wipers operatewhile you push the button.

& Rear window wiper andwasher switch – 5-door

: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)ON: NormalOFF: Park

: Washer

! Rear wiper

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob onthe end of the wiper control lever upwardto the “INT” or “ON” position.To turn the wiper off, return the knob onthe end of the lever to the “OFF” position.With the switch turned to the “INT”position, the rear wiper will operate inter-mittently at intervals corresponding to thevehicle speed (longer when the vehiclespeed is low; shorter when the vehiclespeed is high).


– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (144,1)



When you subsequently move the selec-tor lever of the automatic transmission tothe “R” position, the rear wiper will switchto continuous operation. When you movethe selector lever from the “R” position tosome other position, the rear wiper willreturn to intermittent operation.

! Washer

To wash the rear window while the rearwiper is operating, turn the knob clockwiseto the “ ” position. The washer fluidsprays until you release the knob.To wash the rear window when the rearwiper is not in use, turn the knob counter-clockwise to the “ ” position. The washerfluid sprays, and 2 seconds later the rearwiper operates. Releasing the knob stopsthe washer fluid spray, and 3 secondslater the rear wiper stops.

Rear window defogger but-ton

Manual climate control system

Automatic climate control system

The rear window defogger operates onlywhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position.The rear window defogger button islocated on the climate control panel.To turn on the defogger, push the button.To turn it off, push the button again.The indicator light located on the buttonlights up while the rear window defogger isoperating.

The defogger will automatically shut offafter approximately 15 minutes. If thewindow clears before that time, push thebutton to turn it off. It also turns off whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “Acc” or“LOCK” position. If defrosting or defoggingis desired when you restart your vehicle,you have to push the button to turn it onagain.Your SUBARU dealer can set your rearwindow defogger for continuous opera-tion. Contact your SUBARU dealer fordetails.

Once the rear window defogger has beenset for continuous operation, the rearwindow defogger repeatedly operates for15 minutes, stops for two minutes, andagain operates for 15 minutes. If thebattery voltage drops below the permis-sible level, continuous operation is can-celed and operation stops as described in

Black plate (145,1)


the following.. If the battery voltage drops below thepermissible level within 15 minutes ofdepression of the button, continuousoperation is canceled and the rear windowdefogger stops operating 15 minutes later.. If the battery voltage drops below thepermissible level after the rear windowdefogger has, following depression of thebutton, operated for 15 minutes, stoppedoperating for two minutes, and startedoperating again, the rear window defoggerimmediately stops operating.

CAUTION

. Do not use sharp instruments orwindow cleaner containing abra-sives to clean the inner surfaceof the rear window. They maydamage the conductors printedon the window.

. To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not operate thedefogger continuously for anylonger than necessary.

NOTE. If your vehicle is equipped with theoutside mirror defogger, the outsidemirror defogger operates while the rear

window defogger is operating.. Turn on the rear window defogger ifthe wiper is frozen to the glass.

Windshield wiper deicer (ifequipped)




– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (146,1)



The windshield wiper deicer operates onlywhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position.

Before turning on the windshield wiperdeicer, remove any snow from the wind-shield. To turn on the windshield wiperdeicer, push the button. The indicator lightlocated on the button lights up while thewindshield wiper deicer is operating.The windshield wiper deicer will automa-tically shut off after approximately 15minutes. If the windshield wiper bladeshave been deiced completely before thattime, push the button to turn it off. It alsoturns off when the ignition switch is turnedto the “Acc” or “LOCK” position. If deicingis not complete when you restart yourvehicle, you have to push the button toturn the deicer on again.Your SUBARU dealer can set your wind-shield wiper deicer for continuous opera-tion. Contact your SUBARU dealer fordetails.

Once the windshield wiper deicer hasbeen set for continuous operation, press-ing the button results in continuous opera-tion. The windshield wiper deicer auto-matically stops operating if any one of thefollowing conditions occurs during contin-uous operation.. The outside temperature becomes

418F (58C) or higher.. The vehicle speed remains at 9 mph(15 km/h) or lower for 15 minutes.. The battery voltage decreases belowthe permissible level.

CAUTION

To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not operate thewindshield wiper deicer continu-ously for any longer than necessary.

NOTEIf your vehicle is equipped with theoutside mirror defogger, the outsidemirror defogger operates while thewindshield wiper deicer is operating.

Mirrors

Always check that the inside and outsidemirrors are properly adjusted before youstart driving.

& Inside mirror

The inside mirror has a day and nightposition. Pull the tab at the bottom of themirror toward you for the night position.Push it away for the day position. Thenight position reduces glare from head-lights.

Black plate (147,1)


! Auto-dimming mirror/compass (ifequipped)

1) Left button2) Auto dimming indicator3) Photosensor4) Right button

The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glarefeature which automatically reduces glarecoming from headlights of vehicles behindyou. It also contains a built-in compass.. By pressing and releasing the leftbutton, the automatic dimming function istoggled on or off. When the automaticdimming function is on, the auto dimmingindicator light (green) located to the rightof the button will illuminate.. By pressing and releasing the rightbutton, the compass display is toggled on

or off. When the compass is on, anilluminated compass reading will appearin the lower part of the mirror.

Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,the mirror surface turns bright if thetransmission is shifted into reverse. Thisis to ensure good rearward visibility duringreversing.

! Photosensors

The mirror has a photosensor attached onboth the front and back sides. If the glarefrom the headlights of vehicles behind youstrikes the mirror, these sensors detect itand make the reflection surface of themirror dimmer to help prevent you frombeing blinded. For this reason, use carenot to cover the sensors with stickers, orother similar items. Periodically wipe the

sensors clean using a piece of dry softcotton cloth or an applicator.

! Compass calibration

1. For optimum calibration, switch off allnonessential electrical accessories (rearwindow defogger, heater/air conditioningsystem, spotlight, etc.) and ensure alldoors are shut.2. Drive to an open, level area away fromlarge metallic objects or structures andmake certain the ignition switch is in the“ON” position.3. Press and hold the left button for 3seconds then release, and the compasswill enter the calibration mode. “CAL” anddirection will be displayed.4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL”disappears from the display (approxi-mately two or three circles). The compassis now calibrated.5. Further calibration may be necessaryshould outside influences cause the mirrorto read inaccurately. You will know thatthis has occurred if your compass beginsto read in only limited directions. Shouldyou encounter this situation, return to stepone of the above procedure and recali-brate the mirror.


– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (148,1)



! Compass zone adjustment

Compass calibration zones

1. The zone setting is factory preset toZone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibrationzone” map shown above or one attachedto the end of this manual to verify that thecompass zone setting is correct for yourgeographical location.2. Press and hold the right button for 3seconds then release, and the word“ZONE” will briefly appear and then thezone number will be displayed.3. Press the right-hand button repeatedlyto cycle the display through all possiblezone settings. Stop cycling when thecorrect zone setting for your location isdisplayed.4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will

exit the zone setting mode.

& Outside mirrors

! Convex mirror (Passenger side)

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convexmirror and farther away than whenviewed in a flat mirror. Do not usethe convex mirror to judge thedistance of vehicles behind youwhen changing lanes. Use the insidemirror (or glance backwards) todetermine the actual size and dis-tance of objects that you view inconvex mirror.

! Remote control mirror switch

1) Selection switch2) Direction control switch

The remote control mirrors operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the “ON” or“Acc” position.1. Press either end of the selectionswitch, “L” for the left, “R” for the right.2. Move the direction control switch in thedirection you want to move the mirror.3. Return the selection switch to theneutral position to prevent unintentionaloperation.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-ally.

Black plate (149,1)


! Outside mirror defogger (ifequipped)



The outside mirror defogger shares the

button with rear window defogger.The outside mirror defogger operates onlywhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position.To turn on the outside mirror defogger,push the button. To turn it off, push thebutton again. The indicator light located onthe button lights up while the outsidemirror defogger is operating.

The defogger will automatically shut offafter approximately 15 minutes. If themirror clears before that time, push thebutton to turn it off. It also turns off whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “Acc” or“LOCK” position. If defrosting or defoggingis desired when you restart your vehicle,you have to push the button to turn it onagain.

NOTEWhile the outside mirror defogger isoperating, the rear window defoggeralso operates.

CAUTION

To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not operate the de-fogger continuously for any longerthan necessary.

Tilt steering wheel (ifequipped)

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheeltilt position while driving. Thismay cause loss of vehicle controland result in personal injury.

. If the lever cannot be raised tothe fixed position, adjust thesteering wheel again. It is dan-gerous to drive without lockingthe steering wheel. This maycause loss of vehicle controland result in personal injury.

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the


– CONTINUED –

3

Black plate (150,1)



“Front seats” section in chapter 1.2. Pull the tilt lock lever down.3. Move the steering wheel to the desiredlevel.4. Pull the lever up to lock the steeringwheel in place.5. Make sure that the steering wheel issecurely locked by moving it up and down.

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel(if equipped)

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheeltilt/telescopic position while driv-ing. This may cause loss ofvehicle control and result inpersonal injury.

. If the lever cannot be raised tothe fixed position, adjust thesteering wheel again. It is dan-gerous to drive without lockingthe steering wheel. This maycause loss of vehicle controland result in personal injury.

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the“Front seats” section in chapter 1.2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.3. Move the steering wheel to the desiredlevel.4. Pull the lever up to lock the steeringwheel in place.5. Make sure that the steering wheel issecurely locked by moving it up and down,and forward and backward.

Black plate (151,1)


Horn

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.


3

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2006/ 1/ 17Left Page

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

Black plate (7,1)


Ventilator.............................................................. 4-2Air flow selection ................................................ 4-2Center and side ventilators.................................. 4-3

Manual climate control system(if equipped) ..................................................... 4-3Control panel ...................................................... 4-3Heater operation ................................................. 4-5Air conditioner operation..................................... 4-7

Automatic climate control system(if equipped) ..................................................... 4-8Control panel ...................................................... 4-8To use as full-automatic climate controlsystem.............................................................. 4-8

To use as semi-automatic climate controlsystem.............................................................. 4-8

Fan speed control dial......................................... 4-9Temperature control dial...................................... 4-9Air flow control dial ............................................. 4-9Air inlet selection button .................................... 4-10

Air conditioner button........................................ 4-10Temperature sensors ......................................... 4-11

Operating tips for heater and airconditioner ...................................................... 4-12Cleaning ventilation grille................................... 4-12Efficient cooling after parking in directsunlight ........................................................... 4-12

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerantcircuit.............................................................. 4-12

Checking air conditioning system before summerseason ............................................................ 4-12

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity andlow temperature weather conditions ................. 4-12

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engineis heavily loaded.............................................. 4-12

Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-12Air filtration system (if equipped)..................... 4-13

Replacing an air filter......................................... 4-13

Climate control

4

Black plate (154,1)


4-2 Climate control

Ventilator

& Air flow selection

Black plate (155,1)


& Center and side ventilators

! Center ventilators

Move the tab up and down or right and leftto adjust the flow direction.

! Side ventilators

1) Open2) Close3) Thumb-wheel

Move the tab up and down or right and leftto adjust the flow direction.To open or close the ventilator, turn thethumb-wheel up or down.

Manual climate control sys-tem (if equipped)

& Control panel

1) Temperature control dial2) Fan speed control dial3) Air flow control dial4) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

the “Rear window defogger button” sec-tion in chapter 3.)

5) Air conditioner button6) Air inlet selection button

! Temperature control dial

This dial regulates the temperature of airflow from the air outlets over a range fromthe blue side (cool) to red side (warm).

Climate control 4-3

– CONTINUED –

4

Black plate (156,1)


4-4 Climate control

! Fan speed control dial

The fan operates only when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position. Thefan speed control dial is used to selectfour fan speeds.

! Air flow control dial

This dial has the following five positions:

: Air flows through the instrument paneloutlets.

: Air flows through the instrument paneloutlets and the foot outlets.

: Air flows through the foot outlets andsome through the windshield defrosteroutlets.

: Air flows through the windshielddefroster outlets and foot outlets.

: Air flows through the windshielddefroster outlets.

NOTEWhen the dial is placed in the “ ” or“ ” position, the air conditioner com-pressor operates automatically regard-less of the position of the air condi-tioner button to defog the windshieldquickly. However the indicator on theair conditioner button will not come on.At the same time, the air inlet selectionis automatically set to “outside air”

mode.In this state, you cannot select “recir-culation” mode by manually pressingthe air inlet selection button.Also, you cannot stop the air condi-tioner compressor by pressing the airconditioner button.

! Air conditioner button

The air conditioner operates only whenthe engine is running.

Push the air conditioner button while thefan is in operation to turn on the airconditioner. The indicator light will comeon.

Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.

! Air inlet selection button

ON position (Recirculation): Interior airis recirculated inside the vehicle. Push theair inlet selection button to the ON posi-tion. The indicator light will come on.Place the air inlet selection button to theON position for fast cooling with the airconditioner or when driving on a dustyroad.

OFF position (Outside air): Outside air isdrawn into the passenger compartment.Push the air inlet selection button again tothe OFF position. The indicator light will gooff.Place the air inlet selection button to theOFF position when the interior has cooledto a comfortable temperature and the roadis no longer dusty.

Black plate (157,1)


WARNING

Continued operation with the airinlet selection button in the ONposition may fog up the windows.Switch to the OFF position as soonas the outside dusty conditionclears.

& Heater operation

! Defrosting or defogging the wind-shield

To direct warm air to the windshield andfront door windows:1. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”position.2. Turn the temperature control dial all

the way to the right.3. Set the fan speed control dial to thehighest speed.

If your vehicle is equipped with an airconditioner, when the “ ” or “ ” positionis selected, the air conditioner compressorautomatically operates regardless of theposition of the air conditioner button todefog the windshield quickly.However, the air conditioner indicator lightdoes not come on at this time.

NOTEWarm air also comes out from the rightand left air outlets. To stop warm airflow from these outlets, turn the corre-sponding thumb-wheel down.

! Heating and defrosting

To direct warm air toward the floor and thewindshield:1. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”position.2. Set the temperature control dial to themost comfortable level.3. Set the fan speed control dial to thedesired speed.

If your vehicle is equipped with an airconditioner, when the “ ” or “ ” positionis selected, the air conditioner compressorautomatically operates regardless of theposition of the air conditioner button todefog the windshield quickly.However, the air conditioner indicator lightdoes not come on at this time.

Climate control 4-5

– CONTINUED –

4

Black plate (158,1)


4-6 Climate control


! Heating

To direct warm air toward the floor:1. Set the air inlet selection button to theOFF position.2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”position.3. Set the temperature control dial to themost comfortable level.4. Set the fan speed control dial to thedesired speed.


! Bi-level heating

This setting allows you to direct air ofdifferent temperatures from the instrumentpanel and foot outlets. The air from thefoot outlets is slightly warmer than fromthe instrument panel outlets.1. Set the air inlet selection button to theOFF position.2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”position.3. Set the temperature control dial to thedesired temperature level.4. Set the fan speed control dial to the

desired speed.

Setting the temperature control dial fullyturned to the red area or blue areadecreases the temperature differencebetween the air from the instrument paneloutlets and the air from the foot outlets.

! Ventilation

To force outside air through the instrumentpanel outlets:1. Set the air inlet selection button to theOFF position.2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”position.3. Set the temperature control dial all theway left.4. Set the fan speed control dial to thedesired speed.

Black plate (159,1)


When driving on a dusty road, set the airinlet selection button to the “ON” position.

WARNING

Continued operation with the airinlet selection button in the ONposition may fog up the windows.Switch to the OFF position as soonas the outside dusty conditionclears.

& Air conditioner operation

! Cooling or dehumidifying

1) ON position

For cooling and dehumidification of thepassenger compartment, performing thefollowing steps will allow air to flow

through the instrument panel outlets:1. Set the air inlet selection button to theOFF position.2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”position.3. Set the air conditioner button to the“ON” position.4. Set the temperature control dial to theblue side.5. Set the fan speed control dial at thehighest speed.

! Defrosting or defogging

To direct warm air to the windshield andfront door windows:1. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”position.2. Set the temperature control dial to the

red side.3. Set the fan speed control dial at thehighest speed.

The air conditioner compressor automati-cally operates when the air flow controldial set in the “ ” or “ ” position toprovide better defogging performance.

Climate control 4-7

4

Black plate (160,1)


4-8 Climate control

Automatic climate controlsystem (if equipped)

Although this climate control system canbe used as a full-automatic climate controlsystem, it can also, if desired, be used asa semi-automatic climate control system.When it is used as a full-automatic climatecontrol system, the outlet air temperature,fan speed, air flow distribution, air inletcontrol, and air conditioner compressoroperation are all automatically controlledto maintain a constant, comfortable tem-perature inside the vehicle.

NOTE. Operate the automatic climate con-trol system when the engine is running.. When the engine coolant is cold, theblower does not run.. In the “AUTO” mode, when the airtemperature in the passenger compart-ment is sufficiently cool, the air condi-tioner compressor does not operate.For efficient defogging or dehumidify-ing in cold weather, press the “A/C”button to operate the air conditionercompressor.. Even when cooling is not necessary,setting the temperature much lowerthan the current outlet air temperatureturns on the air conditioner compres-

sor automatically and the “A/C” indi-cator light on the control panel comeson.

& Control panel

1) Temperature control dial2) Fan speed control dial3) Air flow control dial4) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

the “Rear window defogger button” sec-tion in chapter 3.)

5) Air inlet selection button6) Air conditioner button

& To use as full-automatic cli-mate control system

Place the temperature control dial in theposition for your desired temperature, then

set the other dials and buttons as de-scribed in the following. The system’sfunctions will then switch to AUTO modeand be controlled automatically.. Air flow control dial: AUTO position. Fan speed control dial: AUTO position. Air inlet selection button: Press for atleast 1 second. (Indicator will flash twice.). Air conditioner button: Press for at least1 second. (Indicator will flash twice.)

& To use as semi-automaticclimate control system

Each function can be individually set toAUTO mode independently of the others.Any function set to AUTO mode is con-trolled automatically. Any function not setto AUTO mode can be manually adjustedas desired.The temperature can be set within a rangeof 65 to 858F (20 to 308C).

Black plate (161,1)


& Fan speed control dial

The fan operates only with the ignitionswitch in the ON position. The fan speedcontrol dial is used to select the AUTO(automatic control) mode or to select thedesired fan speed. The dial’s positionsand their functions are as follows:OFF: The fan does not operate.AUTO: The fan speed is adjusted auto-matically in accordance with the airtemperature inside and outside the pas-senger compartment, the intensity of sun-light, and other factors. SUBARU recom-mends using the AUTO position.Other positions: The fan speed can beadjusted in 7 steps.

NOTEWith the fan speed control dial in theAUTO position and the air flow controldial in the “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” position,the fan does not operate during enginewarm-up until the engine coolant tem-perature exceeds approx. 1228F (508C).

& Temperature control dial

This dial is used to set the desired interiortemperature. With the dial set to yourdesired temperature, the system automa-tically adjusts the temperature of airsupplied from the outlets such that thedesired temperature is achieved andmaintained.If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise,the system gives maximum cooling per-

formance. If the dial is turned fully clock-wise, the system gives maximum heatingperformance.

& Air flow control dial

This dial has the following six positions.The outlets from which air is supplied ineach position are as follows:AUTO: The air flow control is adjustedautomatically in accordance with the airtemperature inside and outside the pas-senger compartment, the intensity of sun-light, and other factors. SUBARU recom-mends using the AUTO position.

: Instrument panel outlets: Instrument panel outlets and foot

outlets: Foot outlets and windshield defroster

Climate control 4-9

– CONTINUED –

4

Black plate (162,1)


4-10 Climate control

outlets (relatively little air from windshielddefroster outlets): Windshield defroster outlets and foot

outlets: Windshield defroster outlets

NOTEWhen the dial is placed in the “ ” or“ ” position, the air inlet selection isautomatically set to “outside air”mode.

& Air inlet selection button

ON position (Recirculation): Interior airis recirculated inside the vehicle. Push theair inlet selection button to the ON positionfor fast cooling with the air conditioner orwhen driving on a dusty road. The

indicator light will come on.OFF position (Outside Air): Outside airis drawn into the passenger compartment.Push the air inlet selection button to theOFF position when the interior has cooledto a comfortable temperature and the roadis no longer dusty. The indicator light willgo off.AUTO: When the air inlet selection buttonis pressed for at least 1 second, theindicator flashes twice. The air inlet controlis then adjusted automatically in accor-dance with the air temperature inside andoutside the passenger compartment, theintensity of sunlight, and other factors.Pressing the air inlet selection buttoncancels the “AUTO” mode. SUBARUrecommends using the AUTO position.

WARNING

Continued operation in the ON posi-tion may fog up the windows. Switchto the OFF position as soon as theoutside dusty condition clears.

& Air conditioner button

The button positions and their functionsare as follows:ON: The air conditioner operates while thefan is running.Push the button to select this position. Theindicator light will illuminate.OFF: The air conditioner does not oper-ate.Push the button again to select thisposition. The indicator light will turn off.AUTO: When the button is pressed for atleast 1 second, the indicator flashes twice.The air conditioner compressor operationis then adjusted automatically in accor-dance with the air temperature inside andoutside the passenger compartment, theintensity of sunlight, and other factors.

Black plate (163,1)


Pressing the button cancels the “AUTO”mode. SUBARU recommends using theAUTO position.

NOTEThe air conditioner’s compressor doesnot operate with an outside tempera-ture of 328F (08C) or lower.

& Temperature sensors

1) Interior air temperature sensor2) Solar sensor

The automatic climate control systememploys several sensors. These sensorsare delicate. If they are not treated

properly and become damaged, the sys-tem may not be able to control the interiortemperature correctly. To avoid damagingthe sensors, observe the following pre-cautions:– Do not subject the sensors to impact.– Keep water away from the sensors.– Do not cover the sensors.

The sensors are located as follows:– Solar sensor: beside the windshielddefroster grille.– Interior air temperature sensor: nearthe ignition switch.– Outside temperature sensor: behindthe front grille.

Climate control 4-11

4

Black plate (164,1)



Operating tips for heater andair conditioner

& Cleaning ventilation grille

Always keep the front ventilation inlet grillefree of snow, leaves, or other obstructionsto ensure efficient heating and defrosting.Since the condenser is located in front ofthe radiator, this area should be kept cleanbecause cooling performance is impairedby any accumulation of insects and leaveson the condenser.

& Efficient cooling after parkingin direct sunlight

After parking in direct sunlight, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes toallow outside air to circulate into the

heated interior. This results in quickercooling by the air conditioner. Keep thewindows closed during the operation ofthe air conditioner for maximum coolingefficiency.

& Lubrication oil circulation inthe refrigerant circuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor ata low engine speed (at idle or low drivingspeeds) a few minutes each month duringthe off-season to circulate its oil.

& Checking air conditioningsystem before summer sea-son

Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-ant leaks, hose conditions, and properoperation each spring. Have yourSUBARU dealer perform this check.

& Cooling and dehumidifying inhigh humidity and low tem-perature weather conditions

Under certain weather conditions (highrelative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) asmall amount of water vapor emissionfrom the air outlets may be noticed. Thiscondition is normal and does not indicateany problem with the air conditioningsystem.

& Air conditioner compressorshut-off when engine isheavily loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage,the air conditioner compressor is designedto temporarily shut off during air condi-tioner operation whenever the acceleratoris fully depressed such as during rapidacceleration or when driving on a steepupgrade.

& Refrigerant for your climatecontrol system

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendlyrefrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-od of adding, changing or checking therefrigerant is different from the method forCFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARUdealer for service. Repairs needed as aresult of using the wrong refrigerant arenot covered under warranty.

Black plate (165,1)


Air filtration system (ifequipped)

If your vehicle’s air conditioning system isequipped with an air filtration system,replace the filter element according tothe replacement schedule as follows. Thisschedule should be followed to maintainthe filter’s dust collection ability. Underextremely dusty conditions, the filtershould be replaced more frequently. It isrecommended that you have your filterchecked or replaced by your SUBARUdealer. For replacement, use only agenuine SUBARU air filter kit.

Replacement schedule:

Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000km) whichever comes first

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if thefollowing occurs, even if it is not yettime to change the filter:

– Reduction of the air flow throughthe vents.

– Windshield gets easily fogged ormisted.

NOTEThe filter can influence the air condi-tioning, heating and defroster perfor-mance if not properly maintained.

& Replacing an air filter1. Remove the glove box.

(1) Open the glove box.

(2) Remove the damper shaft from theglove box.

(3) Pull out the glove box.

2. Remove the air filter.


– CONTINUED –

4

Black plate (166,1)



3. Replace the air filter element with anew one.

CAUTION

The arrow mark on the filter mustpoint UP.

4. Reinstall the glove box, and connectthe damper shaft.5. Close the glove box.6. LABEL installation

(1) Fill out the information on theservice label (small).

1) Service label

(2) Attach the service label to thedriver’s side door pillar.

1) Caution label

(3) Attach the caution label next to the

Black plate (167,1)


air filter as shown in the illustration.


4

Black plate (2,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

Black plate (9,1)


Antenna system .................................................. 5-2Roof antenna ...................................................... 5-2FM reception....................................................... 5-2

XMTM satellite radio reception (if equipped)...... 5-2Installation of accessories.................................. 5-4Audio set ............................................................. 5-5

Type A audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-5Type B audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-6

Power and sound controls ................................. 5-7Power switch and volume control ........................ 5-7Sound control ..................................................... 5-7Adjustable level of each mode ............................. 5-9

FM/AM radio operation ...................................... 5-10FM/AM selection................................................. 5-10Tuning ............................................................... 5-10Displaying radio PS (Program Service Name) andRT (Radio Text) ................................................ 5-12

Station preset .................................................... 5-12Satellite radio operation (if equipped) .............. 5-13

XMTM satellite radio ............................................ 5-13Sirius satellite radio ........................................... 5-13Satellite radio reception...................................... 5-13Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner ................... 5-13Band selection ................................................... 5-14

Channel and category selection ......................... 5-14Channel preset .................................................. 5-15Display selection ............................................... 5-16

CD player operation .......................................... 5-16How to insert a CD (type A)................................ 5-17How to insert a CD(s) (type B)............................ 5-17How to play back a CD ...................................... 5-18To select a track from its beginning.................... 5-19Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing ..................... 5-20Repeating .......................................................... 5-20Random playback .............................................. 5-21Scan ................................................................. 5-22Display selection ............................................... 5-22Folder selection................................................. 5-23How to eject a CD from the player (type A) ......... 5-23How to eject CDs from the player (type B) .......... 5-23When the following messages are displayed....... 5-24

AUX unit operation ............................................ 5-25AUX jack ........................................................... 5-25AUX inputs selection button............................... 5-25

Audio control buttons (if equipped) ................. 5-26MODE button..................................................... 5-26

Precautions to observe when handling acompact disc................................................... 5-27

Audio

5

Black plate (170,1)


5-2 Audio

Antenna system

& Roof antenna

CAUTION

. Be sure to lower the antenna rodbefore entering garages, parkingtowers and other locations withlow ceilings.

. Remove the antenna rod beforewashing your car at a car wash. Ifthe antenna rod is left attached, itmay scratch the roof.

. When reinstalling the removedantenna rod, be sure to fullytighten it.

1) Unscrew

2) Remove

The roof antenna is installed in the centerat the rear part of the roof.

It is possible to remove the antenna rod byunscrewing it from its base.

& FM receptionAlthough FM is normally static free,reception can be affected by the surround-ing area, atmospheric conditions, stationstrength and transmitter distance. Build-ings or other obstructions may causemomentary static, flutter or station inter-ference. If reception continues to beunsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.

XMTM satellite radio reception(if equipped)

XMTM is a continental U.S. based satelliteradio service that offers more than 160coast to coast channels, including music,news, sports, talk and children’s program-ming. XMTM provides digital quality audioand text information, including song titleand artist name. A service fee is requiredto receive the XMTM service. For moreinformation, contact XMTM atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346) for U.S.,www.xmradio.ca or 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677) for Canada.

The XMTM satellite radio receiver that isfitted to your vehicle receives the neces-sary signals from two specially designatedsatellites that are in a geostationary orbitover the equator. One satellite covers theeast coast and the other covers the westcoast. Both of them direct their signalsnorth. These signals are then relayedthroughout the USA by a network ofground repeater stations. The satelliteradio signals are transmitted as “line ofsight” signals. Line of sight signals can beblocked by objects such as buildings, butthe network of repeater stations allowssignal coverage within urban areas suchas cities.

Black plate (171,1)


You may experience problems in receivingXMTM satellite radio signals in the follow-ing situations.. If you are driving northward in a coastalarea

You will notice that the XMTM satelliteradio antenna is fixed to the upper righthand corner of your windshield.

The signal comes from the south and maynot be able to reach the antenna in somecircumstances when you are driving north.

. If you are driving in a tunnel or acovered parking area. If you are driving beneath the top levelof a multi-level freeway. If you drive under a bridge. If you are driving next to a tall vehicle(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks thesignal. If you are driving in a valley where thesurrounding hills or peaks block the signalfrom the south. If you are driving on a mountain roadwhere the southern direction is blocked bymountains

. If you are driving in an area with talltrees that block the signal (33 ft (10 m) ormore), for example on a road that goesthrough a dense forest. The signal can become weak in someareas that are not covered by the repeaterstation network.

Please note that these may be otherunforeseen circumstances when thereare problems with the reception of XMTM

satellite radio signals.

Audio 5-3

5

Black plate (172,1)


5-4 Audio

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealerbefore installing a citizen band radio orother transmitting device in your vehicle.Such devices may cause the electroniccontrol system to malfunction if they areincorrectly installed or if they are notsuited for the vehicle.

Black plate (173,1)


Audio set

Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the following audio sets. See the pagesindicated in this section for operating details.

& Type A audio set (if equipped)

The audio set will operate only when theignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”position.. Power and sound controls: refer topage 5-7. Radio operation: refer to page 5-10. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):refer to page 5-13. CD (compact disc) player operation:refer to page 5-16. AUX unit operation: refer to page 5-25

Audio 5-5

– CONTINUED –

5

Black plate (174,1)


5-6 Audio

& Type B audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when theignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”position.. Power and sound controls: refer topage 5-7. Radio operation: refer to page 5-10. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):refer to page 5-13. CD (compact disc) player operation:refer to page 5-16. AUX unit operation: refer to page 5-25

Black plate (175,1)


Power and sound controls

& Power switch and volumecontrol

The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF)and volume control. The radio is turnedON and OFF by pushing the dial, and thevolume is controlled by turning the dial.

& Sound control

! Tone and balance control

Each brief press of the sound control dialchanges the control modes in the follow-ing sequence.

Choose the desired level for each modeby turning the sound control dial.The control function returns to the tune/track/channel control mode after approxi-mately 5 seconds.

! Other sound setting controls

Each brief press of the “MENU” buttonchanges the control modes in the follow-ing sequence.Type A audio

Type B audio

Choose the desired settings for eachmode by turning the sound control dial.

The control function returns to the tune/track/channel control mode after approxi-mately 5 seconds.

Audio 5-7

– CONTINUED –

5

Black plate (176,1)


5-8 Audio

! SVC setting

SVC (Speed Volume Control) is a functionthat automatically adjusts the volumeaccording to the vehicle speed. As thevehicle speed increases, the audio vo-lume automatically increases to match thevehicle speed, in order to create apleasant listening environment even asthe driving noise increases. The amount ofthis automatic volume change can be setin the range from OFF to 2. The initialsetting is OFF.

! BEEP setting

A beep sound (operation sound) thatoccurs when the audio system is operatedcan be set ON/OFF. The initial setting isON.

! SRS CS Auto setting (Type B audio)

SRS CS Auto can be set ON/OFF. Whenthis setting is ON, “ ” is displayed on thescreen.

NOTESRS CS Auto creates a 5.1ch equiva-lent surround field using 10 speakersthat are installed in the vehicle.SRS CS Auto features:1) Sound originating from door mountspeakers can be heard at ear level(built in SRS FOCUS effect).

2) Ultra rich bass sound can be ob-tained from standard door mountspeakers (built in SRS TruBass effect).3) Surround sound can be obtainedfrom 2-channel stereo sources such asCD, MP3 and FM (built in SRS CircleSurround II effect).4) SRS CS Auto can position thecenter channel image in the center ofthe vehicle’s windshield. This elimi-nates the need for a center speaker(built in SRS Circle Surround II phan-tom center and SRS FOCUS effects).

CS Auto, TruBass, FOCUS, Circle Sur-round-II, SRS and “ ” symbol aretrademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.CS Auto technology is incorporatedunder license from SRS Labs, inc.

Black plate (177,1)


& Adjustable level of each mode

Mode Range of levels(displayed)

Initial setting Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

Volume Volume control 0 to 40 15 For less volume For more volume

AUX volume control* 0 to 40 15 For less volume For more volume

Tone and balance Bass control −8 to +8 0 For less bass sound For more bass sound

Midrange control −8 to +8 0 For less midrange sound For more midrange sound

Treble control −8 to +8 0 For less treble sound For more treble sound

Balance L9 to R9 0 Right channel attenuated Left channel attenuated

Fader R9 to F9 0 Front attenuated Rear attenuated

Other settings SVC OFF to 2 OFF For less auto volume change For more auto volume change

BEEP OFF to ON ON OFF ON

CS Auto (Type B audio) OFF to ON OFF OFF ON

*Only when an AUX audio product is connected.

Audio 5-9

5

Black plate (178,1)


5-10 Audio

FM/AM radio operation

& FM/AM selection

Push the “FM AM” button when the radiois off to turn on the radio.Push the “FM AM” button when the radiois on to select FM1, FM2, FM3 or AMreception.Each brief press of the “FM AM” buttonchanges the radio in the following se-quence starting from the last radio bandwith you selected.

& Tuning

! Manual tuning

Turn the TUNE dial clockwise to increasethe tuning frequency and turn the “TUNE”dial counterclockwise to decrease it.Each time the dial is turned, the frequencyinterval can be changed between 10 kHzin the AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the FMmode.

! Stereo indicator

The stereo indicator “ST” will come onwhen an FM stereo broadcast is received.

! Seek tuning (SEEK)

If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of theSEEK button briefly, the radio will auto-matically search for a receivable stationand stop at the first one it finds. Thisfunction may not be available, however,when radio signals are weak. In such asituation, perform manual tuning to selectthe desired station.

Black plate (179,1)


! Scan tuning (SCAN)

If you press the “SCAN” button, the radiowill switch to the scan mode. In this mode,the radio scans through the radio banduntil a station is found. The radio will stopat the station for 5 seconds while display-ing the frequency, after which scanningwill continue until the entire band has beenscanned.Press the “SCAN” button again to cancelthe SCAN mode and to stop at anydisplayed channel.Automatic tuning may not function prop-erly if the station reception is weakened bydistance from the station or proximity totall buildings and hills.

! PTY (Program type) group tuning(only FM reception)

Press the “PTY/CAT” button to change tothe PTY selection mode. At this time, thePTY group that you are currently listeningto will be displayed for 10 seconds. In PTYselection mode, “PTY” is displayed on thescreen.

! PTY (Program type) group selection

In PTY selection mode, press the “PTY”button “ ” or “ ” to change the PTYgroup by one step at a time.Pressing “ ” changes the PTY group upby one step. Pressing “ ” changes thePTY group down by one step.This operation only changes the display. Itdoes not change the station that iscurrently being received.

Audio 5-11

– CONTINUED –

5

Black plate (180,1)


5-12 Audio

! Seek in PTY (Program type) group

In the PTY selection mode, when thedesired PTY group has been selected,pressing the “SEEK” button “ ” or “ ”seeks within that PTY group.Pressing “ ” seeks up. Pressing “ ”seeks down.The control function returns to the normalmode after approximately 10 seconds.

& Displaying radio PS (Pro-gram Service Name) and RT(Radio Text)

If the PS (Program Service Name) and/orRT (Radio Text) are available, pressingthe “TEXT” button changes the displayamong PS, RT and frequency. The initialsetting is “PS”.

NOTE. The maximum number of charactersthat can be displayed for PS is 8.. The maximum number of charactersthat can be displayed for RT is 64.. If RT is 13 characters or longer,press and hold the “TEXT” button for0.5 second or longer in order to changethe page.

& Station preset

! How to preset stations

1. Press the “FM AM” button to selectFM1, FM2, FM3 or AM reception.2. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of theSEEK button or tune the radio manuallyuntil the desired station frequency isdisplayed.3. Press one of the preset buttons formore than 1.5 seconds to store thefrequency. If the button is pressed for lessthan 1.5 seconds, the preceding selectionwill remain in memory.

NOTE. If the connection between the radioand battery is broken for any reasonsuch as vehicle maintenance or radioremoval, all stations stored in thepreset buttons are cleared. If thisoccurs, it is necessary to reset thepreset buttons.. If a cell phone is placed near theradio, it may cause the radio to emitnoise when it receives calls. This noisedoes not indicate a radio fault.

Black plate (181,1)


! Selecting preset stations

Presetting a station with a preset buttonallows you to select that station in a singleoperation. Up to six AM, FM1, FM2 andFM3 stations each may be preset.

Satellite radio operation (ifequipped)

To receive satellite radio, it is necessary toinstall the Subaru genuine satellite recei-ver (optional equipment) and to enter intoa contract. For details, please contact yourSUBARU dealer.

& XMTM satellite radioXMTM is a continental U.S. based satelliteradio service that offers more than 160coast to coast channels, including music,news, sports, talk and children’s program-ming. XMTM provides digital quality audioand text information, including song titleand artist name. A service fee is requiredto receive the XMTM service. For moreinformation, contact XMTM atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346) for U.S.,www.xmradio.ca or 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677) for Canada.

& Sirius satellite radioSirius satellite radio is a recent innovationthat allows the listener to experiencedigital sound quality and to have a greatervariety of channels to choose from (morethan 160 channels with the relevantsubscription).

Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires atuner, antenna and a service contract. Fordetails, please contact your SUBARUdealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio atwww.sirius.com or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS(7474) for more information. Sirius, theSirius dog logo, channel names and logosare trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite RadioInc.

& Satellite radio receptionSatellite radio signals are best received inareas with a clear view of the open sky. Inareas where there are tall buildings, trees,tunnels or other structures that mayobstruct the signal of the satellites, theremay be signal interruptions. Other circum-stances that may result in signal lossinclude driving near a wall, steep cliff, hillor driving on the lower level of a multi-tiered road or inside of a parking garage.To help reduce this condition, satelliteradio providers have installed ground-based repeaters in heavily populatedareas. However, you may still experiencereception problems in some areas.

& Displaying satellite radio IDof tuner

When you activate satellite radio, youshould have your satellite radio tuner ID

Audio 5-13

– CONTINUED –

5

Black plate (182,1)


5-14 Audio

ready because each tuner is identified byits unique satellite radio tuner ID.The satellite radio ID will be needed whenyou activate satellite radio and receivesatellite radio customer support.The satellite radio ID can be found on theaudio display by tuning the channel to “0”.Turn the “CH” dial to select the satelliteradio channel.

NOTEFor Sirius, change the display to anindication mode other than the channelnumber after performing the aboveoperation.

& Band selection

Push the “SAT” button when the radio is

off to turn on the radio.Push the “SAT” button when the radio ison to select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 recep-tion.

& Channel and category selec-tion

! Channel selection

Turn the “CH” dial clockwise to select thenext channel and turn the “CH” dialcounterclockwise to select the previouschannel.

! Skip channel selection

When in the SAT mode, press the “SEEK”button “ ” or “ ” continuously tochange to the channel selection mode.Pressing the “SEEK” button “ ” changesthe channel up by 10 steps each time.Pressing “ ” changes the channel downby 10 steps each time.

Black plate (183,1)


! Category selection

When in the SAT mode, press the “CAT”button “ ” or “ ” to change to thecategory search mode.When in the category search mode,pressing the “CAT” button “ ” changesthe category up by one step. Pressing “ ”changes the category down by one step.When a category is selected, turning the“CH” dial selects channels only within theselected category.The control function returns to the normalmode after approximately 10 seconds.

! Channel scan

Press the “SCAN” button to change theradio to the SCAN mode. In this mode,under the selected category, the radioscans through the channel until a stationis found. The radio will stop at the stationfor 5 seconds while displaying the channelnumber, after which scanning will continueuntil the entire channel has been scannedfrom the low end to the high end.Press the “SCAN” button again to cancelthe SCAN mode and to stop on anydisplayed channel.

& Channel preset

! How to preset channels

1. Press the “SAT” button to select SAT1,SAT2 and SAT3 reception.2. Select the desired channel.3. Press one of the preset buttons formore than 1.5 seconds to store thechannel. If the button is pressed for lessthan 1.5 seconds, the preceding selectionwill remain in memory.

NOTEIf the connection between the radio andbattery is broken for any reason suchas vehicle maintenance or radio re-moval, all channels stored in the presetbuttons are cleared. If this occurs, it isnecessary to reset the preset buttons.

Audio 5-15

– CONTINUED –

5

Black plate (184,1)


5-16 Audio

! Selecting preset channels

Presetting a channel with a preset buttonallows you to select that channel in asingle operation. Up to six SAT1, SAT2and SAT3 channels each may be preset.

& Display selection

Press the “TEXT” button while receivingthe satellite radio to change the display asfollows:

CD player operation

NOTE. Make sure to always insert a discwith the label side up. If a disc isinserted with the label side down, theplayer displays “CHECK DISC”.Refer to the “When the following mes-sages are displayed” section in thischapter.. If a disc is inserted during a radiobroadcast, the disc will interrupt thebroadcast.. After the last song finishes, the discwill automatically return to track 1 (thefirst track on the disc) and will auto-matically play back.. The player is designed to be able toplay music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,but it may not be able to play certainones.. CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are notsupported, and if inserted, they will beimmediately ejected.. The file (track) that has protected bycopyright of WMA cannot be played,and the player will skip to the next file(track).

Black plate (185,1)


& How to insert a CD (type A)Hold a disc with a finger in the center holewhile gripping the edge of the disc, theninsert it in to the slot (with the label sideup) and the player will automatically pullthe disc into position.

NOTEDO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THEDISC INSERTION SLOT AT A TIME.

& How to insert a CD(s) (type B)

1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If themagazine in the player has an idleposition where you can insert a disc, thedisc number indicator associated with theidle position will blink.If no indicator blinks, it means that there is

no idle position in the magazine.2. When the “LOAD” indicator illumi-nates, insert the disc. Once you haveinserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator willgo off. The disc will then be automaticallydrawn in, and the player will begin to playback the first track of the disc.

. To insert more discs in succession,repeat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine willbe loaded with discs in the ascendingorder of position number.If you do not insert any disc in 15 secondsafter you have pressed the “LOAD” button,the player will begin to play back the firsttrack of the last disc you have inserted.. The disc indicator steadily lights up if adisc is already inserted in the correspond-ing position of the magazine.. While the player is in the loading mode,if you press “FM/AM”, “SAT” or “AUX”button, the player will enter the standbymode. Press the “CD” button to startplayback.

! Inserting a disc in a desired posi-tion

1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If themagazine in the player has an idleposition where you can insert a disc, thedisc number indicator associated with theidle position will blink.The positions in the magazine the indica-tor of which steadily lights up are alreadyloaded with discs.

Audio 5-17

– CONTINUED –

5

Black plate (186,1)


5-18 Audio

2. Press the disc select button at theposition where you want to insert a disc.3. When the “LOAD” indicator illumi-nates, insert the disc. Once you haveinserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator willgo off. The disc will then be automaticallydrawn in, and the player will begin to playthe first track on the disc.

. If you wish to insert another disc,repeat the procedure beginning with step1.If you do not insert any disc in 15 secondsafter you have pressed the “LOAD” button,the player will begin to play back the firsttrack of the last disc you have inserted.. While the player is in the loading mode,if you press “FM/AM”, “SAT” or “AUX”button, the player will enter standby mode.

Press the “CD” button to start playback.

! Loading all the magazine (Full discloading mode)

1. If you continue to press the “LOAD”button for more than 1.5 seconds, theplayer will produce beep sound and willenter the full disc loading mode.2. When the disc number indicatorflashes and “ALL LOAD” indicator illumi-nates, insert a disc within 15 seconds. If adisc is successfully loaded during thisperiod, the disc number indicator will stopblinking and will steadily light.3. When the loading of a disc is com-plete, the next disc number indicator willblink. Then repeat Step 2.4. When the magazine is filled with discsby repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will

start playback of the discs, beginning withthe one inserted first.

If you fail to insert any disc during each 15seconds interval, the full disc loadingmode will be canceled, and the player willstart playback of the disc inserted first.

& How to play back a CD

! When there is no CD inserted

Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert aCD (type A)” / “How to insert a CD(s) (typeB)”.When a CD is loaded, the player will startplayback of the CD, beginning with thefirst track.

! When CD is in the player (type A)

When the “CD” button is pressed, the

Black plate (187,1)


player will start playback.

! When there are CDs loaded (type B)

Press a desired one of the disc selectbuttons the disc number indicator of whichsteadily lights up. The player will then startplayback of the selected CD, beginningwith the first track.If a disc that the player cannot read hasbeen loaded, the player will display themessage “CHECK DISC”.

& To select a track from itsbeginning

! Forward direction

Turn the “TRACK” dial clockwise to skip tothe beginning of the next track/file (track).Each time the dial is turned, the indicatedtrack/file (track) number will increase.

NOTEIn an MP3 or WMA folder, skipping pastthe last track/file (track) will take youback to the first track/file (track) in thefolder.

! Backward direction

Turn the “TRACK” dial counterclockwiseto skip to the beginning of the currenttrack/file (track). Each time the dial isturned, the indicated track/file (track)number will decrease.

NOTEIn an MP3 or WMA folder, skipping pastthe first track/file (track) will take you tothe last track/file (track) in the folder.

Audio 5-19

– CONTINUED –

5

Black plate (188,1)


5-20 Audio

& Fast-forwarding and fast-re-versing

! Fast-forwarding

Press the “ ” side of the “SEEK” buttoncontinuously to fast-forward the disc/folder.Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.

NOTEIf you fast-forward to the end of the lasttrack/file (track), fast-forwarding willstop and the player will start playbackbeginning with the first track/file(track).

! Fast-reversing

Press the “ ” side of the “SEEK” buttoncontinuously to fast-reverse the disc/folder.Release the button to stop fast-reversing.

NOTEIf you fast-reverse to the beginning ofthe first track/file (track), fast-reversingwill stop and the player will start play-back.

& Repeating

To repeat a track/file (track), briefly pressthe “RPT” button while the track/file (track)is playing.Each time you briefly press the button, themode changes in the following se-quences.Type A audio:

Type B audio:

Black plate (189,1)


NOTE. The “RPT” indication refers to therepeat playback of a single track. Itrepeats the track that is playing.. The “F-RPT” indication refers to therepeat playback of a folder. It repeatsthe all of the tracks in the folder. It ispossible to select the function whenthe MP3/WMA format track is playing.. The “D-RPT” indication refers to therepeat playback of a disc. It repeats thetracks on the CD. It is only possible toselect this function for type B audio.

To cancel the track/file (track) repeat-playmode, briefly press the “RPT” buttontwice. The “RPT” indication will turn off,and the normal playback mode will beresumed.

NOTEThe repeat-play mode will be cancelledif you perform any of the followingsteps:. Press the “RPT” button and selectCANCEL. Press the “ ” button. Press the disc select button. Press the “SCAN” button. Press the “LOAD” button whenthere is free space in the CD magazine.

& Random playback

To playback a track/file(s) at random,press the “RPT” button for 0.5 second orlonger while the track/file is playing.Each time you press the button, the modechanges in the following sequences.

NOTE. The “RDM” indication refers to therandom playback of the tracks. Itrandomly repeats the tracks on theCD. It is possible to select the functionwhen formats other than the MP3/WMA

format CD is playing.. The “F-RDM” indication refers to therandom playback in the folder. It ran-domly repeats the tracks in the folder. Itis possible to select the function whenan MP3/WMA format track is playing.. The “D-RDM” indication refers to therandom playback of a disc. It randomlyrepeats the tracks in the CD. It ispossible to select the function whenan MP3/WMA format track is playing.

To cancel the random playback mode,press the “RPT” button again and selectCANCEL.The “RDM” indication will turn off, and thenormal playback mode will be resumed.

NOTERandom playback will be cancelled ifyou perform any of the following steps:. Press the “RPT” button and selectCANCEL. Press the “ ” button. Press the disc select button. Press the “SCAN” button. Press the “LOAD” button whenthere is free space in the CD magazine.

Audio 5-21

– CONTINUED –

5

Black plate (190,1)


5-22 Audio

& Scan

The scan mode lets you listen to the first10 seconds of each track/file in succes-sion. Press the “SCAN” button to startscanning upward beginning with the track/file(s) following the currently selected one.After all track/file(s) in the disk/folder havebeen scanned, normal playback will beresumed. To cancel the scan mode, pressthe “SCAN” button again.

NOTEThe scan mode will be cancelled if youperform any of the following steps:. Press the “RPT” button. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of theTUNE/TRACK button. Turn the “TRACK” dial. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the

SEEK/SCAN button. Press the “ ” button. Press the disc select button. Select the radio or AUX mode. Press the “LOAD” button whenthere is free space in the CD magazine.. Turn off the power of the audioequipment.. Turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position.

& Display selection

If you press the “TEXT” button duringplayback, the indication will change to thenext one in the following sequence.

For CD-DA:

For MP3/WMA:

! Page (track/folder title) scroll

If you press the “TEXT” button again for atleast 0.5 second, the title will be scrolledso you can see all of it.

NOTEThe display is designed to show titlesfor up to 24 characters.

Black plate (191,1)


& Folder selection

Press the “ ” side of the “FOLDER”button briefly to select the next folder.Press the “ ” side of the button briefly togo back to the previous folder. The foldertitle will be shown each time you pressone of the buttons.

NOTE. Selecting folders in this way ispossible only within a single disc.. Only MP3/WMA folders are recog-nized when an attempt to select thenext or previous folder is made. If noappropriate folder exists on the disc,pressing the “ ” or “ ” side of the“FOLDER” button starts playback be-ginning with the first track/file (track).

& How to eject a CD from theplayer (type A)

When a disc is being played back or whena disc is in the player, press the ejectbutton “ ”. The disc will be ejected.

NOTE. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CDsticking out, because vibration mightmake it fall out.. If the disc is left ejected for morethan approximately 15 seconds afterthe ignition switch is turned to the“OFF” position, a disc protection func-tion will operate, automatically reload-ing the disc. In this case, the disc is notplayed.

& How to eject CDs from theplayer (type B)

! Ejecting a CD from the player

Of the discs loaded, you can select andremove only one disc.

1. Use the disc select button to select thedisc to be ejected.

Audio 5-23

– CONTINUED –

5

Black plate (192,1)


5-24 Audio

2. Briefly press the “ ” button. Theselected disc will be ejected. The discnumber indicator will flash at this time.When you remove the ejected disc, thedisc number indicator will go off.

To remove more discs in succession,repeat steps 1 and 2.

! Ejecting all discs from the player(All disc ejection mode)

1. If you continue to press the “ ”button, the player will produce beep soundand will enter the all disc ejection mode. Atthis time, the disc number indicator and“ALL EJECT” indicator will flash.2. Remove the disc that has beenejected. The other discs loaded will thenbe ejected one after another. If you do notremove the disc that has been ejected, the“All disc ejection mode” will be canceled.

NOTE. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CDsticking out, because vibration mightmake it fall out.. If you press the “ ” button while

the player is in all disc ejection mode,the mode will be cancelled followingejection of the disc that is currentlybeing ejected.. If you press the “CD” button or“LOAD” button while the player is inall disc ejection mode, the player willdraw in the discs that have beenejected and play them.

& When the following mes-sages are displayed

If one of the following messages isdisplayed while operating the CD player,determine the cause based on the follow-ing information. If you cannot clear thosemessages, please contact your SUBARUdealer.

! When “PUSH EJECT” is displayed

Press the eject button to unload the disc.Check the disc for damage or deforma-tion, and also check that the correct disc isinserted. Do not try to unload the discforcibly. Single CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs)are not supported, and if inserted, they willbe immediately ejected and this messagewill be displayed. If the disc cannot beunloaded or this message remains dis-played, please contact your SUBARUdealer.

Black plate (193,1)


! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed

Press the eject button to unload the discs.Check that the disc is not damaged orscratched, and also check that the disc isinserted correctly. This message mayappear when using some CD-RW discs.Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inchCDs are not supported) and data formatare correct. This player can only play MP3and WMA data formats. If the disc cannotbe unloaded or this message remainsdisplayed, please contact your SUBARUdealer.

AUX unit operation

& AUX jack

By connecting a commercial audio pro-duct to the vehicle, such as portable audioplayer, you can hear its sound via thevehicle’s speaker.Connect the portable audio player andpush the “AUX” button.For the audio input jack, a stereo mini pinplug (3.5ø) can be connected. For detailedinformation, see the Owner’s Manual ofthe portable audio player.

& AUX inputs selection button

Press the “AUX” button when the auxiliaryaudio input is off to turn on the auxiliaryaudio input.

NOTE. The output sound of the portableaudio player is not loud, and the soundvia the vehicle’s speakers that areconnected to the vehicle audio set isvery small. If you turn up the volume ofthe audio set, the volume becomeslouder. However, when you changethe player to the other portable audioplayer, the sound may become a lotlouder. Turn down the volume whenyou change between them.. In some cases, when the soundvolume of the portable audio player is

Audio 5-25

– CONTINUED –

5

Black plate (194,1)


5-26 Audio

low, the sound becomes bad when youturn up the volume of the vehicle audiosystem. In this case, adjust the soundvolume of the portable audio player.. In some cases, noise occurs be-cause of a bad connection between theportable player of the vehicle audiosystem or for the player.

Audio control buttons (ifequipped)

These buttons are located on the spokesof the steering wheel. They allow thedriver to control audio functions withouttaking his/her hands off the steeringwheel.

& MODE button

This button is used to select the desiredaudio mode. Each time it is pressed, themode changes to the next one in thefollowing sequence:

*1: The frequency last received in the selectedwaveband will be displayed.

*2: Only when a CD is in the player.

*3: Only when with an auxiliary audio product isconnected.

! “ ” and “ ” buttons

! With radio mode selected

Press the “ ” button or “ ” button. Theradio will seek the next receivable stationand stop on it.That station’s frequency will be shown onthe audio display.

! With CD mode selected

Press the “ ” button to skip forward in thetrack/file (track) order. Press the “ ”button to skip backward in the track/file

Black plate (195,1)


(track) order.The track/file (track) number will be shownon the audio display.

! With SAT mode selected

Press the “ ” button to skip forward in thechannel order. Press the “ ” button toskip backward in the channel order. Thechannel will be shown on the audiodisplay.

! Volume control buttons

Press the “+” button to increase thevolume. Press the “−” button to reducethe volume.A number indicating the volume will beshown on the audio display.

! MUTE button

Press this button if you wish to immedi-ately cut the volume to zero.The audio display will show “MUTE”.If you press the button again, the originalsound volume will return and “MUTE”goes off.

Precautions to observe whenhandling a compact disc

Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs andCD-RWs) that have the mark shown in thefollowing. Also, some compact discscannot be played.

Audio 5-27

– CONTINUED –

5

Black plate (196,1)


5-28 Audio

. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CDplayer. If you insert a DualDisc into theplayer, the disc may not come out again,possibly causing the player to malfunction.. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew canform inside the CD player, preventingnormal operation. If this happens, ejectthe CD and wait for the player to dry out.. Skipping may occur when the CDplayer is subjected to severe vibration(for example, when the vehicle is drivenon a rough surface).. To remove a disc from the case, pressthe center of the case and hold bothedges of the disc. If the disc surface istouched directly, contamination couldcause poor tone quality. Do not touch thedisc surface.. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If

there are deposits, wipe the disc surfacefrom the center outward with a dry, softcloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.. Do not use any disc that is scratched,deformed, or cracked. Also, do not useany disc that has a non-standard shape(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctionsor problems might result.. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Neverkeep it either in places exposed to directsunlight, near heaters or in vehiclesparked in the sun or on hot days.

Black plate (197,1)


Audio 5-29

5

Black plate (2,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

Black plate (11,1)


Interior lights ....................................................... 6-2Dome light .......................................................... 6-2Cargo area light (5-door models) ......................... 6-2

Map light (if equipped)........................................ 6-3Sun visors ........................................................... 6-3

Vanity mirror (if equipped) ................................... 6-3Storage compartment ......................................... 6-4

Glove box ........................................................... 6-4Center console.................................................... 6-4Coin tray............................................................. 6-4

Cup holders ......................................................... 6-5Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-5Rear passenger’s cup holder (if equipped) ........... 6-5

Bottle holders ...................................................... 6-6

Accessory power outlets .................................... 6-6Use with a cigarette lighter (Canada only, ifequipped) .......................................................... 6-7

Ashtray (if equipped)........................................... 6-8Floor mat (if equipped)........................................ 6-9Shopping bag hook ............................................. 6-9

5-door models only............................................ 6-10Cargo area cover (5-door – if equipped).......... 6-10

Using the cover ................................................. 6-10To remove the cover .......................................... 6-11To install the cover housing ............................... 6-11

Cargo tie-down hooks(5-door – if equipped) ..................................... 6-11

Under-floor storage compartment(if equipped) .................................................... 6-12

Interior equipment

6

Black plate (200,1)


6-2 Interior equipment

Interior lights

When leaving your vehicle, make sure thelight goes out to avoid battery discharge.

& Dome light

1) ON2) DOOR3) OFF

The dome light switch has three positions:

ON: The light stays on continuously.DOOR: The light illuminates when any ofthe doors (or the rear gate on the 5-door)is opened. The light remains on for severalseconds and gradually turns off after alldoors (and the rear gate on the 5-door)are closed or if the key is turned to the“ON” position.

The light also can be turned on by use ofthe remote keyless entry transmitter. Referto the “Remote keyless entry system”section in chapter 2 for detailed informa-tion.The setting of the period for which the lightstays on can be changed by a SUBARUdealer.Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.OFF: The light stays off.

! OFF DELAY function

When the dome light switch is in the“DOOR” position, the dome light illumi-nates and gradually turns off when any ofthe following operations is performed.. when the ignition switch is turned fromthe “Acc” to “LOCK” position. when the doors are closed after thedoors are open. when the doors are unlocked using theremote keyless entry transmitterThe dome light turns off when one thefollowing operations is performed.. when the ignition switch is turned to the“Acc” or ”ON” position. when the doors are locked using theremote keyless entry transmitter

& Cargo area light (5-doormodels)

ON position: The light illuminates whenthe rear gate is opened. The light remainson for several seconds and gradually turnsoff after the rear gate is closed.OFF position: The light stays off.

Black plate (201,1)


Map light (if equipped)

To turn on the map light, push the switch.To turn it off, push the switch again.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure thelight is turned off to avoid battery dis-charge.

Sun visors

To block out glare, swing down the visors.To use the sun visor at a side window,swing it down and move it sideways.

& Vanity mirror (if equipped)

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closedwhile the car is being driven to avoidbeing temporarily blinded by theglare of bright light.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down thesun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

Interior equipment 6-3

6

Black plate (202,1)



Storage compartment

CAUTION

. Always keep the storage com-partment closed while driving toreduce the risk of injury in theevent of a sudden stop or anaccident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-ers with flammable or corrosiveliquids or any other dangerousitems in the storage compart-ment.

& Glove box

1) Lock2) Unlock

To open the glove box, pull the handle. Toclose it, push the lid firmly upward.

To lock the glove box, insert the key andturn it clockwise.

& Center console

To open the lid, pull up the lock release.

& Coin tray

A coin tray is built in the center console.

Black plate (203,1)


Cup holders

CAUTION

Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,if hot, might burn you or yourpassengers. Spilled beverages mayalso damage upholstery, carpets oraudio equipment.

& Front passenger’s cup holder

CAUTION

Do not pick up a cup from the cupholder or put a cup in the holderwhile you are driving, as this maydistract you and lead to an accident.

A dual cup holder is built in the centerconsole, beside the parking brake lever.

& Rear passenger’s cup holder(if equipped)

CAUTION

When not in use, always keep thecup holder stored while driving toreduce the risk of injury in the eventof a sudden stop or an accident.

A dual cup holder is located at the back ofthe center console. To use the cup holder,open the lid by pulling its upper edge.


6

Black plate (204,1)



Bottle holders

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a bottle from thebottle holder or put a bottle in theholder while you are driving, asthis may distract you and lead toan accident.

. When placing a beverage in adoor pocket, make sure it iscapped. Otherwise, the beveragecould spill when opening/closingthe door or while driving and, ifthe beverage is hot, it could scaldyou.

The door pocket equipped on each door

trim can be used to hold beverage bottlesand other items.

Accessory power outlets

Power outlet below the climate controls

Power outlet in the center console

Accessory power outlets are providedbelow the climate controls and in the

Black plate (205,1)


center console. Electrical power (12V DC)from the battery is available at any of theoutlets when the ignition switch is in eitherthe “Acc” or “ON” position.You can use an in-vehicle electricalappliance by connecting it to an outlet.The maximum power rating of an appli-ance that can be connected varies amongoutlets as indicated below. Do not use anappliance which exceeds the indicatedwattage for each outlet.Outlet below the climate controls: 80W orlessOutlets in the center console: 120W orlessWhen using appliances connected to twooutlets simultaneously, the total powerconsumed by them must not exceed120W.

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to use a cigarettelighter in the accessory poweroutlets.

. Do not place any foreign objects,especially metal ones such ascoins or aluminum foil, into theaccessory power outlet. Thatcould cause a short circuit. Al-ways put the cap on the acces-sory power outlet when it is not

in use.

. Use only electrical applianceswhich are designed for 12V DC.

The maximum power rating of anappliance that can be connectedvaries among outlets as indi-cated below. Do not use anappliance which exceeds the in-dicated wattage for each outlet.

Outlet below the climate con-trols: 80W or less

Outlet in the center console:120W or less

When using appliances con-nected to two outlets simulta-neously, the total power con-sumed by them must not exceed120W. Overloading the accessorypower outlet can cause a shortcircuit. Do not use dual adaptersor more than one electrical appli-ance.

. If the plug on your electric appli-ance is either too loose or tootight for the accessory poweroutlet, this can result in a poorcontact or cause the plug to getstuck. Only use plugs that fitproperly.

. Use of an electric appliance in the

accessory power outlet for a longperiod of time while the engine isnot running can cause batterydischarge.

. Before driving your vehicle, makesure that the plug and the cordon your electrical appliance willnot interfere with your shiftinggears and operating the accel-erator and brake pedals. If theydo, do not use the electricalappliance while driving.

& Use with a cigarette lighter(Canada only, if equipped)

To use the accessory power outlet in thecenter console as a cigarette lightersocket, purchase the cigarette lighter plug,which is an optional accessory.A cigarette lighter plug is available fromyour SUBARU dealer.The cigarette lighter operates only whenthe ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc”position.To use the cigarette lighter, push in theknob and wait a few moments. It willautomatically spring up when ready foruse.


– CONTINUED –

6

Black plate (206,1)



WARNING

To avoid being burned, never graspthe lighter by the end with theheating element. Doing so couldresult in injury and could alsodamage the heating element.

CAUTION

. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,because it will overheat.

. The electrical power socket lo-cated in the center console isoriginally designed to use a gen-uine SUBARU cigarette lighterplug. Do not use a non-genuinecigarette lighter plug in the sock-et. Doing so may cause a short-circuit and overheating, resultingin a fire.

. If the socket is ever used for aplug-in accessory such as a cellphone, that may damage theportion of the socket’s internalmechanism that causes a cigar-ette lighter plug to “pop out”after its lighter element is heated.Therefore, do not place a cigar-ette lighter plug in a socket thathas been used, even once, to

power a plug-in accessory. Doingso may cause the plug to stickand overheat, creating a potentialfire hazard.

Ashtray (if equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use ashtrays as waste re-ceptacles or leave a lighted cigarettein an ashtray. This could cause afire.

A portable front ashtray is available fromyour SUBARU dealer. It fits into one of thecup holders built into the center console.When using the ashtray, open the ashtraylid. Fully close the lid after using it to helpreduce residual smoke.

NOTEParticles of ash and tobacco will accu-

Black plate (207,1)


mulate around the hinges of the ash-tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using atoothbrush or another narrow-endedimplement.

Floor mat (if equipped)

A retaining pin is located on the driver’sside floor.The floor mat is secured using the built-ingrommets, by placing the grommets overthe pins and pushing them downward.

CAUTION

Make sure the driver’s floor mat isplaced back in its proper locationand correctly secured on its retain-ing pins. Also, do not use more thanone floor mat. If the floor mat slipsforward and interferes with themovement of the pedals duringdriving, it could cause an accident.

Shopping bag hook

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shoppingbag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) ormore.


– CONTINUED –

6

Black plate (208,1)



& 5-door models only

A shopping bag hook is attached to eachside of the cargo area.

Cargo area cover (5-door – ifequipped)

The cargo area cover is provided forcovering the cargo area and to protect itscontents from direct sunlight. This cover isdetachable to make room for additionalcargo.

& Using the cover

To extend the cover, pull the end of thecover out of the housing, then insert itshooks into the catches as shown. Torewind it, unhook it from the catches andit will rewind automatically. You shouldhold on to the cover and guide it back intothe cover housing while it is rewinding.

WARNING

Do not place anything on the ex-tended cover. Putting excessiveweight on the extended cover canbreak it and an object on the covercould tumble forward in the event ofa sudden stop or collision. Thiscould cause serious injury.

CAUTION

Be careful not to scratch the reargate stays while extending andrewinding the cover.

Scratches on the stays could causeleakage of gas from the stays, whichmay result in their inability to holdthe rear gate open.

Black plate (209,1)


& To remove the cover1. Rewind the cover.

2. Pull the right side sleeve on the end ofthe cover housing to shorten the cover’slength.3. Take it off the retainer.

& To install the cover housing1. Pull either sleeve on the end of thecover housing to shorten the cover’slength.

2. Insert the projections located on theboth ends of the sleeve into the recessesof the retainers.

Cargo tie-down hooks(5-door – if equipped)

The cargo area is equipped with four tie-down hooks so that cargo can be securedwith a cargo net or ropes.When using the tie-down hooks, turn themdown out of the storing recesses. Whennot in use, put the hooks up into thestoring recesses.


– CONTINUED –

6

Black plate (210,1)



CAUTION

The cargo tie-down hooks are de-signed only for securing light cargo.Never try to secure cargo thatexceeds the capacity of the hooks.The maximum load capacity is 44lbs (20 kg) per hook.

Under-floor storage compart-ment (if equipped)

4-door models

5-door models

The storage compartment is located underthe floor of the trunk (4-door) or the cargoarea (5-door), and it can be used to storesmall items. To open the lid, pull the tabup.

NOTEFor 4-door models, when storing a flattire, put the storage tray in the trunk.

CAUTION

. Always keep the lids closed whiledriving to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of a suddenstop or an accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-ers with flammable or corrosiveliquids or any other dangerousitems in the storage compart-ment.

Black plate (13,1)


Fuel ...................................................................... 7-3Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-3Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-4

State emission testing (U.S. only)...................... 7-7Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-8Starting the engine.............................................. 7-8

Manual transmission vehicle................................ 7-8Automatic transmission vehicle ........................... 7-9

Stopping the engine........................................... 7-10Remote engine start system(dealer option) ................................................. 7-10Starting your vehicle .......................................... 7-11Remote start safety features ............................... 7-11Entering the vehicle while it is running via remotestart................................................................. 7-11

Entering the vehicle following remote engine startshutdown......................................................... 7-11

Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of thevehicle ............................................................. 7-12

Service mode ..................................................... 7-12Remote transmitter programming andprogrammable feature option............................ 7-12

System maintenance .......................................... 7-13Manual transmission.......................................... 7-14

Shifting speeds .................................................. 7-15Driving tips ........................................................ 7-15

Automatic transmission..................................... 7-16Selector lever..................................................... 7-17Selector lever reverse inhibiting function ............ 7-18Selection of manual mode .................................. 7-19Maximum speeds ............................................... 7-20

Driving tips........................................................ 7-21SPORT mode..................................................... 7-21Shift lock release ............................................... 7-22

Power steering................................................... 7-23Braking ............................................................... 7-23

Braking tips....................................................... 7-23Brake system .................................................... 7-23Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-24

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-24ABS system self-check ...................................... 7-25ABS warning light.............................................. 7-25

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)system............................................................. 7-26Steps to take if EBD system fails ....................... 7-26

Vehicle Dynamics Control system (ifequipped) ........................................................ 7-27Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-29Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................ 7-31

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)(U.S.-spec. models)......................................... 7-32

Parking your vehicle ......................................... 7-34Parking brake .................................................... 7-34Parking tips ....................................................... 7-34

Hill start assist system (Manualtransmission – if equipped) ........................... 7-35

Cruise control .................................................... 7-36To set cruise control .......................................... 7-37To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-38To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-38To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-38

Starting and operating

7

Black plate (14,1)


Starting and operating

Cruise control indicator light .............................. 7-40 Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-40

Black plate (215,1)


Fuel

CAUTION

Use of a fuel which is low in qualityor use of an inappropriate fueladditive may cause engine damage.

& Fuel requirements

! Non-turbo models

The 2.5-liter non-turbo engine is designedto operate using unleaded gasoline withan octane rating of 87 AKI or higher.

! Turbo models

The 2.5-liter turbo engine is designed tooperate using premium unleaded gasolinewith an octane rating of 91 AKI or higher. Ifpremium unleaded gasoline is not avail-able, regular unleaded gasoline with anoctane rating of 87 AKI or higher may betemporarily used. For optimum engineperformance and driveability, it is requiredthat you use premium grade unleadedgasoline.

NOTEBe sure to use premium unleadedgasoline of 91 AKI or higher for turboengine models. If other gasoline (lower

than 91 AKI) is used, knocking, re-duced output and poor acceleratorresponse will result.

! Fuel octane rating

This octane rating is the average of theResearch Octane and Motor Octanenumbers and is commonly referred to asthe Anti Knock Index (AKI).Using a gasoline with a lower octanerating can cause persistent and heavyknocking, which can damage the engine.Do not be concerned if your vehiclesometimes knocks lightly when you driveup a hill or when you accelerate. See yourdealer or a qualified service technician ifyou use a fuel with the specified octanerating and your vehicle knocks heavily orpersistently.

! Unleaded gasoline

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designedto accept only an unleaded gasoline fillernozzle. Under no circumstances shouldleaded gasoline be used because it willdamage the emission control system andmay impair driveability and fuel economy.

! Gasoline for California-certifiedLEV

If your vehicle was certified to California’slow emission vehicle (LEV) standards asindicated on the underhood tune-up label,

it is designed to optimize engine andemission performance with gasoline thatmeets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-fornia gasoline specifications. If you live inany other state than California, yourvehicle will operate on gasoline meetingFederal specifications. Gasoline sold out-side California is permitted to have highersulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converterand may produce a sulfur exhaust odor orsmell. SUBARU recommends that you trya different brand of unleaded gasolinehaving lower sulfur to determine if theproblem is fuel related before returningyour vehicle to an authorized dealer forservice.

! MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane-en-hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). Ifyou use such fuels, your emission controlsystem performance may deteriorate andthe CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-function indicator lamp may turn on. If thishappens, return to your authorizedSUBARU Dealer for service. If it isdetermined that the condition is causedby the type of fuel used, repairs may notbe covered by your warranty.

Starting and operating 7-3

– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (216,1)


7-4 Starting and operating

! Gasoline for cleaner air

Your use of gasoline with detergentadditives will help prevent deposits fromforming in your engine and fuel system.This helps keep your engine in tune andyour emission control system workingproperly, and is a way of doing your partfor cleaner air. If you continuously use ahigh quality fuel with the proper detergentand other additives, you should neverneed to add any fuel system cleaningagents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended withmaterials called oxygenates. Use of thesefuels can also help keep the air cleaner.Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used inyour vehicle, but should contain no morethan 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for theproper operation of your SUBARU.

In addition, some gasoline suppliers arenow producing reformulated gasolines,which are designed to reduce vehicleemissions. SUBARU approves the use ofreformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,you should ask your service stationoperators if their gasolines contain deter-gents and oxygenates and if they have

been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-sions.

As additional guidance, only use fuelssuited for your vehicle as explained in thefollowing description.. Fuel should be unleaded and have anoctane rating no lower than that specifiedin this manual.. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) issometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.Methanol can be used in your vehicleONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuelmixture AND if it is accompanied bysufficient quantities of the proper cosol-vents and corrosion inhibitors required toprevent damage to the fuel system. Do notuse fuel containing methanol EXCEPTunder these conditions.. If undesirable driveability problems areexperienced and you suspect they may befuel related, try a different brand of gaso-line before seeking service at yourSUBARU dealer.. Fuel system damage or driveabilityproblems which result from the use ofimproper fuel are not covered under theSUBARU Limited Warranty.

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exteriorsurfaces of the vehicle. Because

fuel may damage the paint, be sureto wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.Paint damage caused by spilled fuelis not covered under the SUBARULimited Warranty.

& Fuel filler lid and cap

! Refueling

Only one person should be involved inrefueling. Do not allow others to approachthe area of the vehicle near the fuel fillerpipe while refueling is in progress.Be sure to observe any other precautionsthat are posted at the service station.

Black plate (217,1)


1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lidrelease lever up. The lever is on the floorat the left of the driver’s seat.

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap,first touch the vehicle body or ametal portion of the fuel pump orsimilar object to discharge anystatic electricity that may be presenton your body. If your body is carry-ing an electrostatic charge, there isa possibility that an electric sparkcould ignite the fuel, which couldburn you. To avoid acquiring a newstatic electric charge, do not getback into the vehicle while refuelingis in progress.

1) Open2) Close

2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning itslowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-mable. Before refueling, alwaysfirst stop the engine and close allvehicle doors and windows.Make sure that there are nolighted cigarettes, open flamesor electrical sparks in the adja-cent area. Only handle fuel out-doors. Quickly wipe up anyspilled fuel.

. When opening the cap, grasp itfirmly and turn it slowly to theleft. Do not remove the capquickly. Fuel may be under pres-sure and spray out of the fuelfiller neck, especially in hotweather. If you hear a hissingsound while you are removingthe cap, wait for the sound tostop and then slowly open thecap to prevent fuel from sprayingout and creating a fire hazard.

3. Hook the cord that is attached to thefuel filler cap onto the hook inside the fuelfiller lid.


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (218,1)



WARNING

. When refueling, insert the fuelnozzle securely into the fuel fillerpipe. If the nozzle is lifted or notfully inserted, its automatic stop-ping mechanism may not func-tion, causing fuel to overflow thetank and creating a fire hazard.

. Stop refueling when the auto-matic stop mechanism on thefuel nozzle activates. If you con-tinue to add fuel, temperaturechanges or other conditionsmay cause fuel to overflow fromthe tank and create a fire hazard.

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel fillerpump automatically stops. Do not add anymore fuel.5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwiseuntil you hear a clicking noise. Be certainnot to catch the tether under the cap whiletightening.6. Close the fuel filler lid completely.If you spill any fuel on the painted surface,rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, thepainted surface could be damaged.

NOTE. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuelgauge. This indicates that the fuel fillerdoor (lid) is located on the right side ofthe vehicle.. If the fuel filler cap is not tighteneduntil it clicks or if the tether is caughtunder the cap, the CHECK ENGINEwarning light may come on. Refer tothe “Warning and indicator lights”section in chapter 3.

CAUTION

. Never add any cleaning agents tothe fuel tank. The addition of acleaning agent may cause da-mage to the fuel system.

. After refueling, turn the cap to theright until it clicks to ensure thatit is fully tightened. If the cap isnot securely tightened, fuel mayleak out while the vehicle is beingdriven or fuel spillage couldoccur in the event of an accident,creating a fire hazard.

. Do not let fuel spill on the exteriorsurfaces of the vehicle. Becausefuel may damage the paint, besure to wipe off any spilled fuelquickly. Paint damage caused byspilled fuel is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

. Always use a genuine SUBARUfuel filler cap. If you use thewrong cap, it may not fit or haveproper venting and your fuel tankand emission control systemmay be damaged. It could alsolead to fuel spillage and a fire.

. Immediately put fuel in the tankwhenever the low fuel warninglight comes on. Engine misfiresas a result of an empty tankcould cause damage to the en-gine.

Black plate (219,1)


State emission testing (U.S.only)

At state inspection time, remember totell your inspection or service station inadvance not to place your Subaru AWDvehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer.Otherwise, serious transmission da-mage will result.

Some states have started using dynam-ometers in their state inspection programsin order to meet their obligation underfederal law to implement stricter vehicleemission standards to reduce air pollutionfrom vehicles. A dynamometer is a tread-mill or roller-like testing device that allowsyour vehicle’s wheels to turn while thevehicle remains in one place. Dependingon the severity of a state’s air pollutionproblems, the states must adopt either a“basic” or “enhanced” vehicle emissioninspection test. Normally, a portion of thebasic emission test consists of an emis-sion inspector inserting an analyzer probeinto the exhaust pipe of an idling vehiclefor a short period of time. States with moresevere air pollution problems are requiredto adopt an enhanced vehicle emissiontest. This test simulates actual drivingconditions on a dynamometer and permitsmore accurate measurement of tailpipeemitted pollution than the basic emission

test.

The U.S. Environmental ProtectionAgency (EPA) and states using two-wheeldynamometers in their emission testingprograms have EXEMPTED Subaru AWDvehicles from the portion of the testingprogram that involves a two-wheel dy-namometer.

There are some states that use four-wheeldynamometers in their testing programs.When properly used, that equipment willnot damage an AWD Subaru vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rearwheels be jacked off the ground, norshould the driveshaft be disconnected forstate emission testing.

WARNING

Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehiclemust NEVER be performed on asingle two-wheel dynamometer. At-tempting to do so will result inuncontrolled vehicle movement andmay cause an accident or injuries topersons nearby.

CAUTION

Resultant vehicle damage due toimproper testing is not coveredunder the SUBARU Limited War-ranty and is the responsibility ofthe state inspection program or itscontractors or licensees.

The EPA has issued regulations forinspecting the On-Board Diagnostic(OBD) system as part of the state emis-sions inspection. The OBD system isdesigned to detect engine and transmis-sion problems that might cause vehicleemissions to exceed allowable limits.These inspections apply to all 1996 modelyear and newer passenger cars and lighttrucks. Over 30 states plus the District ofColumbia have implemented the OBDsystem inspection.. The inspection of the OBD systemconsists of a visual operational check ofthe “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-function indicator lamp (MIL) and anexamination of the OBD system with anelectronic scan tool while the engine isrunning.. A vehicle passes the OBD systeminspection if proper illumination of the“CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL isobserved, there are no stored diagnostic


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (220,1)



trouble codes, and the OBD systemreadiness monitors are complete.. A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the“CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL isnot properly operating or there are one ormore diagnostic trouble codes stored inthe vehicle’s computer with the “CHECKENGINE” warning light/MIL illuminated.. A state emission inspection may reject(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number ofOBD system readiness monitors “NotReady” is greater than one. Under thiscondition, the vehicle operator should beinstructed to drive his/her vehicle for a fewdays to set the monitors and return for anemission re-inspection.. Owners of rejected or failing vehiclesshould contact their SUBARU Dealer forservice.

Preparing to drive

You should perform the following checksand adjustments every day before youstart driving.1. Check that all windows, mirrors, andlights are clean and unobstructed.2. Check the appearance and conditionof the tires. Also check tires for properinflation.3. Look under the vehicle for any sign ofleaks.4. Check that the hood, trunk (4-door)and rear gate (5-door) are fully closed.5. Check the adjustment of the seat.6. Check the adjustment of the insideand outside mirrors.7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that yourpassengers have fastened their seatbelts.8. Check the operation of the warningand indicator lights when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position.9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-ing lights after starting the engine.

NOTEEngine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,washer fluid and other fluid levelsshould be checked daily, weekly or atfuel stops.

Starting the engine

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter motorcontinuously for more than 10 sec-onds. If the engine fails to start afteroperating the starter for 5 to 10seconds, wait for 10 seconds ormore before trying again.

& Manual transmission vehicle1. Apply the parking brake.2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-cessories.3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor andshift the shift lever into neutral. Hold theclutch pedal to the floor while starting theengine.The starter motor will only operate whenthe clutch pedal is pressed fully to thefloor.4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position and check the operation of thewarning and indicator lights. Refer to the“Warning and indicator lights” section inchapter 3.5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”position without depressing the accelera-tor pedal. Release the key immediately

Black plate (221,1)


after the engine has started.If the engine does not start, try thefollowing.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the“OFF” position and wait for at least10 seconds. After checking that theparking brake is firmly set, turn theignition switch to the “START” positionwhile depressing the accelerator pedalslightly (approximately a quarter of thefull stroke). Release the acceleratorpedal as soon as the engine starts.(2) If this fails to start the engine, turnthe ignition switch back to the “OFF”position and wait for at least 10seconds. Then fully depress the accel-erator pedal and turn the ignitionswitch to the “START” position. If theengine starts, quickly release theaccelerator pedal.(3) If this fails to start the engine, turnthe ignition switch again to the “OFF”position. After waiting for 10 secondsor longer, turn the ignition switch to the“START” position without depressingthe accelerator pedal.(4) If the engine still refuses to start,contact your nearest SUBARU dealerfor assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicatorlights have gone off after the engine hasstarted. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as theengine warms up.

NOTEThe engine may be difficult to startwhen the battery has been discon-nected and reconnected (for mainte-nance or other purposes). This diffi-culty is caused by the electronicallycontrolled throttle’s self-diagnosisfunction. To overcome it, keep theignition switch in the “ON” positionfor approximately 10 seconds beforestarting the engine.

& Automatic transmission ve-hicle

1. Apply the parking brake.2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-cessories.3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N”position (preferably “P” position).The starter motor will only operate whenthe selector lever is at the “P” or “N”position.4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position and check the operation of thewarning and indicator lights. Refer to the“Warning and indicator lights” section inchapter 3.5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-tor pedal. Release the key immediatelyafter the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try thefollowing.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the“OFF” position and wait for at least10 seconds. After checking that theparking brake is firmly set, turn theignition switch to the “START” positionwhile depressing the accelerator pedalslightly (approximately a quarter of thefull stroke). Release the acceleratorpedal as soon as the engine starts.(2) If this fails to start the engine, turnthe ignition switch back to the “OFF”position and wait for at least 10seconds. Then fully depress the accel-erator pedal and turn the ignitionswitch to the “START” position. If theengine starts, quickly release theaccelerator pedal.(3) If this fails to start the engine, turnthe ignition switch again to the “OFF”position. After waiting for 10 secondsor longer, turn the ignition switch to the“START” position without depressingthe accelerator pedal.(4) If the engine still refuses to start,contact your nearest SUBARU dealerfor assistance.


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (222,1)



6. Confirm that all warning and indicatorlights have gone out after the engine hasstarted. The fuel injection system auto-matically lowers the idle speed as theengine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, makesure that the selector lever is at the “P” or“N” position and that the parking brake isapplied.

NOTEThe engine may be difficult to startwhen the battery has been discon-nected and reconnected (for mainte-nance or other purposes). This diffi-culty is caused by the electronicallycontrolled throttle’s self-diagnosisfunction. To overcome it, keep theignition switch in the “ON” positionfor approximately 10 seconds beforestarting the engine.

CAUTION

If you restart the engine while thevehicle is moving, shift the selectorlever into the “N” position. Do notattempt to place the selector lever ofa moving vehicle into the “P” posi-tion.

Stopping the engine

The ignition switch should be turned offonly when the vehicle is stopped and theengine is idling.

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when thevehicle is moving. This will causeloss of power to the power steeringand the brake booster, making steer-ing and braking more difficult. Itcould also result in accidental acti-vation of the “LOCK” position on theignition switch, causing the steeringwheel to lock.

Remote engine start system(dealer option)

WARNING

. Do not remote start a vehicle inan enclosed environment (e.g., ina closed garage). Prolonged op-eration of a motor vehicle in anenclosed environment can causea harmful build-up of CarbonMonoxide. Carbon Monoxide isharmful to your health. Exposureto high levels of Carbon Monox-ide can cause headaches, dizzi-ness or in extreme cases uncon-sciousness and/or death.

. Before performing any servicingof the vehicle, temporarily placethe remote engine start system inservice mode to prevent thesystem from unexpectedly start-ing the engine.

Black plate (223,1)


& Starting your vehicleThe remote control start system is acti-vated by pressing the “ ” button twicewithin 3 seconds on your remote controltransmitter. The system will check certainpre-conditions before starting, and if allsafety parameters are correct, the enginewill start within 5 seconds. While thevehicle is operating via remote enginestart, the vehicle’s power window featureswill be disabled. Also, the system has atimer and will shut down after 15 minutes ifyou do not operate the vehicle. Press andhold the “ ” button for 2 seconds again toturn the vehicle off. If the vehicle’s startercranks but does not start or starts andstalls, the remote engine start system willpower off then attempt to start the vehicle

an additional four times. If the vehicle failsto start after the additional attempts, theremote engine start system will abort andreturn to a non-activated state.

& Remote start safety featuresFor safety and security reasons, thesystem will fail to start and beep the horntwice or shut down the engine duringremote start operation if any of thefollowing conditions occur.. The brake pedal is pressed before thevehicle ignition switch is turned “on”.. The key was already in the ignitionswitch.. The engine hood is opened.. The vehicle’s engine idle speed hasreached a level over 3,000 rpm.. The alarm is triggered by opening adoor or the rear gate.

NOTE. The security indicator light on thedashboard will stop flashing whileunder remote engine start operation,but the vehicle is still protected.. If the vehicle is entered duringremote engine start operation, thesystem will not record entry in thealarm history.

& Entering the vehicle while itis running via remote start

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using thekeyless entry system. If the vehicle’sdoors are unlocked manually using thekey, the vehicle’s alarm system will triggerand the remote engine start system willturn off. Inserting the key into the ignitionswitch and turning it to the “ON” position orpressing the unlock button “ ” on theremote keyless entry transmitter will dis-arm the alarm system. Refer to the “Alarmsystem” section in chapter 2.2. Enter the vehicle. Do not press thebrake pedal.3. Insert the key into the ignition switchand turn to the “ON” position. If the ignitionswitch is accidentally turned to the“START” position, the system’s “starteranti-grind” feature will prevent the starterfrom re-cranking.4. Press the brake pedal. The remotestarter disengages, the vehicle’s powerwindow features are re-enabled and thevehicle will operate normally.

& Entering the vehicle follow-ing remote engine start shut-down

An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle isopened by the remote keyless entry


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (224,1)



transmitter within a few seconds immedi-ately following remote engine start shut-down.

& Pre-heating or pre-coolingthe interior of the vehicle

Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-perature controls to the desired settingand operation. After the system starts thevehicle, the heater or air-conditioning willactivate and heat or cool the interior toyour setting.

& Service modeIn service mode, the remote start functionis temporarily disabled to prevent thesystem from unexpectedly starting theengine while being serviced.

! To engage the service mode

Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position, depress and hold the brakepedal, then press and release the “ ”button on the remote control transmitterthree times. The system will pause for 1second and then flash the parking lightsand honk the horn three times indicatingthat the system is in service mode. Whenattempting to activate the remote startsystem while in service mode, the parkinglights will flash and the horn will honk twotimes and will not start.

! To disengage the service mode

Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position, depress and hold the brakepedal, then press and release the “ ”button on the remote control transmitterthree times. The system will pause for 1second and flash the parking lights 1 timeindicating that the system has exitedservice mode.

NOTEWhen taking your vehicle in for service,it is recommended that you inform theservice personnel that your vehicle isequipped with a remote control startsystem.

& Remote transmitter program-ming and programmable fea-ture option

New transmitters can be programmed tothe engine starter system in the event thatremote transmitters are lost, stolen ordamaged. The remote engine start systemalso has one programmable feature thatcan be adjusted for user preference.The remote engine starter system can beprogrammed to either make an audiblehorn chirp upon remote start activation ornot. Remote transmitter programming andfeature programming can be adjustedusing the following procedure.

1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’sdoor must remain opened throughout theentire process).2. Insert the key into the vehicle’s ignitionswitch and turn to the “ON” position.3. Locate the small black programmingbutton behind the fuse box cover, on thedriver’s side left under the dashboardpanel.4. Press and hold the black programmingbutton for 10 to 15 seconds. The horn willhonk and the parking lights will flash threetimes to indicate that the system hasentered programming mode. At this pointyou can proceed to either step 5 or step 6.5. To program a remote transmitter:press and release the “ ” button on eachtransmitter. The horn will honk and theparking lights will flash one time to indicatea successful transmitter learn each timethe “ ” button is pressed. You canprogram up to eight transmitters.6. To toggle the Horn Confirmation chirpsON/OFF: press and release the brake totoggle the feature. The horn will chirp andthe parking lights will flash one time toindicate Confirmation Horn Chirps are“OFF”. The horn will honk and the parkinglights will flash 2 times to indicate Con-firmation Horn Chirps are “ON”. Pressingthe brake pedal repeatedly will toggle thefeature ON or OFF each time.

Black plate (225,1)


7. To exit the remote transmitter andfeature programming mode, turn the igni-tion switch to the “LOCK” position, removethe key from the ignition switch and testoperation of the remote transmitter(s) andhorn confirmation feature.

& System maintenance

! Changing the remote control bat-teries

The two 3-volt lithium batteries (modelCR-1220) supplied in your remote controlshould last approximately three years,depending on usage. When the batteriesbegin to weaken, you will notice adecrease in range (distance from thevehicle that your remote control operates).Follow the instructions below to changethe remote control batteries.

1. Carefully pry the remote control halvesapart using a small flathead screwdriver.

2. Remove the circuit board from thebottom half of the case and slide the whiteplastic battery holder out from under thebattery tab releasing the batteries. Re-move the old batteries and replace withnew ones. Be sure to observe the (+) sign


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (226,1)



on the old batteries before removing themto ensure that the new batteries areinserted properly (battery “+” should bepointed away from the transmitter circuitboard on both batteries).3. Carefully snap the case halves backtogether, then test the remote control.

NOTEThis device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules and with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions: (1) Thisdevice may not cause harmful inter-ference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may causeundesired operation.Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

Manual transmission

The manual transmission is a fully syn-chromeshed, 5-forward-speed and 1-re-verse-speed transmission.The shift pattern is shown on the shiftlever knob. When shifting from 5th gear toreverse gear, first return the shift lever tothe neutral position then shift into reversegear.

To change gears, fully depress the clutchpedal, move the shift lever, and graduallylet up on the clutch pedal.If it is difficult to shift into gear, put thetransmission in neutral, release the clutchpedal momentarily, and then try again.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with theclutch disengaged (i.e., when theclutch pedal is depressed) or withthe shift lever in the neutral position.Engine braking has no effect ineither of these conditions and therisk of an accident is consequentlyincreased.

CAUTION

Shift into reverse ONLY when thevehicle has completely stopped. Itmay cause damage to the transmis-sion to try shifting into reverse whenthe vehicle is moving.

NOTE (non-turbo models only)To protect the engine while the shiftlever is in the neutral position, theengine is controlled so that the enginespeed does not become too high evenif the accelerator pedal is fully de-pressed.

Black plate (227,1)


& Shifting speeds

! Recommended shifting speeds

The best compromise between fuel econ-omy and vehicle performance duringnormal driving is ensured by shifting upat the speeds listed in the following table.Non-turbo models

Shift up mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 16 (26)

2nd to 3rd 27 (43)

3rd to 4th 38 (61)

4th to 5th 50 (81)

Turbo models

Shift up mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 14 (23)

2nd to 3rd 24 (39)

3rd to 4th 35 (57)

4th to 5th 47 (76)

! Maximum allowable speeds

The following tables show the maximumspeeds that are possible with each differ-ent gear.

Never exceed the speed limit listed in thefollowing table for each gear positionexcept for brief acceleration in an emer-gency. The tachometer’s needle will enter

the red area if these speeds are ex-ceeded. Failure to observe this precautioncan lead to excessive engine wear andpoor fuel economy.Non-turbo models

mph (km/h)1st 31 (50)

2nd 52 (84)

3rd 75 (120)

Turbo modelsmph (km/h)

1st 34 (54)

2nd 59 (95)

3rd 85 (136)

Never exceed the posted speed limit.

WARNING

When shifting down a gear, ensurethat the vehicle is not travelling at aspeed exceeding the Maximum Al-lowable Speed for the gear which isabout to be selected. Failure toobserve this precaution can lead toengine over-revving and this in turncan result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application ofengine brakes when the vehicle istravelling on a slippery surface canlead to wheel locking; as a conse-

quence, control of the vehicle maybe lost and the risk of an accidentincreased.

& Driving tipsDo not drive with your foot resting on theclutch pedal and do not use the clutch tohold your vehicle at a standstill on anupgrade. Either of those actions maycause clutch damage.Do not drive with your hand resting on theshift lever. This may cause wear on thetransmission components.

When it is necessary to reduce vehiclespeed due to slow traffic, turning corners,or driving up steep hills, downshift to alower gear before the engine starts tolabor.

On steep downgrades, downshift thetransmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear asnecessary; this helps to maintain a safespeed and to extend brake pad life.In this way, the engine provides a brakingeffect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)the brakes while descending a hill, theymay overheat and not work properly.

The engine may, on rare occasions, knockwhen the vehicle rapidly accelerates orrapidly pulls away from a standstill. This


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (228,1)



phenomenon is not an indication of aproblem in your vehicle.

Automatic transmission

The automatic transmission is electroni-cally controlled and provides 4 forwardspeeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has amanual mode and a SPORT mode.

WARNING

Do not shift from the “P” or “N”position into the “D” or “R” positionwhile depressing the acceleratorpedal. This may cause the vehicleto jump forward or backward.

CAUTION

. Shift into the “P” or “R” positiononly after the vehicle is comple-tely stopped. Shifting while thevehicle is moving may causedamage to the transmission.

. Do not race the engine for morethan 5 seconds in any positionexcept the “N” or “P” positionwhen the brake is set or whenchocks are used in the wheels.This may cause the automatictransmission fluid to overheat.

. Avoid shifting from one of theforward driving positions into the

“R” position or vice versa untilthe vehicle has completelystopped. Such shifting maycause damage to the transmis-sion.

. When parking the vehicle, firstsecurely apply the parking brakeand then place the selector leverin the “P” position. Avoid parkingfor a long time with the selectorlever in any other position asdoing so could result in a deadbattery.

NOTE. When the engine coolant tempera-ture is still low, your vehicle’s auto-matic transmission will up-shift at high-er engine speeds than when the cool-ant temperature is sufficiently high inorder to shorten the warm-up time andimprove driveability. The gearshift tim-ing will automatically shift to the nor-mal timing after the engine has warmedup.. Immediately after ATF (automatictransmission fluid) is replaced, youmay feel that the automatic transmis-sion operation is somewhat unusual.This results from invalidation of datawhich the on-board computer has

Black plate (229,1)


collected and stored in memory toallow the transmission to shift at themost appropriate times for the currentcondition of your vehicle. Optimizedshifting will be restored as the vehiclecontinues to be driven for a while.

NOTE (non-turbo models only)To protect the engine while the “P” or“N” position is selected, the engine iscontrolled so that the engine speeddoes not become too high even if theaccelerator pedal is fully depressed.

& Selector lever

: Shift possible with brake pedal de-pressed

: Shift possible with brake pedal notdepressed

The selector lever has four positions, “P”,“R”, “N”, “D” and also has manual gate forusing “SPORT” mode or manual mode.

! P (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle andstarting the engine.In this position, the transmission is me-chanically locked to prevent the vehiclefrom rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first set theparking brake fully, then shift into the “P”position. Do not hold the vehicle with onlythe transmission.

To shift the selector lever from the “P” toany other position, you should depress thebrake pedal fully then move the selectorlever. This prevents the vehicle fromlurching when it is started.

! R (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle.

To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stopthe vehicle completely then move thelever to the “R” position.When the ignition switch has been turnedto the “LOCK” position, movement of theselector lever from the “N” position to the“R” position is possible for a limited timeperiod by depressing the brake pedal, andthen it becomes impossible. For details,

refer to “Selector lever reverse inhibitingfunction” in this section.

! N (Neutral)

This position is for restarting a stalledengine.In this position the wheels and transmis-sion are not locked. In this position, thetransmission is neutral; the vehicle will rollfreely, even on the slightest incline unlessthe parking brake or foot brake is on.Avoid coasting with the transmission inneutral.During coasting, there is no engine brak-ing effect.

NOTEIf the selector lever is in the “N”position when you stop the engine forparking, you may not subsequently beable to move it to the “R” and “P”positions. If this happens, turn theignition switch to the “ON” position.You will then be able to move theselector lever to the “P” position.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with theselector lever in the “N” (neutral)position. Engine braking has noeffect in this condition and the riskof an accident is consequently in-


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (230,1)



creased.

! D (Drive)

This position is for normal driving.The transmission automatically shifts intoa suitable gear from 1st to 4th according tothe vehicle speed and the accelerationyou require.

When more acceleration is required in thisposition, press the accelerator pedal fullyto the floor and hold that position. Thetransmission will automatically downshiftto 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you releasethe pedal, the transmission will return tothe original gear position.To use the “SPORT”mode, move the leverfrom this position into the manual gate. Touse the manual mode, move the leverfrom this position into the manual gatethen move it toward the “+” and “−” ends.

! While climbing a grade

When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to4th gear is prevented from taking placewhen the accelerator is released. Thisminimizes the chance of subsequentdownshifting to a lower gear when accel-erating again. This prevents repeatedupshifting and downshifting resulting in asmoother operation of the vehicle.

NOTEThe transmission may downshift to 2ndor 1st gear, depending on the way theaccelerator pedal is pressed to accel-erate the vehicle again.

! While going down a hill

When you are descending a hill or anyother slope while braking with the“SPORT” mode selected, the transmissionmay downshift to 3rd or 2nd gear depend-ing on how hard you depress the brakepedal, causing engine braking to work.Reacceleration for a short time will causethe transmission to upshift normally.

NOTE. A 4th-to-3rd automatic downshiftwill not occur at speeds above 50mph (80 km/h) and a 3rd-to-2nd auto-matic downshift will not occur atspeeds above 24 mph (38 km/h).. Automatic downshifts to 3rd or 2ndmay occur even when driving on a levelroad depending on conditions, such ashow hard you depress the brake pedal.

& Selector lever reverse inhi-biting function

This function prevents accidental move-ment of the selector lever to the “R”position while the vehicle is moving.

The function becomes operational whenthe vehicle reaches a speed of approxi-mately 6 mph (10 km/h). Once opera-tional, it prevents the selector lever frombeing moved from the “N” position to the“R” position. When the vehicle speeddrops below 6 mph (10 km/h), the functionis canceled. The selector lever can thenbe moved to the “R” and “P” positions.

When the ignition switch has been turnedto the “LOCK” position, movement of theselector lever from the “N” position to the“R” position is possible for a limited timeperiod by depressing the brake pedal andthen becomes impossible. Also, the se-lector lever cannot be moved to the “R”position after it has been placed in the “P”position and then placed again in the “N”position.When the movement of the selector leverfrom the “N” position to the “R” positionhas become impossible, turn the ignitionswitch back to the “ON” position thenmove the selector lever to the “P” position.Pressing the selector lever release buttonalso makes it possible to move theselector lever to the “P” position at thistime.

Black plate (231,1)


! Selector lever release button

If you inadvertently have turned the igni-tion switch to the “LOCK” position with theselector lever in the “N” position, proceedas follows. To remove the shift lockrelease cover, refer to the “Shift lockrelease” section in this chapter. Then, witha screwdriver inserted into the hole, movethe selector lever to the “P” position. If theselector lever reverse inhibiting functionfails, have the vehicle inspected by thenearest SUBARU dealer.

& Selection of manual mode

With the vehicle either moving or station-ary, move the selector lever from the “D”position to the manual gate then move it tothe “+” end or “−” end of the manual gateto select manual mode.

1) Upshift indicator2) Downshift indicator3) Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, thegear position indicator and upshift indica-tor and/or downshift indicator in thecombination meter illuminate. The gearposition indicator shows the currentlyselected gear in the 1st-to-4th-gear range.The upshift and downshift indicators showwhen a gear shift is possible. When theupshift indicator “ ” is illuminated, up-shifting is possible. When the downshiftindicator “ ” is illuminated, downshiftingis possible. When both indicators areilluminated, upshifting and downshiftingare both possible. When the vehicle stops(for example, at traffic signals), the down-shift indicator turns off.


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (232,1)



Gear shifts can be performed by using theselector lever.

Using the selector leverShift to the next-higher gear by brieflypushing the selector lever toward the “+”end of the manual gate.Shift to the next-lower gear by brieflypulling the selector lever toward the “−”end of the manual gate.

NOTEPlease read the following points care-fully and bear them in mind when usingthe manual mode.. If you attempt to shift down whenthe engine speed is too high, i.e., whena downshift would push the tachometerneedle beyond the red zone, beeps willbe emitted to warn you that the down-

shift is not possible.. If you attempt to shift up when thevehicle speed is too low, the transmis-sion will not respond.. You can perform a skip-shift (forexample, from 4th to 2nd) by operatingthe selector lever twice in rapid suc-cession.. The transmission automatically se-lects 1st gear when the vehicle stopsmoving.. If the temperature of the automatictransmission fluid becomes too high,the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light willcome on and upshifts to 4th gear willnot be possible. Immediately stop thevehicle in a safe place and let theengine idle until the warning light goesoff.

& Maximum speeds

WARNING

When down shifting, ensure that thevehicle is not travelling at a speedexceeding the Maximum AllowableSpeed for the gear which is about tobe selected. Failure to observe thisprecaution can lead to engine over-revving and this in turn can result inengine damage.

In addition, sudden application ofengine braking caused by downshifting when the vehicle is travel-ling on a slippery surface can leadto wheel locking; as a consequence,control of the vehicle may be lostand the risk of an accident in-creased.

The following tables show the maximumspeeds that are possible with each differ-ent gear.

When down shifting, it is important toconfirm that the current vehicle speed isnot in excess of the Maximum AllowableSpeed of the gear which is about to beselected.Non–turbo models

mph (km/h)

Gearposition Manual mode “D” position

1 30 (48)

2 63 (101)

3 99 (160)

Black plate (233,1)


Turbo modelsmph (km/h)

Gearposition Manual mode “D” position

1 36 (58) 26 (42)

2 65 (105) 65 (104)

3 105 (169) 104 (168)

NOTEIn order to prevent over-revving duringdeceleration of the vehicle, the trans-mission will remain in the current gearif the speed of the vehicle is in excessof the Maximum Allowable Speed forthe gear to which the selector lever hasbeen moved.

& Driving tips. On a road surface where there is a riskof wheelspin (for example, a snow- orgravel-covered road), you can pull awayfrom a standstill (safely and easily) by firstselecting the 2nd gear of the manualmode.. Always apply the foot or parking brakewhen the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or“R” position.. Always set the parking brake whenparking your vehicle. Do not hold thevehicle with only the transmission.. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary

position on an uphill grade by using the“D” position. Use the brake instead.. The engine may, on rare occasions,knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.This phenomenon does not indicate aproblem.

& SPORT mode

SPORT mode is used when power isneeded for rapid acceleration or for uphilldriving. To select this mode, move theselector lever from the “D” position to themanual gate.

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

When selected, the SPORT mode indica-tor light on the instrument panel will turnon.To deselect SPORT mode, move the


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (234,1)



selector lever to the “D” position or selectmanual mode.To subsequently reselect SPORT mode,move the selector lever to the “D” positionand from there to the manual gate.In this mode, the transmission shifts up athigher vehicle speeds and shifts downmore responsively than in normal mode.

& Shift lock releaseIf the selector lever does not move fromthe “P” position with the brake pedaldepressed and the ignition switch in the“ON” position, perform the following steps:To override the shift lock:1. Set the parking brake and stop theengine.2. Take out the screwdriver from the toolbag.

3. Remove the cover by prying on theedge with a flat-head screwdriver.

4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.5. Push down on the screwdriver andmove the selector lever from the “P” to the“N” position.

6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole.Depress the brake pedal and start theengine.

Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARUdealer immediately to have the systemrepaired.

Black plate (235,1)


Power steering

The power steering system operates onlywhen the engine is running.If you lose power steering assist becausethe engine stops or the system fails tofunction, you can steer but it will takemuch more effort.

NOTERight after the engine has been startedand before it has warmed up, you mayhear a noise coming from areas adja-cent to the power steering pump whichis located at the right-front area of theengine compartment. This noise isnormal. It does not indicate powersteering system trouble.

CAUTION

Do not hold the steering wheel at thefully locked position left or right formore than 5 seconds. This maydamage the power steering pump.

Braking

& Braking tips

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. This can causedangerous overheating of thebrakes and needless wear on thebrake pads and linings.

! When the brakes get wet

When driving in rain or after washing thevehicle, the brakes may get wet. As aresult, brake stopping distance will belonger. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicleat a safe speed while lightly depressingthe brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

! Use of engine braking

Remember to make use of engine brakingin addition to foot braking. When descend-ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,the brakes may start working improperlybecause of brake fluid overheating,caused by overheated brake pads. Tohelp prevent this, shift into a lower gear toget stronger engine braking.

! Braking when a tire is punctured

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenlywhen a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keepdriving straight ahead while graduallyreducing speed. Then slowly pull off theroad to a safe place.

& Brake system

! Two separate circuits

Your vehicle has two separate circuitbrake systems. Each circuit works diag-onally across the vehicle. If one circuit ofthe brake system should fail, the other halfof the system still works. If one circuit fails,the brake pedal will go down much closerto the floor than usual and you will need topress it down much harder. And a muchlonger distance will be needed to stop thevehicle.

! Brake booster

The brake booster uses engine manifoldvacuum to assist braking force. Do notturn off the engine while driving becausethat will turn off the brake booster, result-ing in poor braking power.The brakes will continue to work evenwhen the brake booster completely stopsfunctioning. If this happens, however, youwill have to push the pedal much harderthan normal and the braking distance willincrease.


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (236,1)



! Brake assist system (if equipped)

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about thebrake assist. It is not a system thatbrings more braking ability to thevehicle beyond its braking capabil-ity. Always use the utmost carewhen driving regarding vehiclespeed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly,continue depressing the brake pedalstrongly to bring the effect of thebrake assist.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system.It assists the brake power when the drivercannot depress the brake pedal stronglyand the brake power is insufficient.Brake assist generates the brake poweraccording to the speed at which the driverdepresses the brake pedal.

NOTEWhen you depress the brake pedalstrongly or suddenly, the followingphenomena occur. However, eventhough these occur, they do not indi-

cate any malfunctions, and the brakeassist system is operating properly.. You might feel that the brake pedalis applied by lighter force and gener-ates a greater braking force.. You might hear clicking (knocking)sounds around brake pedal.

& Disc brake pad wear warningindicators

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-tors on the disc brakes give a warningnoise when the brake pads are worn.If a squeaking or scraping noise is heardfrom the disc brakes while braking, im-mediately have your vehicle checked byyour SUBARU dealer.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-tem)

The ABS system prevents the lock-up ofwheels which may occur during suddenbraking or braking on slippery road sur-faces. This helps prevent the loss ofsteering control and directional stabilitycaused by wheel lock-up.

When the ABS system is operating, youmay hear a chattering noise or feel a slightvibration in the brake pedal. This is normalwhen the ABS operates.

The ABS system will not operate when thevehicle speed is below approximately 6mph (10 km/h).

WARNING

Always use the utmost care indriving – overconfidence becauseyou are driving with an ABSequipped vehicle could easily leadto a serious accident.

CAUTION

. The ABS system does not alwaysdecrease stopping distance. Youshould always maintain a safefollowing distance from other

Black plate (237,1)


vehicles.

. When driving on badly surfacedroads, gravel roads, icy roads, orover deep newly fallen snow,stopping distances may be long-er for a vehicle with the ABSsystem than one without. Whendriving under these conditions,therefore, reduce your speed andleave ample distance from othervehicles.

. When you feel the ABS systemoperating, you should maintainconstant brake pedal pressure.Do not pump the brake pedalsince doing so may defeat theoperation of the ABS system.

& ABS system self-checkJust after the vehicle is started, you mayfeel on the brake pedal a vibration similarto when the ABS operates, and you mayalso hear the sound of the ABS workingfrom the engine compartment. This iscaused by an automatic functional test ofthe ABS system being carried out anddoes not indicate any abnormal condition.

& ABS warning light

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

The ABS warning light comes on when theignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and goes out after approximately2 seconds.This is an indication that the ABS systemis working properly.When driving with an insufficient batteryvoltage such as when the engine is jumpstarted, the ABS warning light may comeon. This is due to the low battery voltageand does not indicate a malfunction.When the battery becomes fully charged,the light will go out.

CAUTION

If the warning light behaves asdescribed below, the ABS systemmay not be working properly.

When the warning light is on, theABS function shuts down; however,the conventional brake system con-tinues to operate normally.

. The warning light does not comeon when the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position.

. The warning light comes on whenthe ignition switch is turned tothe “ON” position, but it does notgo out even when the vehiclespeed exceeds approximately 8mph (12 km/h).

. The warning light comes on dur-


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (238,1)



ing driving.

If these occur, have the ABS systemrepaired at the first available oppor-tunity by your SUBARU dealer.

NOTEIf the warning light behavior is asdescribed below, the ABS system maybe considered normal.. The warning light comes on rightafter the engine is started but goes outimmediately, remaining off.. The warning light remains on afterthe engine has been started, but it goesout when the vehicle speed reachesapproximately 8 mph (12 km/h).. The warning light comes on duringdriving, but it goes out immediately andremains off.

Electronic Brake Force Dis-tribution (EBD) system

The EBD system maximizes the effective-ness of the brakes by allowing the rearbrakes to supply a greater proportion ofthe braking force. It functions by adjustingthe distribution of braking force to the rearwheels in accordance with the vehicle’sloading condition and speed.The EBD system is an integral part of theABS system and uses some of the ABSsystem’s components to perform its func-tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-ing force. If any of the ABS componentsused by the EBD function fail, the EBDsystem also stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, youmay hear a chattering noise or feel a slightvibration in the brake pedal. This is normaland does not indicate a malfunction.

& Steps to take if EBD systemfails

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,

Black plate (239,1)


the system stops working and the brakesystem warning light and ABS warninglight come on simultaneously.

The EBD system may be faulty if thebrake system warning light and ABSwarning light illuminate simultaneouslyduring driving.Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-tional braking system will still function.However, the rear wheels will be moreprone to locking when the brakes areapplied harder than usual and the vehi-cle’s motion may therefore become some-what harder to control.If the brake system warning light and ABSwarning light illuminate simultaneously,take the following steps:1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,flat place.2. Shut down the engine, apply theparking brake and then restart it.3. Release the parking brake. If bothwarning lights go out, the EBD systemmay be faulty. Drive carefully to thenearest SUBARU dealer and have thesystem inspected.4. If both warning lights come on againand stay illuminated after the engine hasbeen restarted, shut down the engineagain, apply the parking brake, and checkthe brake fluid level.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the“MIN” mark, the EBD system may befaulty. Drive carefully to the nearestSUBARU dealer and have the systeminspected.6. If the brake fluid level is below the“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.Instead, have the vehicle towed to thenearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on is dangerous.This indicates your brake systemmay not be working properly. Ifthe light remains on, have thebrakes inspected by a SUBARUdealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whetherthe brakes are operating prop-erly, do not drive the vehicle.Have your vehicle towed to thenearest SUBARU dealer for re-pair.

Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem (if equipped)

WARNING

Always use the utmost care indriving – overconfidence becauseyou are driving with a Vehicle Dy-namics Control system equippedvehicle could easily lead to a ser-ious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equippedwith Vehicle Dynamics Control,winter tires or snow chainsshould be used when driving onsnow-covered or icy roads; inaddition, vehicle speed shouldbe reduced considerably. Simplyhaving a Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol system does not guaranteethat the vehicle will be able toavoid accidents in any situation.

. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-namics Control system is anindication that the road beingtravelled on has a slippery sur-face; since having Vehicle Dy-namics Control is no guarantee


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (240,1)



that full vehicle control will bemaintained at all times and underall conditions, its activationshould be seen as a sign thatthe speed of the vehicle shouldbe reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-nents, steering components, oran axle are removed from avehicle equipped with VehicleDynamics Control, have anauthorized SUBARU dealer per-form an inspection of that sys-tem.

. The following precautions shouldbe observed in order to ensurethat the Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol system is operating properly:

– All four wheels should befitted with tires of the samesize, type, and brand. Further-more, the amount of wearshould be the same for allfour tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at theproper level as shown on thevehicle placard attached tothe driver’s side door pillar.

– Use only the specified tem-porary spare tire to replace aflat tire. With a temporary

spare tire, the effectiveness ofthe Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem is reduced and thisshould be taken into accountwhen driving the vehicle insuch a condition.

In the event of wheelspin and/or skiddingon a slippery road surface and/or duringcornering and/or an evasive maneuver,the Vehicle Dynamics Control systemadjusts the engine’s output and thewheels’ respective braking forces to helpmaintain traction and directional control.. Traction Control FunctionThe traction control function is designed toprevent spinning of the driving wheels onslippery road surfaces, thereby helping tomaintain traction and directional control.Activation of this function is shown bysteady illumination of the Vehicle Dy-namics Control operation indicator light.

. Skid Suppression FunctionThe skid suppression function is designedto help maintain directional stability bysuppressing the wheels’ tendency to slidesideways during steering operations. Acti-vation of this function is shown by flashingof the Vehicle Dynamics Control operationindicator light.

NOTE. Slight twitching of the brake pedalmay be felt when the Vehicle DynamicsControl system operates; a small de-gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak-ing may also be noticed in this situa-tion. These are normal characteristicsof Vehicle Dynamics Control operationand are no cause for alarm.. When driving off immediately afterstarting the engine, a short-lived opera-tion noise may be noticed coming fromthe engine compartment. This noise isgenerated as a result of a check beingperformed on the Vehicle DynamicsControl system and is normal.. Depending on the timing of activa-tion of the brakes, the brake pedal mayseem to jolt when you drive off afterstarting the engine. This is a conse-quence of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol operational check and is normal.. In the circumstances listed in thefollowing, the vehicle may be moreunstable than it feels to the driver.The Vehicle Dynamics Control Systemmay therefore operate. Such operationdoes not indicate a system fault.

– on gravel-covered or ruttedroads– on unfinished roads– when the vehicle is fitted with

Black plate (241,1)


snow tires or winter tires. Activation of the Vehicle DynamicsControl system will cause operation ofthe steering wheel to feel slightlydifferent compared to that for normalconditions.. Even if the vehicle is equipped witha Vehicle Dynamics Control system, itis important that winter tires be usedwhen driving on snow-covered or icyroads. (All four wheels should be fittedwith tires of the same size and brand.)Furthermore, if snow chains are to beused, they should be fitted on the frontwheels. When a vehicle is fitted withsnow chains, however, the effective-ness of the Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem is reduced and this should betaken into account when driving thevehicle in such a condition.. It is always important to reducespeed when approaching a corner,even if the vehicle is equipped withVehicle Dynamics Control.. All four wheels should be fitted withtires of the same size, type, and brand;furthermore, the amount of wearshould be the same for all four tires. Ifthese precautions are not observedand non-matching tires are used, it isquite possible that the Vehicle Dy-namics Control system will be unable

to operate correctly as intended.. Always turn off the engine beforereplacing a tire as failure to do so mayrender the Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem unable to operate correctly.

& Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem monitor

! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-tion indicator light

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

The indicator light turns on when theignition switch is turned to the ON position;it turns off approximately 2 seconds later.This indicator light flashes during activa-tion of the skid suppression function and isilluminated steadily during activation of thetraction control function.The following two situations could indicatea malfunction of the Vehicle DynamicsControl system; if either should occur,have an authorized SUBARU dealer carryout an inspection of that system at the firstavailable opportunity.. The indicator light does not turn onwhen the ignition switch is turned to theON position.. The indicator light does not turn offapproximately 2 seconds after the ignition


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (242,1)



switch has been turned to the ON position.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warninglight/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFFindicator light

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

This single light has the function ofindicating malfunctions in the VehicleDynamics Control system and the functionof indicating that the Vehicle DynamicsControl system is not operating. It comeson in the event of a malfunction in thesystem and is illuminated whenever thesystem is not operating.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warninglight

The warning light comes on when theignition switch is turned to the “ON”position and goes off several secondsafter engine startup. This lighting patternindicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol system is operating normally.

The following situations could indicate amalfunction of the Vehicle DynamicsControl system; if any should occur, havean authorized SUBARU dealer carry outan inspection of the system at the firstavailable opportunity.. The warning light does not turn onwhen the ignition switch is turned to theON position.. The warning light turns on while thevehicle is being driven.. When a malfunction has occurred inthe Vehicle Dynamics Control electricalsystem, only the warning light will turn on.In such an event, the ABS will still be

operating normally.. The warning light will also turn on whena problem occurs with the ABS or VehicleDynamics Control electronic control sys-tems.

Because the Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem controls each brake through theABS, whenever the ABS stops operatingdue to a malfunction in that electricalsystem, the Vehicle Dynamics Control willalso become unable to control all fourbrakes. Thus Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem operation halts and the warninglight turns on. Although both the VehicleDynamics Control system and the ABSwill be inoperable in this situation, it willstill be possible to stop the vehicle usingnormal braking. The Vehicle DynamicsControl system and the ABS do notadversely affect operation of the vehiclein any way when they are inoperable;however should such a situation occur,drive with care and have an authorizedSUBARU dealer carry out an inspection ofthose systems at the first available oppor-tunity.

NOTEWhen the warning light turns on and offin the following way, it indicates thatthe Vehicle Dynamics Control systemis operating normally.

Black plate (243,1)


. Although turning on after the enginehas been started, the warning lightquickly turns off and stays off.. The warning light turns on when thevehicle is being driven; it then turns offand stays off.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-dicator light

This light comes on to indicate that theVehicle Dynamics Control system is innon-operation mode. This does not con-stitute failure of the Vehicle DynamicsControl system.

NOTE. The indicator light may stay on for awhile after the engine has been started,especially in cold weather. This occursbecause the engine has not yetwarmed up and is completely normal.The light will turn off when the enginehas reached a suitable operating tem-perature.. When an engine problem occursand the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator lamp turns on,the indicator light will also come on.

The following two situations could indicatemalfunction of the Vehicle DynamicsControl system; if either should occur,have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry

out an inspection of that system at the firstavailable opportunity.. The indicator light does not turn onwhen the ignition switch is turned to theON position.. The indicator light fails to turn off afterthe engine is started, even when severalminutes have passed to allow the engineto heat up sufficiently.

& Vehicle Dynamics ControlOFF switch

Pressing the switch to deactivate theVehicle Dynamics Control system canfacilitate the following operations:. a standing start on a steeply slopingroad with a snowy, gravel-covered, orotherwise slippery surface

. extrication of the vehicle when itswheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

When the switch is pressed during engineoperation, the “ ” indicator light in thecombination meter illuminates. The Vehi-cle Dynamics Control system will bedeactivated and the vehicle will behavelike a model not equipped with the VehicleDynamics Control system. When theswitch is pressed again to reactivate theVehicle Dynamics Control system, the “ ”indicator light goes off.With the Vehicle Dynamics Control systemdeactivated, traction and stability en-hancement offered by Vehicle DynamicsControl system is unavailable. Thereforeyou should not deactivate the VehicleDynamics Control system except underabove-mentioned situations.

NOTE. When the switch has been pressedto deactivate the Vehicle DynamicsControl system, the Vehicle DynamicsControl system automatically reacti-vates itself the next time the ignitionswitch is turned to the “LOCK” positionand the engine is restarted.. If the switch is held down for 10seconds or longer, the indicator lightgoes off, the Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem is activated, and the system


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (244,1)



ignores any further pressing of theswitch. To make the switch usableagain, turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position and restart the en-gine.. When the switch is pressed todeactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol system, the vehicle’s running per-formance is comparable with that of avehicle that does not have a VehicleDynamics Control system. Do not de-activate the Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem except when absolutely neces-sary.

Tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.models)

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-vides the driver with a warning messageby sending a signal from a sensor that isinstalled in each wheel when tire pressureis severely low.The tire pressure monitoring system willactivate only when the vehicle is driven atspeeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,this system may not react immediately to asudden drop in tire pressure (for example,a blow-out caused by running over asharp object).

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on while driving, never brakesuddenly and keep driving straightahead while gradually reducingspeed. Then slowly pull off the roadto a safe place. Otherwise an acci-dent involving serious vehicle da-mage and serious personal injurycould occur.

Check the pressure for all four tiresand adjust the pressure to the COLDtire pressure shown on the tireplacard on the door pillar on thedriver’s side.

Even when the vehicle is driven avery short distance, the tires getwarm and their pressures increase

Black plate (245,1)


accordingly. Be sure to let the tirescool thoroughly before adjustingtheir pressures to the standardvalues shown on the tire placard.Refer to the “Tires and wheels”section in chapter 11. The tire pres-sure monitoring system does notfunction when the vehicle is station-ary. After adjusting the tire pres-sures, increase the vehicle speed toat least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start theTPMS re-checking of the tire infla-tion pressures. If the tire pressuresare now above the severe lowpressure threshold, the low tirepressure warning light should gooff a few minutes later.

If this light still comes on whiledriving after adjusting the tire pres-sure, a tire may have significantdamage and a fast leak that causesthe tire to lose air rapidly. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tireas soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or awheel rim is replaced without theoriginal pressure sensor/transmitterbeing transferred, the low tire pres-sure warning light will illuminatesteadily after blinking for approxi-mately one minute. This indicatesthe TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact yourSUBARU dealer as soon as possiblefor tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.

Do not inject any tire liquid oraerosol tire sealant into the tires,as this may cause a malfunction ofthe tire pressure sensors. If the lightilluminates steadily after blinking forapproximately one minute, promptlycontact a SUBARU dealer to havethe system inspected.

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any metalparts in the cargo room/truck. Thismay cause poor reception of thesignals from the tire pressure sen-sors, and the tire pressure monitor-ing system will not function prop-erly.

NOTEThis device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules and with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions: (1) Thisdevice may not cause harmful inter-ference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may causeundesired operation.Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.


7

Black plate (246,1)



Parking your vehicle

& Parking brakeTo set the parking brake, press the brakepedal firmly and hold it down while fullypulling up the parking brake lever.

To release the parking brake, pull the leverup slightly, press the release button, thenlower the lever while keeping the buttonpressed.When the parking brake is set while theengine is running, the parking brakewarning light comes on. After starting thevehicle, be sure that the warning light hasgone out before the vehicle is driven.Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights”section in chapter 3.

CAUTION

Never drive while the parking brakeis set because this will cause un-necessary wear on the brake lin-ings. Before starting to drive, alwaysmake sure that the parking brakehas been fully released.

& Parking tipsWhen parking your vehicle, always set theparking brake firmly and put the shift leverin the “1” (1st) for an upgrade or “R”(Reverse) for a downgrade for manualtransmission vehicles, or in the “P” (Park)position for automatic transmission vehi-cles. Always set the parking brake firmlywhen parking your vehicle. Never rely onthe transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn thesteering wheel. When the vehicle isheaded up the hill, the front wheels shouldbe turned away from the curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheelsshould be turned into the curb.

Black plate (247,1)


WARNING

. Never leave unattended childrenor pets in the vehicle. They couldaccidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent op-eration of the vehicle. Also, onhot or sunny days, the tempera-ture in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough tocause severe or possibly fatalinjuries to people.

. Do not park the vehicle overflammable materials such as drygrass, waste paper or rags, asthey may burn easily if they comenear hot engine or exhaust sys-tem parts.

. Be sure to stop the engine if youtake a nap in the vehicle. Ifengine exhaust gas enters thepassenger compartment, occu-pants in the vehicle could diefrom carbon monoxide (CO) con-tained in the exhaust gas.

CAUTION

If your vehicle has a front under-spoiler and rear underspoiler (bothoptional), pay attention to blocks

and other obstructions on theground when parking. The under-spoilers could be damaged by con-tact with them.

Hill start assist system (Man-ual transmission – ifequipped)

CAUTION

The Hill start assist system is adevice only for helping the driverto START the vehicle on an uphillgrade. To prevent accidents whenthe vehicle is parked on a slope, besure to firmly set the parking brake.When setting the parking brake,make sure that the vehicle remainsstationary when the clutch pedal isreleased.

The Hill start assist system is a device tomake starting on an uphill grade easier.


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (248,1)



On an uphill grade, when the clutch pedalis depressed while the brake pedal is alsodepressed, braking power is maintainedtemporarily by the Hill start assist systemwhen the brake pedal is released. Thedriver is therefore able to start the vehiclethe same way as on a level grade, justusing the clutch and accelerator pedal.

The Hill start assist system does notoperate when the vehicle is facing down-hill. And the Hill start assist system maynot operate on slight grades.

When starting in reverse and using the Hillstart assist system, a braking effect maybe felt even after the brake pedal hasbeen released. However, this brakingeffect should disappear once the clutchpedal is released.

A slight jolt may be felt when the vehiclebegins to move forward after being re-versed.

If the braking power of the Hill start assistsystem is insufficient after the brake pedalis released, apply more braking power bypressing the brake pedal again.

Cruise control

Cruise control enables you to maintain aconstant vehicle speed without holdingyour foot on the accelerator pedal and it isoperative when the vehicle speed is 25mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure themain switch is turned “OFF” when thecruise control is not in use to avoidunintentionally setting the cruise control.

NOTEIf you press the main switch buttonwhile turning the ignition switch “ON”,the cruise control function is deacti-vated and the “CRUISE” indicator lightflashes. To reactivate the cruise controlfunction, turn the ignition switch backto the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, andthen turn it again to the “ON” position.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control underany of the following conditions. Thismay cause loss of vehicle control:

. driving up or down a steep grade

. driving on slippery or windingroads

. driving in heavy traffic

Black plate (249,1)


& To set cruise control

1. Push the “CRUISE” main switch but-ton.

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

The “ ” indicator light on the combi-nation meter will come on.2. Depress the accelerator pedal until thevehicle reaches the desired speed.

3. Push the “SET/COAST” button and

release it. Then release the acceleratorpedal.

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

At this time, the “ ” indicator light isilluminated in the combination meter.


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (250,1)



The vehicle will maintain the desiredspeed.

Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-creased while driving with the cruisecontrol activated. Simply depress theaccelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-leased, the vehicle will return to andmaintain the previous cruising speed.

& To temporarily cancel thecruise control

The cruise control can be temporarilycanceled in the following ways:

. Push the “CANCEL” button.

. Depress the brake pedal.

. Depress the clutch pedal (manualtransmission vehicles only).

. Shift the selector lever into the “N”position (automatic transmission vehiclesonly).. Shift the shift lever into neutral position(manual transmission vehicles only).The “ ” indicator light in the combinationmeter goes off when the cruise control iscanceled.

To resume the cruise control after it hasbeen temporarily canceled and with vehi-cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32km/h) or more, push the “RES/ACC”button to return to the original cruisingspeed automatically.The “ ” indicator light in the combinationmeter will automatically come on at thistime.

& To turn off the cruise controlThere are two ways to turn off the cruisecontrol:. Push the “CRUISE” main switch buttonagain.. Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc” or“LOCK” position (but only when thevehicle is completely stopped).

& To change the cruising speed

! To increase the speed (by button)

Push the “RES/ACC” button and hold ituntil the vehicle reaches the desiredspeed. Then, release the button. Thevehicle speed at that moment will bememorized and treated as the new setspeed.

Black plate (251,1)


When the difference between the actualvehicle speed and the set speed is lessthan 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed canbe increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each timeby pressing the “RES/ACC” button quickly.

! To increase the speed (by accel-erator pedal)

1. Depress the accelerator pedal toaccelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.2. Push the “SET/COAST” button once.Now the desired speed is set and thevehicle will keep running at that speedwithout depressing the accelerator pedal.

NOTEIf the difference between the actualvehicle speed when the button ispushed and the speed last time youset is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), thevehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph(1.6 km/h). This occurs because thecruise control system unit regards thisoperation as that intended to decreasethe vehicle speed.

! To decrease the speed (by button)

Push the “SET/COAST” button and hold ituntil the vehicle reaches the desiredspeed. Then, release the button. Thevehicle speed at that moment will bememorized and treated as the new setspeed.

When the difference between the actualvehicle speed and the set speed is lessthan 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed canbe lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time bypressing the “SET/COAST” button quickly.

! To decrease the speed (by brakepedal)

1. Depress the brake pedal to releasecruise control temporarily.2. When the speed decreases to the

desired speed, press the “SET/COAST”button once. Now the desired speed is setand the vehicle will keep running at thatspeed without depressing the acceleratorpedal.


– CONTINUED –

7

Black plate (252,1)



& Cruise control indicator light

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

The cruise control indicator light comes onwhen the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and goes out after approxi-mately 3 seconds.The light comes on when the “CRUISE”main switch is pressed.

NOTE. If you press the “CRUISE” mainswitch button while turning the ignitionswitch “ON”, the cruise control func-tion is deactivated and the cruisecontrol indicator light flashes. To re-activate the cruise control function,turn the ignition switch back to the“Acc” or “LOCK” position, and thenturn it again to the “ON” position.. If this indicator light and the CHECKENGINE warning light/malfunction in-dicator lamp flash simultaneously dur-ing driving, have the vehicle checkedby your nearest SUBARU dealer.

& Cruise control set indicatorlight

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

The cruise control set indicator light

Black plate (253,1)


comes on when the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position and goes outafter approximately 3 seconds.The light comes on when vehicle speedhas been set.


7

Black plate (2,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

Black plate (15,1)


New vehicle break-in driving – the first1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2

Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ........... 8-2Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4Driving tips for AWD vehicles ............................ 8-5Off road driving ................................................... 8-6

All AWD models except OUTBACK ...................... 8-6OUTBACK........................................................... 8-6

Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8

Driving on snowy and icy roads ........................... 8-9Corrosion protection.......................................... 8-10Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10Tire chains ........................................................ 8-11Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-11

Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-11Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-12GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Ratingand Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-13

Roof molding and crossbar (if equipped)............ 8-13Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-15

Driving tips

8

Black plate (256,1)


8-2 Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving– the first 1,000 miles (1,600km)

The performance and long life of yourvehicle are dependent on how you handleand care for your vehicle while it is new.Follow these instructions during the first1,000 miles (1,600 km):. Do not race the engine. And do notallow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpmexcept in an emergency.. Do not drive at one constant engine orvehicle speed for a long time, either fast orslow.. Avoid starting suddenly and rapidacceleration, except in an emergency.. Avoid hard braking, except in anemergency.

The same break-in procedures should beapplied to an overhauled engine, newlymounted engine or when brake pads orbrake linings are replaced with new ones.

Fuel economy hints

The following suggestions will help to savefuel.. Select the proper gear position for thespeed and road conditions.. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-tion. Always accelerate gently until youreach the desired speed. Then try tomaintain that speed for as long aspossible.. Do not pump the accelerator and avoidracing the engine.. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.. Keep the engine properly tuned.. Keep the tires inflated to the correctpressure shown on the tire placard, whichis located under the door latch on thedriver’s side. Low pressure will increasetire wear and fuel consumption.. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.. Keep the front and rear wheels inproper alignment.. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage orcargo.

Engine exhaust gas (Carbonmonoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.Engine exhaust gas containscarbon monoxide, a colorlessand odorless gas which is dan-gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-gine exhaust system to preventengine exhaust gas from enter-ing the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closedspace, such as a garage, exceptfor the brief time needed to drivethe vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parkedvehicle for a lengthy time whilethe engine is running. If that isunavoidable, then use the venti-lation fan to force fresh air intothe vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilatorinlet grille free from snow, leavesor other obstructions to ensurethat the ventilation system al-ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

Black plate (257,1)


exhaust fumes are entering thevehicle, have the problemchecked and corrected as soonas possible. If you must driveunder these conditions, driveonly with all windows fully open.

. Keep the trunk lid (4-door) or reargate (5-door) closed while drivingto prevent exhaust gas fromentering the vehicle.

NOTEDue to the expansion and contractionof the metals used in the manufactureof the exhaust system, you may hear acrackling sound coming from the ex-haust system for a short time after theengine has been shut off. This sound isnormal.

Catalytic converter

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

The catalytic converter is installed in theexhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaustgases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-ter:. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a smallamount of leaded fuel will damage thecatalytic converter.. Never start the engine by pushing orpulling the vehicle.. Avoid racing the engine.. Never turn off the ignition switch whilethe vehicle is moving.. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feelthe engine running rough (misfiring, back-firing or incomplete combustion), haveyour vehicle checked and repaired by anauthorized SUBARU dealer.. Do not apply undercoating or rustprevention treatment to the heat shield ofcatalytic converter and the exhaust sys-tem.. Do not drive with an extremely low fuellevel.

WARNING

. Avoid fire hazards. Do not driveor park the vehicle anywherenear flammable materials (e.g.,grass, paper, rags or leaves),because the catalytic converter

Driving tips 8-3

– CONTINUED –

8

Black plate (258,1)


8-4 Driving tips

operates at very high tempera-tures.

. Keep everyone and flammablematerials away from the exhaustpipe while the engine is running.The exhaust gas is very hot.

Periodic inspections

To keep your vehicle in the best conditionat all times, always have the recom-mended maintenance services listed inthe maintenance schedule in the “War-ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-formed at the specified time or mileageintervals.

Driving in foreign countries

When planning to use your vehicle inanother country:. Confirm the availability of the correctfuel. Refer to the “Fuel requirements”section in chapter 7.. Comply with all regulations and re-quirements of each country.

Black plate (259,1)


Driving tips for AWD vehicles

All-Wheel Drive distributes the enginepower to all four wheels. AWD vehiclesprovide better traction when driving onslippery, wet or snow-covered roads andwhen moving out of mud, dirt and sand.By shifting power between the front andrear wheels, SUBARU AWD can alsoprovide added traction during accelerationand added engine braking force duringdeceleration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehiclemay handle differently than an ordinarytwo wheel drive vehicle and it containssome features unique to AWD. For safetypurposes as well as to avoid damagingthe AWD system, you should keep thefollowing tips in mind:

. An AWD vehicle is better able to climbsteeper roads under snowy or slipperyconditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.There is little difference in handling,however, during extremely sharp turns orsudden braking. Therefore, when drivingdown a slope or turning corners, be sureto reduce your speed and maintain anample distance from other vehicles.. When replacing a tire, make sure youuse only the same size, construction,brand, and load range as the original tireslisted on the tire placard. Using othersizes, circumference or construction mayresult in severe mechanical damage to thedrive train of your vehicle and may affectride, handling, braking, speedometer/od-ometer calibration, and clearance be-tween the body and tires. It also may bedangerous and lead to loss of vehiclecontrol.. If you use a temporary spare tire toreplace a flat tire, be sure to use theoriginal temporary spare tire stored in thevehicle. Using other sizes may result insevere mechanical damage to the drivetrain of your vehicle.. Always check the cold tire pressurebefore starting to drive. The recom-mended tire pressure is provided on thetire placard, which is located under thedoor latch on the driver’s side.

. Tire chains should always be placed onthe front wheels only.. There are some precautions that youmust observe when towing your vehicle.For detail information, refer to the “Towing”section in chapter 9.

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe drivingspeed according to the road andweather conditions in order toavoid having an accident on asharp turn, during sudden brak-ing or under other similar condi-tions.

. Always use the utmost care indriving – overconfidence be-cause you are driving an All-Wheel Drive vehicle could easilylead to a serious accident.

Driving tips 8-5

8

Black plate (260,1)


8-6 Driving tips

Off road driving

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe drivingspeed according to the road andweather conditions in order toavoid having an accident on asharp turn, during sudden brak-ing or under other similar condi-tions.

. Always use the utmost care indriving – overconfidence be-cause you are driving an All-Wheel Drive vehicle could easilylead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

Do not drive on rough roads or overcurbs in a vehicle that has 17-inchor other ultra-low-profile tires. Thewheels and tires could be damagedby shock forces, leading to abnor-mal vibration or poor straight-linetracking. Driving would then bemore difficult.

& All AWD models exceptOUTBACK

Your AWD vehicle is neither a conven-tional off-road vehicle nor an all terrainvehicle. It is a passenger vehicle designedprimarily for on-road use. The AWDfeature gives it some limited off-roadcapabilities in situations in which drivingsurfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise similar to on-roaddriving conditions. Operating it under otherthan those conditions could subject thevehicle to excessive stress which mightresult in damage not eligible for repairunder warranty. If you do take yourSUBARU off-road, you should review thecommon sense precautions in the nextsection (applicable to the OUTBACK) forgeneral guidance. But please keep inmind that your vehicle’s off-road capabil-ities are more limited than those of theOUTBACK.Never attempt to drive through pools andpuddles, or roads flooded with water.Water entering the engine air intake orthe exhaust pipe or water splashing ontoelectrical parts may damage your vehicleand may cause it to stall.

& OUTBACKYour Subaru can be driven on ordinaryroads or off-road. But please keep in mindthat an AWD SUBARU is a passengervehicle and is neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. Ifyou do take your SUBARU off-road,certain common sense precautions suchas the following should be taken:. Make certain that you and all of yourpassengers are wearing seatbelts.. Carry some emergency equipment,such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone orcitizens band radio.. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-sary risks by driving in dangerous areas orover rough terrain.. Slow down and employ extra caution atall times. When driving off-road, you willnot have the benefit of marked trafficlanes, banked curves, traffic signs andthe like.. Do not drive across steep slopes.Instead, drive either straight up or straightdown the slopes. A vehicle can muchmore easily tip over sideways than it canend over end. Avoid driving straight up ordown slopes that are too steep.. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-cially at higher speeds.

Black plate (261,1)


. Do not grip the inside or spokes of thesteering wheel. A bad bump could jerk thewheel and injure your hands. Instead drivewith your fingers and thumbs on theoutside of the rim.. If driving through water, such as whencrossing shallow streams, first check thedepth of the water and the bottom of thestream bed for firmness and ensure thatthe bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowlyand completely through the stream. Thewater should be shallow enough that itdoes not reach the vehicle’s undercar-riage. Water entering the engine air intakeor the exhaust pipe or water splashingonto electrical parts may damage yourvehicle and may cause it to stall. Neverattempt to drive through rushing water;regardless of its depth, it can wash awaythe ground from under your tires, resultingin possible loss of traction and evenvehicle rollover.. Always check your brakes for effec-tiveness immediately after driving in sand,mud or water. Do this by driving slowlyand stepping on the brake pedal. Repeatthat process several times to dry out thebrake discs and brake pads.. Do not drive or park over or nearflammable materials such as dry grass orfallen leaves, as they may burn easily. Theexhaust system is very hot while the

engine is running and right after theengine stops. This could create a firehazard.. After driving through tall grass, mud,rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that thereis no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on theunderbody. Clear off any such matter fromthe underbody. If the vehicle is used withthese materials trapped or adhering to theunderbody, a mechanical breakdown orfire could occur.. Secure all cargo carried inside thevehicle and make certain that it is notpiled higher than the seatbacks. Duringsudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargocould be thrown around in the vehicle andcause injury. Do not pile heavy loads onthe roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’scenter of gravity and make it more proneto tip over.. If you must rock the vehicle to free itfrom sand or mud, depress the acceleratorpedal slightly and move the selector leverback and forth between “D” and “R”repeatedly. Do not race the engine. Forthe best possible traction, avoid spinningthe wheels when trying to free the vehicle.When the road surface is extremelyslippery, you can obtain better traction bystarting the vehicle with the transmissionin 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).

. Never equip your vehicle with tireslarger than those specified in this manual.. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicleunder hard-driving conditions such asrough roads or off roads will necessitatemore frequent replacement of engine oil,brake fluid and transmission oil than thatspecified in the maintenance scheduledescribed in the “Warranty and Mainte-nance Booklet”.

Remember that damage done to yourSubaru while operating it off-road andnot using common sense precautionssuch as those listed above is not eligiblefor warranty coverage.. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-road driving. Suspension components areparticularly prone to dirt buildup, so theyneed to be washed thoroughly.

Driving tips 8-7

8

Black plate (262,1)


8-8 Driving tips

Winter driving

& Operation during coldweather

Carry some emergency equipment, suchas tire chains, a window scraper, a bag ofsand, flares, a small shovel, and jumpercables.

Check the battery and cables. Coldtemperatures reduce battery capacity.The battery must be in good condition toprovide enough power for cold winterstarts.

Use an engine oil of proper grade andviscosity for cold weather. Heavy summeroil will cause harder starting.Keep the door locks from freezing by

squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damageor separate the rubber weather stripsaround the door. If the door is frozen,use hot water to melt the ice, and after-wards thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-tains an antifreeze solution. Do not useengine antifreeze or other substitutesbecause they may damage the paint ofthe vehicle.SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-perature varies according to how much itis diluted, as indicated in the followingtable.

Washer Fluid Con-centration Freezing Temperature

30% 10.48F (−128C)

50% −48F (−208C)

100% −498F (−458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washerfluid, check the freezing temperatures inthe table above when adjusting the fluidconcentration to the outside temperature.If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid witha different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid fromthe piping between the reservoir tank andwasher nozzles by operating the washerfor a certain period of time. Otherwise, ifthe concentration of the fluid remaining inthe piping is too low for the outsidetemperature, it may freeze and block thenozzles.

CAUTION

Adjust the washer fluid concentra-tion appropriately for the outsidetemperature. If the concentration isinappropriate, sprayed washer fluidmay freeze on the windshield andobstruct your view, and the fluidmay freeze in the reservoir tank.

! Before driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle, remove anysnow or ice from your shoes because thatcould make the pedals slippery anddangerous.

While warming up the vehicle beforedriving, check that the accelerator pedal,brake pedal, and all other controls operatesmoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that hasaccumulated under the fenders to avoidmaking steering difficult. During severe

Black plate (263,1)


winter driving, stop when and where it issafe to do so and check under the fendersperiodically.

! Parking in cold weather

Do not use the parking brake whenparking for long periods in cold weathersince it could freeze in that position.Instead, observe the following.1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” formanual transmission vehicles, and in “P”for automatic transmission vehicles.2. Use tire stops under the tires toprevent the vehicle from moving.

When the vehicle is parked in snow orwhen it snows, raise the wiper blades offthe glass to prevent damage to them.

When the vehicle has been left parkedafter use on roads heavily covered withsnow, or has been left parked during asnowstorm, icing may develop on thebrake system, which could cause poorbraking action. Check for snow or icebuildup on the suspension, disc brakesand brake hoses underneath the vehicle.If there is caked snow or ice, remove it,being careful not to damage the discbrakes and brake hoses and ABS har-ness.

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keepsnow clear of the exhaust pipe andfrom around your vehicle if you parkthe vehicle in snow with the enginerunning.

! Refueling in cold weather

To help prevent moisture from forming inthe fuel system and the risk of its freezing,use of an antifreeze additive in the fueltank is recommended during cold weather.Use only additives that are specificallydesigned for this purpose. When anantifreeze additive is used, its effect lastslonger if the tank is refilled whenever thefuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be usedfor an extended period, it is best to havethe fuel tank filled to capacity.

& Driving on snowy and icyroads

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoidsudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-speed driving, and sharp turning whendriving on snowy or icy roads.Always maintain ample distance betweenyour vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you

to avoid the need for sudden braking.To supplement the foot brake, use theengine brake effectively to control thevehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gearwhen necessary.)Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-vior can cause the wheels to lock, possiblyleading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-mance on snowy and icy roads. Forinformation on braking on slippery sur-faces, refer to the “ABS (Anti-lock BrakeSystem)” and “Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem” sections in chapter 7.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control onslippery roads such as snowy or icyroads. This may cause loss ofvehicle control.

Driving tips 8-9

– CONTINUED –

8

Black plate (264,1)


8-10 Driving tips

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous drivingin snowstorms. Snow will enter theengine’s intake system and mayhinder the air flow, which couldresult in engine shutdown or evenbreakdown.

! Wiper operation when snowing

Before driving in cold weather, make surethe wiper blades are not frozen to thewindshield or rear window. If the wiperblades are frozen to the windshield or rearwindow, use the defroster with the airflowcontrol dial in the “ ” position and thetemperature control dial set for maximumwarmth until the wiper blades are com-pletely thawed out. If your vehicle isequipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpfulto thaw the windshield wiper blades. Tothaw out the rear wiper blade, use the rearwindow defogger.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow startsto stick on the surface of the windshielddespite wiper operation, use the defrosterwith the airflow control dial in “ ” and thetemperature control dial set for maximumwarmth. After the windshield gets warmedenough to melt the frozen snow on it,wash it away using the windshield washer.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents thewiper from working effectively. If snow isstuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road toa safe place, then remove it. If you stopthe vehicle at road side, use the hazardwarning flasher to alert other drivers.

We recommend use of non-freezing typewiper blades (winter blades) during theseasons you could have snow and sub-zero temperatures. Blades of this typegive superior wiping performance insnowy conditions. Be sure to use bladesthat are suitable for your vehicle.

CAUTION

During high-speed driving, non-freezing type wiper blades may notperform as well as standard wiperblades. If this happens, reduce thevehicle speed.

NOTEWhen the season requiring non-freez-ing type wiper blades is over, replacethem with standard wiper blades.

& Corrosion protectionRefer to the “Corrosion protection” sectionin chapter 10.

& Snow tires

WARNING

. When replacing original tires withwinter (snow) tires, make sureyou use only the same size,construction and load range asthe original tires listed on the tireplacard. Using other sizes andconstruction may affect speed-ometer/odometer calibration andclearance between the body andtires. It also may be dangerousand lead to loss of vehicle con-trol.

. You must install four winter tiresthat are of the same size, con-struction, brand, and load range.Mixing other sizes or construc-tions may result in severe me-chanical damage to the drivetrain of your vehicle and mayaffect ride, handling, braking andspeedometer/odometer calibra-tion. It also may be dangerousand lead to loss of vehicle con-trol.

. Do not use a combination ofradial, belted bias or bias tiressince it may cause dangeroushandling characteristics and lead

Black plate (265,1)


to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “all seasontires” as original equipment, which aredesigned to provide an adequate measureof traction, handling and braking perfor-mance in year-round driving. In winter, itmay be possible to enhance performancethrough use of tires designed specificallyfor winter driving conditions.When you choose to install winter tires onyour vehicle, be sure to use the correct tiresize and type. You must install four wintertires that are of the same size, construc-tion, brand and load range and you shouldnever mix radial, belted bias or bias tiressince this may result in dangerous hand-ling characteristics. When you choose atire, make sure that there is enoughclearance between the tire and vehiclebody.

Remember to drive with care at all timesregardless of the type of tires on yourvehicle.

& Tire chains

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on tireslisted in the following because oflack of clearance between the tiresand vehicle body.

All models: P205/55R16 and P205/50R17 tires.

& Rocking the vehicleIf you must rock the vehicle to free it fromsnow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-erator pedal slightly and move the selectorlever back and forth between “D” and “R”repeatedly. Do not race the engine. Forthe best possible traction, avoid spinningthe wheels when trying to free the vehicle.When the road surface is extremelyslippery, you can obtain better traction bystarting the vehicle with the transmissionin 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).

Refer to the “Selection of manual mode”section in chapter 7 for information onholding the transmission in 2nd position.

Loading your vehicle

WARNING

. Never allow passengers to rideon a folded rear seatback, in thetrunk or in the cargo area. Doingso may result in serious injury.

. Never stack luggage or othercargo higher than the top of theseatback because it could tumbleforward and injure passengers inthe event of a sudden stop oraccident. Keep luggage or cargolow, as close to the floor aspossible.

Driving tips 8-11

– CONTINUED –

8

Black plate (266,1)


8-12 Driving tips

WARNING

. When you carry something insidethe vehicle, secure it wheneveryou can to prevent it from beingthrown around inside the vehicleduring sudden stops, sharp turnsor in an accident.

. Do not pile heavy loads on theroof. These loads raise the vehi-cle’s center of gravity and make itmore prone to tip over.

. Secure lengthy items properly toprevent them from shooting for-ward and causing serious injuryduring a sudden stop.

. Never exceed the maximum loadlimit. If you do, some parts onyour vehicle can break, or it canchange the way your vehiclehandles. This could result in lossof control and cause personalinjury. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.

. Do not place anything on the rearshelf behind the rear seatback(for 4-door) or the extended car-go area cover (for 5-door). Suchitems could tumble forward in theevent of a sudden stop or acollision. This could cause ser-

ious injury.

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containerswith flammable or corrosive liquidsor any other dangerous items insidethe vehicle.

NOTEFor better fuel economy, do not carryunneeded cargo.

& Vehicle capacity weight

The load capacity of your vehicle isdetermined by weight, not by availablecargo space. The maximum load you cancarry in your vehicle is shown on thevehicle placard attached to the driver’sside door pillar. It includes the total weightof the driver and all passengers and theirbelongings, any optional equipment suchas a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,etc.

Black plate (267,1)


& GVWR and GAWR (GrossVehicle Weight Rating andGross Axle Weight Rating)

The certification label attached to thedriver’s side doorjamb shows GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR(Gross Axle Weight Rating).The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) mustnever exceed the GVWR. GVW is thecombined total of weight of the vehicle,fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage andany optional equipment. Therefore, theGVW changes depending on the situation.The GVWR equals Curb Weight (actualweight of your vehicle – including standardequipment, fluids, emergency tools andspare tire assembly) plus the vehiclecapacity weight.

In addition, the total weight applied toeach axle (GAW) must never exceed theGAWR. The front and rear GAWs can beadjusted by relocating luggage inside thevehicle.Even if the total weight of your luggage islower than the vehicle capacity weight,either front or rear GAW may exceed theGAWR, depending on the distribution ofthe luggage.When possible, the load should be evenlydistributed throughout the vehicle.If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, youshould confirm that GVW and front andrear GAWs are within the GVWR andGAWR by putting your vehicle on avehicle scale, found at a commercialweighing station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lowerload range than the originals because theymay lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-tions. Replacement tires with a higher loadrange than the originals do not increasethe GVWR and GAWR limitations.

& Roof molding and crossbar(if equipped)

CAUTION

. For cargo carrying purposes, theroof molding must be used to-gether with a roof crossbar kitand the appropriate carrying at-tachment. Otherwise, damage tothe roof or paint or a dangerousroad hazard due to loss of cargocould result.

. When using the roof crossbar kit,make sure that the total weight ofthe crossbars, carrying attach-ment and cargo does not exceedthe maximum load limit. Over-loading may cause damage to

Driving tips 8-13

– CONTINUED –

8

Black plate (268,1)


8-14 Driving tips

the vehicle and create a safetyhazard.

Cargo can be carried after securing theroof crossbar kit to the roof molding andinstalling the appropriate carrying attach-ment. When installing the roof crossbarkit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

When you carry cargo on the roof usingthe roof crossbar kit and a carryingattachment, never exceed the maximumload limit as explained below. You shouldalso be careful that your vehicle does notexceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) and front and rear Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). Refer to the“Loading your vehicle” section in thischapter for information on loading cargointo or onto your vehicle. The maximumload limit of the cargo, crossbars andcarrying attachment must not exceed 176lbs (80 kg). Place the heaviest load at thebottom, nearest the roof, and evenlydistribute the cargo. Always properlysecure all cargo.

! Installing carrying attachments onthe crossbars

When installing any carrying attachmentsuch as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayakcarrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions and make sure that the attachment issecurely fixed to the crossbars. Use onlyattachments designed specifically for thecrossbars. A set of the crossbars isdesigned to carry loads (cargo and attach-ment) of not more than 165 lbs (75 kg).Before operating the vehicle, make surethat the cargo is properly secured on theattachment.

NOTERemember that the vehicle’s center ofgravity is altered with the weight of theload on the roof, thus affecting thedriving characteristics.Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hardcornering and abrupt stops. Crosswindeffects will be increased.

! Removal and installation of thecrossbars

Each of the two roof moldings has twomounting points for crossbars. Eachmounting point is fitted with a cover. Usea screwdriver to remove the covers. Wheninstalling the crossbars on the roof mold-ing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

Black plate (269,1)


Trailer towing

Your vehicle is neither designed norintended to be used for trailer towing.Therefore, never tow a trailer with yourvehicle.SUBARU assumes no responsibility forinjuries or vehicle damage that may resultfrom trailer towing, from any trailer towingequipment or from any errors or omissionsin the instructions accompanying suchequipment. SUBARU warranties do notapply to vehicle damage or malfunctioncaused by trailer towing.

Driving tips 8-15

8

Black plate (2,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

Black plate (17,1)


If you park your vehicle in case of anemergency ........................................................ 9-2

Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2Precautions for AWD vehicles with automatictransmission ..................................................... 9-3

Flat tires............................................................... 9-4Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-4Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models) ................................................... 9-9

Jump starting ..................................................... 9-10How to jump start............................................... 9-11

Engine overheating ........................................... 9-13If steam is coming from the enginecompartment ................................................... 9-13

If no steam is coming from the enginecompartment ................................................... 9-13

Towing ................................................................ 9-13Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-14Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-16Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-16

Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot beunlocked.......................................................... 9-17

Maintenance tools ............................................. 9-18Jack handle ....................................................... 9-18Jack and other maintenance tools...................... 9-19

In case of emergency

9

Black plate (272,1)


9-2 In case of emergency

If you park your vehicle incase of an emergency

The hazard warning flasher should beused in day or night to warn other driverswhen you have to park your vehicle underemergency conditions.Avoid stopping on the road. It is best tosafely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti-vated regardless of the ignition switchposition.Turn on the hazard warning by pushingthe hazard warning flasher switch. Turn itoff by pushing the switch again.

NOTEWhen the hazard warning flasher is on,the turn signals do not work.

Temporary spare tire

WARNING

When a spare tire is mounted or awheel rim is replaced without theoriginal pressure sensor/transmitterbeing transferred, the low tire pres-sure warning light will illuminatesteadily after blinking for approxi-mately one minute. This indicatesthe tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) is unable to monitor all fourroad wheels. Contact your SUBARUdealer as soon as possible for tireand sensor replacement and/or sys-tem resetting.

CAUTION

Never use any temporary spare tireother than the original. Using othersizes may result in severe mechan-ical damage to the drive train of yourvehicle.

The temporary spare tire is smaller andlighter than a conventional tire and isdesigned for emergency use only. Re-move the temporary spare tire and re-install the conventional tire as soon as

Black plate (273,1)


possible because the spare tire is de-signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem-porary spare tire periodically to keep thetire ready for use. The correct pressure is60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kg/cm2).

When using the temporary spare tire, notethe following.. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).. Do not put a tire chain on the temporaryspare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,a tire chain will not fit properly.. Do not use two or more temporaryspare tires at the same time.. Do not drive over obstacles. This tirehas a smaller diameter, so road clearanceis reduced.

1) Tread wear indicator bar2) Indicator location mark

. When the wear indicator appears onthe tread, replace the tire.. The temporary spare tire must be usedonly on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tiregets punctured, replace the wheel with arear wheel and install the temporary sparetire in place of the removed rear wheel.

& Precautions for AWD vehi-cles with automatic trans-mission

Your vehicle is equipped with the AWD(All-Wheel Drive) system. In addition, ifyour vehicle is an AT model, before drivingyour vehicle with the temporary spare tire,deactivate the AWD capability of the

vehicle as follows:1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”position.

2. Pull any one spare fuse out of thespare fuse holder in the engine compart-ment. Spare fuses are attached on theback side of the fuse holder cover. Youmay pick up any one fuse in the sparefuse holder.

In case of emergency 9-3

– CONTINUED –

9

Black plate (274,1)



1) Spare fuse2) FWD connector

3. Put a spare fuse inside the FWDconnector located in the cabin and confirmthat the “ ” warning light illuminates.The All-Wheel-Drive capability of thevehicle has now been deactivated.

NOTEAfter reinstalling the conventional tire,remove the spare fuse from the FWDconnector in order to reactivate All-Wheel Drive. Make sure to restore theremoved spare fuse in the spare fuseholder located in the engine compart-ment.

Flat tires

If you have a flat tire while driving, neverbrake suddenly; keep driving straightahead while gradually reducing speed.Then slowly pull off the road to a safeplace.

& Changing a flat tire

WARNING

. Do not jack up the vehicle on anincline or a loose road surface.The jack can come out of thejacking point or sink into theground and this can result in asevere accident.

. Use only the jack provided withyour vehicle. The jack suppliedwith the vehicle is designed onlyfor changing a tire. Never getunder the vehicle while support-ing the vehicle with this jack.

. Always turn off the engine beforeraising the flat tire off the groundusing the jack. Never swing orpush the vehicle supported withthe jack. The jack can come outof the jacking point due to a joltand this can result in a severeaccident.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-ever possible, then stop the engine.2. Set the parking brake securely andshift a manual transmission vehicle inreverse or an automatic transmissionvehicle in the “P” (Park) position.3. Turn on the hazard warning flasherand have everyone get out of the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rearof the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

Black plate (275,1)


4-door1) Jack and tool bucket2) Jack handle3) Spare tire

5-door1) Jack and tool bucket2) Jack handle3) Spare tire

5. Take out the spare tire, jack, jackhandle and wheel nut wrench.The spare tire and the tools are storedunder the floor of the trunk or cargo area.Take them out according to the followingprocedure.

To take out the jack handle:

1) 4-door2) 5-door

Open the floor cover of the trunk (4-door)or the cargo area (5-door), and take outthe jack handle.


– CONTINUED –

9

Black plate (276,1)



To take out the jack and wheel nutwrench:

1) 4-door2) 5-door

Take out the storage tray (4-door), andtake out the tool bucket that is stored in

the recess of the spare tire wheel.

1) Jack2) Towing hook

1) Screwdriver2) Wheel nut wrench3) Tool bag

Take out the jack from the tool bucket, andtake out the wheel nut wrench from toolbag.

NOTEMake sure that the jack is well lubri-cated before using it.

To take out the spare tire:

Turn the attaching bolt counterclockwise,then take the spare tire out.

NOTEIf the spare tire provided in your vehicleis a temporary spare tire, carefully readthe “Temporary spare tire” section inthis chapter and strictly follow theinstructions.

Black plate (277,1)


6. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheelnut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

Jack-up points (vehicle with side sill skirt)

Jack-up points (others)

7. Place the jack under the side sill at thefront or rear jack-up point closest to the flattire.Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jackhead engages firmly into the jack-up point.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack-screw, and turn the handle until the tireclears the ground. Do not raise the vehiclehigher than necessary.9. Remove the wheel nuts and the flattire.


– CONTINUED –

9

Black plate (278,1)



10. Before putting the spare tire on, cleanthe mounting surface of the wheel and hubwith a cloth.11. Put on the spare tire. Replace thewheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on thewheel studs or nuts when the sparetire is installed. This could cause thenuts to become loose and lead to anaccident.

12. Turn the jack handle counterclockwiseto lower the vehicle.

13. Use the wheel nut wrench to securelytighten the wheel nuts to the specifiedtorque, following the tightening order in theillustration.The torque for tightening the nuts is 58 to72 lbf·ft (80 to 100 N·m, 8 to 10 kgf·m).This torque is equivalent to applyingapproximately 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg)at the top of the wheel nut wrench. Neveruse your foot on the wheel nut wrench or apipe extension on the wrench becauseyou may exceed the specified torque.Have the wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive service facility.

4-door models

5-door models

14. Store the flat tire in the spare tirecompartment. Put in the spacer and tight-en the attaching bolt firmly.Also store the jack, jack handle and wheel

Black plate (279,1)


nut wrench in their storage locations.

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changingtools in the passenger compartmentafter changing wheels. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipmentcould strike occupants and causeinjury. Store the tire and all tools inthe proper place.

& Tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.models)

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-vides the driver with the warning messageindicated by sending a signal from asensor that is installed in each wheelwhen tire pressure is severely low.The tire pressure monitoring system willactivate only when the vehicle is driven.Also, this system may not react immedi-ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample, a blow-out caused running overa sharp object).

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on while driving, never brakesuddenly and keep driving straightahead while gradually reducing

speed. Then slowly pull off the roadto a safe place. Otherwise an acci-dent involving serious vehicle da-mage and serious personal injurycould occur.

Check the pressure for all four tiresand adjust the pressure to the COLDtire pressure shown on the vehicleplacard on the door pillar on thedriver’s side. If this light still comeson while driving after adjusting thetire pressure, a tire may have sig-nificant damage and a fast leak thatcauses the tire to lose air rapidly. Ifyou have a flat tire, replace it with aspare tire as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or awheel rim is replaced without theoriginal pressure sensor/transmitterbeing transferred, the low tire pres-sure warning light will illuminatesteadily after blinking for approxi-mately one minute. This indicatesthe TPMS is unable to monitor allfour road wheels. Contact yourSUBARU dealer as soon as possiblefor tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.

Do not inject any tire liquid oraerosol tire sealant into the tires,as this may cause a malfunction ofthe tire pressure sensors.


– CONTINUED –

9

Black plate (280,1)



If the light illuminates steadily afterblinking for approximately one min-ute, promptly contact a SUBARUdealer to have the system inspected.

Jump starting

WARNING

. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.Do not let it come in contact withthe eyes, skin, clothing or thevehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you,thoroughly flush the exposedarea with water immediately. Getmedical help if the fluid hasentered your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentallyswallowed, immediately drink alarge amount of milk or water,and obtain immediate medicalhelp.

Keep everyone including chil-dren away from the battery.

. The gas generated by a batteryexplodes if a flame or spark isbrought near it. Do not smoke orlight a match while jump starting.

. Never attempt jump starting if thedischarged battery is frozen. Itcould cause the battery to burstor explode.

. Whenever working on or arounda battery, always wear suitable

eye protectors, and remove metalobjects such as rings, bands orother metal jewelry.

. Be sure the jumper cables andclamps on them do not haveloose or missing insulation.

Do not jump start unless cablesin suitable condition are avail-able.

. A running engine can be danger-ous. Keep your fingers, hands,clothing, hair and tools awayfrom the cooling fan, belts andany other moving engine parts.Removing rings, watches andties is advisable.

. Jump starting is dangerous if itdone incorrectly. If you are un-sure about the proper procedurefor jump starting, consult a com-petent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to arun down (discharged) battery, the vehiclemay be jump started by connecting yourbattery to another battery (called thebooster battery) with jumper cables.

Black plate (281,1)


& How to jump start1. Make sure the booster battery is 12volts and the negative terminal isgrounded.2. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.3. Turn off all unnecessary lights andaccessories.4. Connect the jumper cables exactly inthe sequence illustrated.


– CONTINUED –

9

Black plate (282,1)



(1) Connect one jumper cable to thepositive (+) terminal on the dischargedbattery.(2) Connect the other end of thejumper cable to the positive (+) term-inal of the booster battery.(3) Connect one end of the othercable to the negative (−) terminal ofthe booster battery.(4) Connect the other end of the cableto the strut mounting nut of the vehiclewith the discharged battery.

Make sure that the cables are not nearany moving parts and that the cableclamps are not in contact with any othermetal.5. Start the engine of the vehicle with thebooster battery and run it at moderatespeed. Then start the engine of the vehiclethat has the discharged battery.6. When finished, carefully disconnectthe cables in exactly the reverse order.

Black plate (283,1)


Engine overheating

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-tor cap until the engine has beenshut off and has fully cooled down.When the engine is hot, the coolantis under pressure. Removing thecap while the engine is still hotcould release a spray of boiling hotcoolant, which could burn you veryseriously.

If the engine overheats, safely pull off theroad and stop the vehicle in a safe place.

& If steam is coming from theengine compartment

Turn off the engine and get everyoneaway from the vehicle until it cools down.

& If no steam is coming fromthe engine compartment

1. Keep the engine running at idlingspeed.2. Open the hood to ventilate the enginecompartment.Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. Ifthe fan is not turning, immediately turn off

the engine and contact your authorizeddealer for repair.3. After the engine coolant temperaturehas dropped, turn off the engine.If the temperature gauge stays at theoverheated zone (turbo model) or thecoolant temperature warning light illumi-nates, turn off the engine.4. After the engine has fully cooled down,check the coolant level in the reservetank.If the coolant level is below the “LOW”mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.5. If there is no coolant in the reservetank, add coolant to the reserve tank.Then remove the radiator cap and fill theradiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hotradiator, first wrap a thick cloth around theradiator cap, then turn the cap counter-clockwise slowly without pressing downuntil it stops. Release the pressure fromthe radiator. After the pressure has beenfully released, remove the cap by pressingdown and turning it.

Towing

If towing is necessary, it is best done byyour SUBARU dealer or a commercialtowing service. Observe the followingprocedures for safety.

WARNING

Never tow AWD vehicles (both ATand MT) with the front wheels raisedoff the ground while the rear wheelsare on the ground, or with the rearwheels raised off the ground whilethe front wheels are on the ground.This will cause the vehicle to spinaway due to the operation or dete-rioration of the center differential.


– CONTINUED –

9

Black plate (284,1)



& Towing and tie-down hooksThe towing hooks should be used only inan emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehiclefrom mud, sand or snow).

CAUTION

. Use only the specified towinghook and tie-down hook. Neveruse suspension parts or otherparts of the body for towing ortie-down purposes.

. To prevent deformation to thefront bumper and the towinghook, do not apply excessivelateral load to the towing hook.

Front towing hook:1. Take the towing hook out of the toolbucket and take the screwdriver out of thetool bag. Take the jack handle out of thetrunk (4-door) or cargo area (5-door).

2. Pry off the cover on the front bumperusing a screwdriver, and you will find athreaded hole for attaching the towinghook.

3. Screw the towing hook into the threadhole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securelyusing the jack handle.

After towing, remove the towing hook fromthe vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hookexcept when towing your vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towinghook after towing. Leaving thetowing hook mounted on thevehicle could interfere with prop-er operation of the SRS airbagsystem in a frontal collision.

Black plate (285,1)


Rear towing hook:1. Take the towing hook out of the toolbucket and take the screwdriver out of thetool bag. Take the jack handle out of thetrunk (4-door) or cargo area (5-door).

2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumperusing a screwdriver, and you will find athreaded hole for attaching the towinghook.

3. Screw the towing hook into the threadhole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securelyusing the jack handle.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

Do not use the towing hook exceptwhen towing your vehicle.

Front tie-down hooks:

The front tie-down hooks are locatedbetween each of the front tires and thefront bumper.


– CONTINUED –

9

Black plate (286,1)



Rear tie-down hooks:

The rear tie-down hooks are located neareach of the jack-up reinforcements.

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down hooks only fordownward anchoring. If they areused to anchor the vehicle in anyother direction, cables may slip offthe hooks, possibly causing a dan-gerous situation.

& Using a flat-bed truck

This is the best way to transport yourvehicle. Use the following procedures toensure safe transportation.1. Shift the selector lever into the “P”position for automatic transmission vehi-cles or “1st” for manual transmissionvehicles.2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrierproperly with safety chains. Each safetychain should be equally tightened andcare must be taken not to pull the chainsso tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

CAUTION

If your vehicle has a front under-spoiler and rear underspoiler (bothoptional), be careful not to scrapethem when placing the vehicle onthe carrier and when removing thevehicle from the carrier.

& Towing with all wheels on theground

1. Check the transmission and differen-tial oil levels and add oil to bring it to theupper level if necessary.2. Release the parking brake and put thetransmission in neutral.3. The ignition switch should be in the“Acc” position while the vehicle is being

Black plate (287,1)


towed.4. Take up slack in the towline slowly toprevent damage to the vehicle.

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch tothe “LOCK” position while thevehicle is being towed becausethe steering wheel and the direc-tion of the wheels will be locked.

. Remember that the brake boosterand power steering do not func-tion when the engine is notrunning. Because the engine isturned off, it will take greatereffort to operate the brake pedaland steering wheel.

CAUTION

. If transmission failure occurs,transport your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.

. Do not run the engine while beingtowed using this method. Trans-mission damage could result ifthe vehicle is towed with theengine running.

. For vehicles with automatictransmission, the traveling speed

must be limited to less than 20mph (30 km/h) and the travelingdistance to less than 31 miles (50km). For greater speeds anddistances, transport your vehicleon a flat-bed truck.

Rear gate – if the rear gatecannot be unlocked

In the event that you cannot unlock therear gate by operating the power doorlocking switches or the remote keylessentry system, you can unlock it from insidethe cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at thebottom-center of the rear gate trim.2. Locate the rear gate lock release leverbehind the rear gate trim panel.

CAUTION

Never operate the rear gate lockrelease lever with fingers becausedoing so may cause an injury. Al-ways use a screwdriver or a similar


– CONTINUED –

9

Black plate (288,1)



tool.

3. To unlock the rear gate, turn the leverto the right position using a screwdriver.4. Open the rear gate from outside byraising the rear gate handle.

Maintenance tools

Your vehicle is equipped with the followingmaintenance tools:

JackJack handleScrewdriverTowing hook (eye bolt)Wheel nut wrench

& Jack handle

1) 4-door2) 5-door

The jack handle is stored under the floorcover of the trunk (4-door) or the cargoarea (5-door).

Black plate (289,1)


& Jack and other maintenancetools

1) 4-door2) 5-door

1) Jack2) Towing hook

1) Screwdriver2) Wheel nut wrench3) Tool bag

The jack and towing hook are stored in the

tool bucket that is located in the recess ofthe spare tire wheel under the floor of thetrunk (4-door) or the cargo area (5-door).The screwdriver and wheel nut wrench arestored in the tool bag.

For how to use the jack, refer to the “Flattires” section in this chapter.


9

Black plate (2,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

Black plate (19,1)


Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2Washing............................................................. 10-2Waxing and polishing ......................................... 10-3Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3

Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4

Cleaning the interior.......................................... 10-5Seat fabric......................................................... 10-5Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5Climate control panel, audio panel, instrumentpanel, console panel, and switches .................. 10-5

Appearance care

10

Black plate (292,1)


10-2 Appearance care

Exterior care

& Washing

CAUTION

. When washing the vehicle, thebrakes may get wet. As a result,the brake stopping distance willbe longer. To dry the brakes,drive the vehicle at a safe speedwhile lightly pressing the brakepedal to heat up the brakes.

. Do not wash the engine compart-ment and area adjacent to it. Ifwater enters the engine air in-take, electrical parts or the powersteering fluid reservoir, it willcause engine trouble or faultypower steering respectively.

. Since your vehicle is equippedwith a rear wiper, automatic car-wash brushes could becometangled around it, damaging thewiper arm and other compo-nents. Ask the automatic car-wash operator not to let thebrushes touch the wiper arm orto fix the wiper arm on the rearwindow glass with adhesive tapebefore operating the machine (5-door models only).

NOTEWhen having your vehicle washed inan automatic car wash, make surebeforehand that the car wash is ofsuitable type.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’sbeauty is frequent washing. Wash thevehicle at least once a month to avoidcontamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plentyof lukewarm or cold water. Do not washthe vehicle with hot water and in directsunlight.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, treesap, and bird droppings should be washedoff by using a light detergent, as required.If you use a light detergent, make certain

that it is a neutral detergent. Do not usestrong soap or chemical detergents. Allcleaning agents should be promptlyflushed from the surface and not allowedto dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughlywith plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe theremaining water off with a chamois or softcloth.

! Washing the underbody

Chemicals, salts and gravel used fordeicing road surfaces are extremely cor-rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-derbody components, such as the exhaustsystem, fuel and brake lines, brakecables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-pension.Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-side of the fenders with lukewarm or coldwater at frequent intervals to reduce theharmful effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbodycomponents may accelerate their corro-sion.After driving off-road or on muddy orsandy roads, wash the mud and sand offthe underbody. Carefully flush the suspen-sion and axle parts, as they are particu-larly prone to mud and sand buildup. Donot use a sharp-edged tool to removecaked mud.

Black plate (293,1)


NOTEBe careful not to damage brake hoses,sensor harnesses, and other partswhen washing suspension compo-nents.

! Using a warm water washer

. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)or more between the washer nozzle andthe vehicle.. Do not wash the same area continu-ously.. If a stain will not come out easily, washby hand. Some warm water washers areof the high temperature, high pressuretype, and they can damage or deform theresin parts such as moldings, or causewater to leak into the vehicle.

& Waxing and polishingAlways wash and dry the vehicle beforewaxing and polishing.Use a good quality polish and wax andapply them according to the manufac-turer’s instructions. Wax or polish whenthe painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,as well as the painted surfaces. Loss ofwax on a painted surface leads to loss ofthe original luster and also quickens thedeterioration of the surface. It is recom-

mended that a coat of wax be applied atleast once a month, or whenever thesurface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has dimin-ished to the point where the luster or tonecannot be restored, lightly polish thesurface with a fine-grained compound.Never polish just the affected area, butinclude the surrounding area as well.Always polish in only one direction. ANo. 2000 grain compound is recom-mended. Never use a coarse-grainedcompound. Coarse-grained compoundshave a smaller grain-size number andcould damage the paint. After polishingwith a compound, coat with wax to restorethe original luster. Frequent polishing witha compound or an incorrect polishingtechnique will result in removing the paintlayer and exposing the undercoat. Whenin doubt, it is always best to contact yourSUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-list.

NOTEBe careful not to block the windshieldwasher nozzles with wax when waxingthe vehicle.

& Cleaning aluminum wheels. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheelsclean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirtis left on too long, it may be difficult toclean off.. Do not use soap containing grit toclean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutralcleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughlywith water. Do not clean the wheels with astiff brush or expose them to a high-speedwashing device.. Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-num wheels) with water as soon aspossible when it has been splashed withsea water, exposed to sea breezes, ordriven on roads treated with salt or otheragents.

Appearance care 10-3

10

Black plate (294,1)


10-4 Appearance care

Corrosion protection

Your SUBARU has been designed andbuilt to resist corrosion. Special materialsand protective finishes have been used onmost parts of the vehicle to help maintainfine appearance, strength, and reliableoperation.

& Most common causes ofcorrosion

The most common causes of corrosionare:1. The accumulation of moisture retain-ing dirt and debris in body panel sections,cavities, and other areas.2. Damage to paint and other protectivecoatings caused by gravel and stonechips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehiclewhen:1. It is exposed to road salt or dustcontrol chemicals, or used in coastalareas where there is more salt in the air,or in areas where there is considerableindustrial pollution.2. It is driven in areas of high humidity,especially when temperatures range justabove freezing.3. Dampness in certain parts of thevehicle remains for a long time, even

though other parts of the vehicle may bedry.4. High temperatures will cause corro-sion to parts of the vehicle which cannotdry quickly due to lack of proper ventila-tion.

& To help prevent corrosionWash the vehicle regularly to preventcorrosion of the body and suspensioncomponents. Also, wash the vehiclepromptly after driving on any of thefollowing surfaces:. roads that have been salted to preventthem from freezing in winter. mud, sand, or gravel. coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-mended that the underbody be given avery thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check thecondition of underbody components, suchas the exhaust system, fuel and brakelines, brake cables, suspension, steeringsystem, floor pan, and fenders. If any ofthem are found to be rusted, they shouldbe given an appropriate rust preventiontreatment or should be replaced. Contactyour SUBARU dealer to perform this kindof maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint assoon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for waterand dirt accumulation under the floor matsbecause that could cause corrosion.Occasionally check under the mats tomake sure the area is dry.Keep your garage dry. Do not park yourvehicle in a damp, poorly ventilatedgarage. In such a garage, corrosion canbe caused by dampness. If you wash thevehicle in the garage or put the vehicleinto the garage when wet or covered withsnow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weatherand/or in areas where road salts and othercorrosive materials are used, the doorhinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hoodlatch should be inspected and lubricatedperiodically.

Black plate (295,1)


Cleaning the interior

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climatecontrol panel, audio equipment, instru-ment panel, center console, combinationmeter panel, and switches. (Do not useorganic solvents.)

& Seat fabricRemove loose dirt, dust or debris with avacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on thefabric or hard to remove with a vacuumcleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.Wipe the fabric surface with a tightlywrung cloth and dry the seat fabricthoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipeusing a solution of mild soap and luke-warm water then dry thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try acommercially-available fabric cleaner. Usethe cleaner on a hidden place and makesure it does not affect the fabric adversely.Use the cleaner according to its instruc-tions.

NOTEWhen cleaning the seat, do not usebenzine, paint thinner, or any similarmaterials.

& Leather seat materialsThe leather used by SUBARU is a highquality natural product which will retain itsdistinctive appearance and feel for manyyears with proper care.Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on thesurface can cause the material to becomebrittle and to wear prematurely. Regularcleaning with a soft, moist, natural fibercloth should be performed monthly, takingcare not to soak the leather or allow waterto penetrate the stitched seams.A mild detergent suitable for cleaningwoolen fabrics may be used to removedifficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, drycloth afterwards to restore the luster. Ifyour SUBARU is to be parked for a longtime in bright sunlight, it is recommendedthat the seats and headrests be covered,or the windows shaded, to prevent fadingor shrinkage.Minor surface blemishes or bald patchesmay be treated with a commercial leatherspray lacquer. You will discover that eachleather seat section will develop soft foldsor wrinkles, which is characteristic ofgenuine leather.

& Synthetic leather upholsteryThe synthetic leather material used on theSUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap

or detergent and water, after first vacuum-ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow thesoap to soak in for a few minutes and wipeoff with a clean, damp cloth. Commercialfoam-type cleaners suitable for syntheticleather materials may be used whennecessary.

NOTEStrong cleaning agents such as sol-vents, paint thinners, window cleaneror gasoline must never be used onleather or synthetic interior materials.

& Climate control panel, audiopanel, instrument panel,console panel, and switches

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climatecontrol panel, audio equipment, instru-ment panel, center console, combinationmeter panel, and switches.

NOTEDo not use organic solvents such aspaint thinners or gasoline, or strongcleaning agents that contain thosesolvents.

Appearance care 10-5

10

Black plate (2,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

Black plate (21,1)


Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3

Before checking or servicing in the enginecompartment.................................................... 11-4

When you do checking or servicing in the enginecompartment while the engine is running.......... 11-4

Engine hood ....................................................... 11-5Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-6

Non-turbo models .............................................. 11-6Turbo models..................................................... 11-7

Engine oil............................................................ 11-8Checking the oil level ......................................... 11-8Changing the oil and oil filter.............................. 11-9Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-11Recommended grade and viscosity under severedriving conditions .......................................... 11-12

Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-12Cooling system ................................................ 11-12

Cooling fan, hose and connections................... 11-12Engine coolant ................................................. 11-13

Air cleaner element .......................................... 11-15Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-16

Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-18Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-18

Drive belts ........................................................ 11-18Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-19

Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-19Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-20

Automatic transmission fluid .......................... 11-20Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-20

Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-21Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles).......... 11-21

Checking the oil level ...................................... 11-21Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-22

Rear differential gear oil.................................. 11-22Checking the gear oil level............................... 11-22Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-23

Power steering fluid ........................................ 11-24Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-24Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-25

Brake fluid........................................................ 11-25Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-25Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-26

Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) ............................... 11-26Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-26Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-27

Brake booster .................................................. 11-27Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-28

Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-28Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-28

Clutch pedal (MT vehicles).............................. 11-28Checking the clutch function............................ 11-28Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-29

Hill start assist system (MT vehicles – ifequipped) ...................................................... 11-29

Replacement of brake pad and lining ............ 11-29Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ....... 11-30

Parking brake stroke ....................................... 11-30Tires and wheels.............................................. 11-31

Types of tires................................................... 11-31

Maintenance and service

11

Black plate (22,1)


Maintenance and service

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (ifequipped)....................................................... 11-31

Tire inspection ................................................. 11-32Tire pressures and wear ................................... 11-33Wheel balance.................................................. 11-35Wear indicators ................................................ 11-35Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-35Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-36Tire replacement .............................................. 11-36Wheel replacement........................................... 11-37

Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-37Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-38Replacement of wiper blades.......................... 11-39

Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-39Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-40Rear window wiper blade assembly .................. 11-41Rear window wiper blade rubber....................... 11-41

Battery .............................................................. 11-42Fuses................................................................ 11-43Main fuse.......................................................... 11-45Installation of accessories .............................. 11-45Replacing bulbs............................................... 11-46

Headlight......................................................... 11-47Front turn signal light and parking light............ 11-50Front fog light (if equipped).............................. 11-50Rear combination lights ................................... 11-50Back-up light (5-door) ...................................... 11-51License plate light ........................................... 11-52Dome light, map light and cargo area light ....... 11-52Trunk light ....................................................... 11-53High mount stop light ...................................... 11-53Other bulbs ..................................................... 11-53

Black plate (299,1)


Maintenance schedule

The scheduled maintenance items re-quired to be serviced at regular intervalsare shown in the “Warranty and Main-tenance Booklet”.

For details of your maintenance schedule,read the separate “Warranty and Main-tenance Booklet”.

Maintenance precautions

When maintenance and service are re-quired, it is recommended that all work bedone by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and serviceby yourself, you should familiarize yourselfwith the information provided in thissection on general maintenance andservice for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service couldcause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-tion. Any problems caused by impropermaintenance and service performed byyou are not eligible for warranty coverage.

WARNING

. Testing of an All-Wheel Drivevehicle must NEVER be per-formed on a single two-wheeldynamometer or similar appara-tus. Attempting to do so willresult in transmission damageand in uncontrolled vehiclemovement and may cause anaccident or injuries to personsnearby.

. Always select a safe area whenperforming maintenance on yourvehicle.

. Always be very careful to avoidinjury when working on the vehi-cle. Remember that some of thematerials in the vehicle may behazardous if improperly used orhandled, for example, batteryacid.

. Your vehicle should only be ser-viced by persons fully competentto do so. Serious personal injurymay result to persons not experi-enced in servicing vehicles.

. Always use the proper tools andmake certain that they are wellmaintained.

. Never get under the vehicle sup-ported only by a jack. Always usesafety stands to support thevehicle.

. Never keep the engine running ina poorly ventilated area, such asa garage or other closed areas.

. Do not smoke or allow openflames around the fuel or battery.This will cause a fire.

. Because the fuel system is underpressure, replacement of the fuelfilter should be performed onlyby your SUBARU dealer.

. Wear adequate eye protection to

Maintenance and service 11-3

– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (300,1)


11-4 Maintenance and service

guard against getting oil or fluidsin your eyes. If something doesget in your eyes, thoroughlywash them out with clean water.

. Do not tamper with the wiring ofthe SRS airbag system or seat-belt pretensioner system, or at-tempt to take its connectorsapart, as that may activate thesystem or it can render it inop-erative. The wiring and connec-tors of these systems are yellowfor easy identification. NEVERuse a circuit tester for this wiring.If your SRS airbag or seatbeltpretensioner needs service, con-sult your nearest SUBARU deal-er.

& Before checking or servicingin the engine compartment

WARNING

. Always stop the engine and setthe parking brake firmly to pre-vent the vehicle from moving.

. Always let the engine cool down.Engine parts become very hotwhen the engine is running andremain hot for some time after

the engine is stopped.

. Do not spill engine oil, enginecoolant, brake fluid or any otherfluid on hot engine components.This may cause a fire.

. Always remove the key from theignition switch. When the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position,the cooling fan may operatesuddenly even when the engineis stopped.

. Before performing any servicingon a vehicle equipped with aremote engine start system (adealer option) temporarily placethat system in the service modeto prevent it from unexpectedlystarting the engine.

& When you do checking orservicing in the engine com-partment while the engine isrunning

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous.Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,hair and tools away from the coolingfan, belts and any other moving

engine parts. Removing rings,watches and ties is advisable.

Black plate (301,1)


Engine hood

To open the hood:1. If the wiper blades are lifted off thewindshield, return them to their originalposition.

2. Pull the hood release knob under theinstrument panel.

3. Release the secondary hood releaseby moving the lever between the frontgrille and the hood toward the left.4. Lift up the hood.

To close the hood:1. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closedposition and then let it drop.2. After closing the hood, be sure thehood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release itfrom a slightly higher position. Do not pushthe hood forcibly to close it. It coulddeform the metal.

WARNING

Always check that the hood isproperly locked before you startdriving. If it is not, it might fly openwhile the vehicle is moving andblock your view, which may causean accident and serious bodily in-jury.


11

Black plate (302,1)



Engine compartment overview

& Non-turbo models

1) Power steering fluid reservoir (page 11-24)

2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)(page 11-19) or Differential gear oil levelgauge (AT) (page 11-21)

3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-26)4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge

(page 11-20)5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-25)6) Fuse box (page 11-43)7) Battery (page 11-42)8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-38)9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-8)10) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-13)11) Radiator cap (page 11-13)12) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-8)13) Air cleaner element (page 11-15)

Black plate (303,1)


& Turbo models 1) Power steering fluid reservoir(page 11-24)

2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)(page 11-19) or Differential gear oil levelgauge (AT) (page 11-21)

3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-26)4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge

(page 11-20)5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-25)6) Fuse box (page 11-43)7) Battery (page 11-42)8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-38)9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-8)10) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-13)11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-8)12) Radiator cap (page 11-13)13) Air cleaner element (page 11-15)


11

Black plate (304,1)



Engine oil

NOTE. The engine oil consumption rate isnot stabilized, and therefore cannot bedetermined until the vehicle has tra-veled at least several thousand miles(kilometers). Even after break-in, whenthe vehicle is used under severe driv-ing conditions such as those men-tioned in the Warranty and Mainte-nance Booklet, engine oil is consumedor deteriorated more quickly than un-der normal driving conditions. If youdrive your vehicle under these severeconditions, you should check the oillevel at least at every second fuel fill-uptime, and change the oil more fre-quently. Please refer to the Warrantyand Maintenance Booklet for more de-tails.. If the oil consumption rate seemsabnormally high after the break-inperiod, for example more than 1 quartper 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000kilometers, contact your SUBARU deal-er.

& Checking the oil levelCheck the engine oil level at each fuelstop.1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andstop the engine.

2. Pull out the dipstick that has the “ ”symbol on top, wipe it clean, and insert itagain.3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly in-serted until it stops.

1) Notch2) Upper level3) Lower level

4. Pull out the dipstick again and checkthe oil level on it. If it is below the lowerlevel, add oil to bring the level up to theupper level.

CAUTION

. Use only engine oil with therecommended grade and vis-cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oilwhen adding it. If oil touches theexhaust pipe, it may cause a badsmell, smoke, and/or a fire. Ifengine oil gets on the exhaust

Black plate (305,1)


pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

If you check the oil level just after stoppingthe engine, wait a few minutes for the oil todrain back into the oil pan before checkingthe level.Just after driving or while the engine iswarm, the engine oil level reading may bein a range between the upper level andthe notch mark. This is caused by thermalexpansion of the engine oil.To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do notadd any additional oil above the upperlevel when the engine is cold.

& Changing the oil and oil filterChange the oil and oil filter according tothe maintenance schedule in the “War-ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.The engine oil and oil filter must bechanged more frequently than listed inthe maintenance schedule when drivingon dusty roads, when short trips arefrequently made, or when driving inextremely cold weather.1. Warm up the engine by letting theengine idle for approximately 10 minutesto ease draining the engine oil.2. Park the vehicle on a level surface andstop the engine.3. Remove the oil filler cap.

Turbo models

Non-turbo models

4. Drain out the engine oil by removingthe drain plug while the engine is stillwarm. The used oil should be drained intoan appropriate container and disposed of

properly.

WARNING

Be careful not to burn yourself withhot engine oil.

5. Wipe the seating surface of the drainplug with a clean cloth and tighten itsecurely with a new sealing washer afterthe oil has completely drained out.6. Remove the under cover.

Turbo models


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (306,1)



Non-turbo models

7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filterwrench.8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply athin coat of engine oil to the seal.9. Clean the rubber seal seating area ofthe bottom of engine and install the oilfilter by hand turning. Be careful not totwist or damage the seal.10. Tighten the oil filter by the amountindicated in the following table after theseal makes contact with the bottom ofengine.

Oil filter color Part number Amount ofrotation

Black 15208AA100 1 rotation

White 15208AA09A 2/3 – 3/4rotation

CAUTION

. Never over tighten the oil filterbecause that can result in an oilleak.

. Thoroughly wipe off any engineoil that has spilled over theexhaust pipe and/or under-cover.If spilled oil is not promptlywiped up, the oil could cause afire.

11. Reinstall under cover.12. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.

Oil capacity (guideline):

4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

The oil quantity indicated above is onlyguideline.The necessary quantity of oil depends onthe quantity of oil that has been drained.The quantity of drained oil differs slightlydepending on the temperature of the oil

and the time the oil is left flowing out. Afterrefilling the engine with oil, therefore, youmust use the dipstick to confirm that thelevel is correct.13. Start the engine and make sure that nooil leaks appear around the filter’s rubberseal and drain plug.14. Run the engine until it reaches thenormal operating temperature. Then stopthe engine and wait a few minutes to allowthe oil drain back. Check the oil levelagain and if necessary, add more engineoil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill engine oilwhen adding it. If oil touches theexhaust pipe, it may cause a badsmell, smoke, and/or a fire.

Black plate (307,1)


& Recommended grade andviscosity

Oil grade:

ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified withthe ILSAC certification mark (Starburstmark)or API classification SM with the words“ENERGY CONSERVING”

These recommended oil grades can beidentified by looking for either or both ofthe following marks displayed on the oilcontainer.

API Service label1) Indicates the oil quality by API designa-

tions2) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade3) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving

capabilities

ILSAC Certification Mark (Starburst Mark)

In choosing an oil, you want the properquality and viscosity, as well as one thatwill add to fuel economy. The followingtable lists the recommended viscositiesand applicable temperatures.When adding oil, different brands may beused together as long as they are thesame API classification and SAE viscosityas those recommended by SUBARU.

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera-ture*: 5W-30 is preferred.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fueleconomy. Oils of lower viscosity providebetter fuel economy. However, in hotweather, oil of higher viscosity is requiredto properly lubricate the engine.

CAUTION

Use only engine oil with the recom-mended grade and viscosity.


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (308,1)



& Recommended grade andviscosity under severe driv-ing conditions

If the vehicle is used in desert areas, inareas with very high temperatures, or isused for heavy-duty applications, use ofoil with the following grade and viscositiesis recommended.

API classification SM (or SL):

SAE viscosity No.: 30, 40, 10W-50,20W-40, 20W-50

& Synthetic oilYou can use synthetic engine oil thatmeets the same requirements given forconventional engine oil. When usingsynthetic oil, you must use oil of the sameclassification, viscosity and grade shownin this Owner’s Manual, and must followthe oil and filter changing intervals shownin the maintenance schedule.

Cooling system

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-tor cap until the engine has beenshut off and has cooled downcompletely. Since the coolant isunder pressure, you may sufferserious burns from a spray of boil-ing hot coolant when the cap isremoved.

CAUTION

. The cooling system has beenfilled at the factory with a highquality, corrosion-inhibiting,year-around coolant which pro-vides protection against freezingdown to −338F (−368C).Subaru engines use aluminumcomponents that require theanti-corrosive and anti-freezeproperties of Subaru GenuineCoolant, which is specificallyformulated for the Subaru cool-ing system. Failure to use SubaruGenuine Coolant along withSubaru Cooling System Condi-tioner at the recommended main-

tenance intervals may result inproblems, including, but not lim-ited to shortened life of enginecomponents and cooling systemclogging, coolant leaks and en-gine damage from overheating.

Problems caused by the failure touse Subaru Genuine Coolant andSubaru Cooling System Condi-tioner at recommended intervalsare not covered under theSubaru Limited Warranty.

While there may be other genericproducts that may provide therequired protection, they havenot been tested for compatibilitywith Subaru engines and coolingsystem components, and there-fore they are not recommended.

. Do not splash the engine coolantover painted parts. The alcoholcontained in the engine coolantmay damage the paint surface.

& Cooling fan, hose and con-nections

Your vehicle employs an electric coolingfan which is thermostatically controlled tooperate when the engine coolant reachesa specific temperature.

Black plate (309,1)


If the radiator cooling fan does not operateeven when the engine coolant tempera-ture gauge exceeds the normal operatingrange, the cooling fan circuit may bedefective. Check the fuse and replace itif necessary. If the fuse is not blown, havethe cooling system checked by yourSUBARU dealer.

If frequent addition of coolant is neces-sary, there may be a leak in the enginecooling system. It is recommended thatthe cooling system and connections bechecked for leaks, damage, or looseness.

& Engine coolant

! Checking the coolant level

1) “FULL” level mark2) “LOW” level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.1. Check the coolant level on the outsideof the reservoir while the engine is cool.2. If the level is close to or lower than the“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank isempty, remove the radiator cap and refillas required.

3. After refilling the reserve tank and theradiator, reinstall the caps and check thatthe rubber gaskets inside the radiator capare in the proper position.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill enginecoolant when adding it. If coolanttouches the exhaust pipe, it maycause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets onthe exhaust pipe, be sure to wipeit off.


! Changing the coolant

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-tor cap until the engine has beenshut off and has cooled downcompletely. Since the coolant isunder pressure, you may sufferserious burns from a spray of boil-ing hot coolant when the cap isremoved.

Always add genuine Subaru cooling sys-tem conditioner whenever the coolant isreplaced.Change the engine coolant and addgenuine Subaru cooling system condi-tioner using the following proceduresaccording to the maintenance schedule.1. Remove the under cover.


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (310,1)



2. Place a proper container under thedrain plug and loosen the drain plug.3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain thecoolant from the radiator. Then drain thecoolant from the reserve tank. Tighten thedrain plug securely.

NOTE (Turbo model only)The cap (without tabs) on top of theradiator does not need to be removed.To add coolant, remove the cap (withtabs) on the coolant tank on top of theengine.

4. Install the under cover.

Non-turbo models1) Fill up to this level

Turbo models1) Fill up to this level

5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up tojust below the filler neck, allowing enough

room to add genuine Subaru coolingsystem conditioner in the radiator. Addgenuine Subaru cooling system condi-tioner until the coolant level reaches thefiller neck. Do not pour the coolant tooquickly, as this may lead to insufficient airbleeding and trapped air in the system.

Guideline of coolant quantity (includingcoolant in reservoir tank):

Non-turbo models:

MT: 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)AT: 7.1 US qt (6.7 liters, 5.9 Imp qt)

Turbo models:

MT: 7.9 US qt (7.5 liters, 6.6 Imp qt)AT: 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt)

Black plate (311,1)


1) “FULL” level mark2) “LOW” level mark

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill enginecoolant when adding it. If coolanttouches the exhaust pipe, it maycause a bad smell, smoke, and/ora fire. If engine coolant gets onthe exhaust pipe, be sure to wipeit off.


6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reser-voir tank’s “FULL” level mark.

7. Put the radiator cap back on andtighten firmly. At this time, make sure thatthe rubber gasket in the radiator cap iscorrectly in place.8. Start and run the engine for more thanfive minutes at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm.9. Stop the engine and wait until thecoolant cools down (122 to 1408F [50 to608C]). If there is any loss of coolant, addcoolant to the radiator’s filler neck and tothe reserve tank’s “FULL” level.10. Put the radiator cap and reservoir capback on and tighten firmly.

Air cleaner element

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with theair cleaner element removed. The aircleaner element not only filtersintake air but also stops flames ifthe engine backfires. If the aircleaner element is not installedwhen the engine backfires, youcould be burned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner ele-ment, use a genuine SUBARU aircleaner element. If it is not used,there is the possibility of causing anegative effect to the engine.

The air cleaner element functions as afilter screen. When the element is perfo-rated or removed, engine wear will beexcessive and engine life shortened.

The air cleaner element is a dry type. It isunnecessary to clean or wash the ele-ment.


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (312,1)



& Replacing the air cleanerelement

Replace the air cleaner element accordingto the maintenance schedule in the“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-der extremely dusty conditions, replace itmore frequently. It is recommended thatyou always use genuine SUBARU parts.

! Non-turbo models

1) Connector2) Clamp3) Air intake boot4) Clip

1. Unplug the connector that is attachedto the top of the air cleaner case.2. Loosen the screw of the clamp andpull the air intake boot out of the air

cleaner case.3. Unsnap the two clips holding the aircleaner case cover.

4. Open the air cleaner case cover andremove the air cleaner element.5. Clean the inside of the air cleanercover and case with a damp cloth andinstall a new air cleaner element.

6. To install the air cleaner case cover,insert the three projections on the aircleaner case cover into the slits on theair cleaner case and then snap the twoclips on the air cleaner case cover.

Black plate (313,1)


! Turbo models

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips onthe air intake duct, then remove the airintake duct.

2. Unplug the connector that is attached

to the top of the air cleaner case.

3. Unsnap the two clips holding the aircleaner case cover.

4. Open the air cleaner case cover andremove the air cleaner element.5. Clean the inside of the air cleaner

cover and case with a damp cloth andinstall a new air cleaner element.

6. To install the air cleaner case cover,insert the three projections on the aircleaner case cover into the slits on theair cleaner case and then snap the twoclips on the air cleaner case cover.


11

Black plate (314,1)



Spark plugs

It may be difficult to replace the sparkplugs. It is recommended that you havethe spark plugs replaced by yourSUBARU dealer.

The spark plugs should be replacedaccording to the maintenance schedulein the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-let”.

CAUTION

. When disconnecting the sparkplug cables, always grasp thespark plug cap, not the cables.

. Make sure the cables are re-placed in the correct order.

& Recommended spark plugs

Non-turbo models:

FR5AP-11 (NGK)

Turbo models:

SILFR6A (NGK)

Drive belts

1) Power steering pump pulley2) Front side belt3) Alternator4) Air conditioner compressor pulley5) Rear side belt6) Crank pulleyA) 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf)

The alternator, power steering pump, andair conditioner compressor depend ondrive belts. Satisfactory performance re-quires that belt tension be correct.

To check the tension of the front side belt,place a straightedge (ruler) across twoadjacent pulleys (alternator and crankpulley) and apply a force of 22 lbs (98 N,10 kg) midway between the pulleys by

Black plate (315,1)


using a spring scale. Belt deflectionshould be the amount specified. If thefront side belt is loose, cracked, or worn,contact your SUBARU dealer.

in (mm)

Deflection

New belt Used belt

A0.28 – 0.35(7.0 – 9.0)

0.35 – 0.43(9.0 – 11.0)

The rear side belt is a stretch-type belt,and the deflection and tension do notneed to be checked. If there are cracks orwear confirmed on the belts and asqueaking sound is heard from them,contact your SUBARU dealer.

Manual transmission oil

& Checking the oil level

Non-turbo model1) Yellow handle

Turbo model

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andstop the engine.2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, andinsert it again.

1) Upper level2) Lower level

3. Pull out the dipstick again and checkthe oil level on it. If it is below the lowerlevel, add oil through the dipstick hole tobring the level up to the upper level.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill manual trans-mission oil when adding it. If oiltouches the exhaust pipe, it maycause a bad smell, smoke, and/or afire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (316,1)



be sure to wipe it off.


Each oil manufacturer has its own baseoils and additives. Never use differentbrands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera-ture

Automatic transmission fluid

& Checking the fluid levelThe automatic transmission fluid expandslargely as its temperature rises; the fluidlevel differs according to fluid temperature.Therefore, there are two different scalesfor checking the level of hot fluid and coldfluid on the dipstick.

Though the fluid level can be checkedwithout warming up the fluid on the“COLD” range, it is recommended tocheck the fluid level when the fluid is atoperating temperature.

! Checking the fluid level when thefluid is hot

1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raisethe temperature of the transmission fluidup to normal operating temperature; 158to 1768F (70 to 808C) is normal.2. Park the vehicle on a level surface andset the parking brake.3. First shift the selector lever in eachposition. Then shift it in the “P” position,and run the engine at idling speed.

1) Yellow handle

1) HOT range2) COLD range3) Upper level4) Lower level

Black plate (317,1)


4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluidlevel on the gauge. If it is below the lowerlevel on the “HOT” range, add the recom-mended automatic transmission fluid up tothe upper level.

! Checking the fluid level when thefluid is cold

When the fluid level has to be checkedwithout time to warm up the automatictransmission, check to see that the fluidlevel is between the lower level and upperlevel on the “COLD” range. If it is belowthat range, add fluid up to the upper level.Be careful not to overfill.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill automatictransmission fluid when adding it.If automatic transmission fluidtouches the exhaust pipe, it maycause a bad smell, smoke, and/or afire. If automatic transmission fluidgets on the exhaust pipe, be sure towipe it off.

& Recommended fluid

Use one of the following types of auto-matic transmission fluid.

Genuine Subaru Automatic Transmis-sion Fluid Type-HP

IDEMITSU ATF HP

Castrol Transmax J

NOTEFor optimum transmission perfor-mance, only use the automatic trans-mission fluid that is recommended andprovided by Subaru.If the recommended automatic trans-mission fluid is unavailable, Dexron IIImay be temporarily used. If the DexronIII is used continuously there will be anoticeable increase in the vibration andnoise from the automatic transmission.

Front differential gear oil (ATvehicles)

& Checking the oil level

1) Yellow handle

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andstop the engine.2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, andinsert it again.


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (318,1)



1) Upper level2) Lower level

3. Pull out the dipstick again and checkthe oil level on it. If it is below the lowerlevel, add oil to bring the level up to theupper level.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill front differ-ential gear oil when adding it. If oiltouches the exhaust pipe, it maycause a bad smell, smoke, and/or afire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,be sure to wipe it off.



Oil grade:



Rear differential gear oil

& Checking the gear oil level

1) Filler plug2) Drain plug

Black plate (319,1)


1) Filler hole2) Drain hole3) Oil level

Remove the plug from the filler hole andcheck the oil level. The oil level should bekept even with the bottom of the filler hole.If the oil level is below the bottom edge ofthe hole, add oil through the filler hole toraise the level.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill rear differ-ential gear oil when adding it. Ifrear differential gear oil touchesthe exhaust pipe, it may cause abad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. Ifrear differential gear oil gets onthe exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. If the vehicle requires frequentrefilling, there may be an oil leak.If you suspect a problem, havethe vehicle checked at yourSUBARU dealer.



Oil grade:




11

Black plate (320,1)



Power steering fluid

& Checking the fluid level

The power steering fluid expands greatlyas its temperature rises; the fluid leveldiffers according to fluid temperature.Therefore, the reservoir tank has twodifferent checking ranges for hot and coldfluids.

Check the power steering fluid levelmonthly.1. Park the vehicle on a level surface,and stop the engine.

2. Check the fluid level of the reservoirtank.When the fluid is hot after the vehicle hasbeen run: Check that the oil level isbetween “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” onthe surface of the reservoir tank.When the fluid is cool before the vehicle isrun: Check that the oil level is between“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on thesurface of the reservoir tank.3. If the fluid level is lower than theapplicable “MIN” line, add the recom-mended fluid as necessary to bring thelevel between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.

If the fluid level is extremely low, it mayindicate possible leakage. Consult yourSUBARU dealer for an inspection.

WARNING

Be careful not to burn yourselfbecause the fluid may be hot.

CAUTION

. When power steering fluid isbeing added, use only clean fluid,and be careful not to allow anydirt into the tank. And never usedifferent brands together.

. Avoid spilling fluid when addingit in the tank.

. Be careful not to spill powersteering fluid when adding it. Ifpower steering fluid touches theexhaust pipe, it may cause a badsmell, smoke, and/or a fire. Ifpower steering fluid gets on theexhaust pipe, be sure to wipe itoff.

Black plate (321,1)


& Recommended fluid

Use one of the following types of auto-matic transmission fluid.

Genuine Subaru Automatic Transmis-sion Fluid Type-HP

“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmis-sion Fluid

Brake fluid


1) “MAX” level mark2) “MIN” level mark

Check the fluid level monthly.Check the fluid level on the outside of thereservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, addthe recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.Use only brake fluid from a sealedcontainer.

WARNING

. Never let brake fluid contact youreyes because brake fluid can beharmful to your eyes. If brakefluid gets in your eyes, immedi-ately flush them thoroughly with

clean water. For safety, whenperforming this work, wearingeye protection is advisable.

. Brake fluid absorbs moisturefrom the air. Any absorbed moist-ure can cause a dangerous lossof braking performance.

. If the vehicle requires frequentrefilling, there may be a leak. Ifyou suspect a problem, have thevehicle checked at your SUBARUdealer.

CAUTION

. Never use different brands ofbrake fluid together. Also, avoidmixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brakefluids even if they are of the samebrand.

. When adding brake fluid, be care-ful not to allow any dirt into thereservoir.

. Never splash the brake fluid overpainted surfaces or rubber parts.Alcohol contained in the brakefluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill brake fluidwhen adding it. If brake fluidtouches the exhaust pipe, it may


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (322,1)



cause a bad smell, smoke, and/ora fire. If brake fluid gets on theexhaust pipe, be sure to wipe itoff.

& Recommended brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4brake fluid

Clutch fluid (MT vehicles)


Check the fluid level on the outside of thereservoir. If the level is below “MIN” levelmark, add the recommended clutch fluidto “MAX” level mark.Use only clutch fluid from a sealedcontainer.

WARNING

Never let clutch fluid contact youreyes because clutch fluid can beharmful to your eyes. If clutch fluidgets in your eyes, immediately flushthem thoroughly with clean water.For safety, when performing thiswork, wearing eye protection is

advisable.

CAUTION

. Clutch fluid absorbs moisturefrom the air. Any absorbed moist-ure can cause improper clutchoperation.

. If the vehicle requires frequentrefilling, there may be a leak. Ifyou suspect a problem, have thevehicle checked at your SUBARUdealer.

. Never use different brands ofclutch fluid together.

. When clutch fluid is added, becareful not to allow any dirt intothe tank.

. Never splash the clutch fluid overpainted surfaces or rubber parts.Alcohol contained in the clutchfluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill clutch fluidwhen adding it. If clutch fluidtouches the exhaust pipe, it maycause a bad smell, smoke, and/ora fire. If clutch fluid gets on theexhaust pipe, be sure to wipe itoff.

Black plate (323,1)


& Recommended clutch fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4brake fluid

CAUTION

Avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4brake fluids even if they are of thesame brand.

Brake booster

If the brake booster does not operate asdescribed in the following, have it checkedby your SUBARU dealer.1. With the engine off, depress the brakepedal several times, applying the samepedal force each time. The distance thepedal travels should not vary.2. With the brake pedal depressed, startthe engine. The pedal should moveslightly down to the floor.3. With the brake pedal depressed, stopthe engine and keep the pedal depressedfor 30 seconds. The pedal height shouldnot change.4. Start the engine again and run forapproximately one minute then turn it off.Depress the brake pedal several times tocheck the brake booster. The brakebooster operates properly if the pedalstroke decreases with each depression.

NOTEFor vehicles equipped with the brakeassist system, when you depress thebrake pedal strongly or suddenly, thefollowing phenomena occur. However,even though these occur, they do notindicate any malfunctions, and thebrake assist system is operating prop-

erly.. You might feel that the brake pedalis applied by lighter force and gener-ates a greater braking force.. You might hear clicking (knocking)sounds around brake pedal.

Brake assist is not a system that bringsmore braking ability to the vehiclebeyond its breaking capability.


11

Black plate (324,1)



Brake pedal

Check the brake pedal free play andreserve distance according to the main-tenance schedule in the “Warranty andMaintenance Booklet”.

& Checking the brake pedalfree play

1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm)

Stop the engine and firmly depress thebrake pedal several times. Lightly pull thebrake pedal up with one finger to checkthe free play with a force of less than 2 lbs(10 N, 1 kg).If the free play is not within properspecification, contact your SUBARU deal-er.

& Checking the brake pedalreserve distance

1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-mately 66 lbs (294 N, 30 kg) and measurethe distance between the upper surface ofthe pedal pad and the floor.When the measurement is smaller thanthe specification, or when the pedal doesnot operate smoothly, contact with yourSUBARU dealer.

Clutch pedal (MT vehicles)

Check the clutch pedal free play andreserve distance according to the main-tenance schedule in the “Warranty andMaintenance Booklet”.

& Checking the clutch functionCheck the clutch engagement and disen-gagement.1. With the engine idling, check that thereare no abnormal noises when the clutchpedal is depressed, and that shifting into1st or reverse feels smooth.2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedalslowly to check that the engine andtransmission smoothly couple withoutany sign of slippage.

Black plate (325,1)


& Checking the clutch pedalfree play

1) 0.16 – 0.51 in (4.0 – 13.0 mm)

Lightly press the clutch pedal down withyour finger until you feel resistance, andcheck the free play.If the free play is not within properspecification, contact your SUBARU deal-er.

Hill start assist system (MTvehicles – if equipped)

Ensure that the Hill start assist systemoperates properly under the followingcircumstances:1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade bydepressing the brake pedal and clutchpedal, with the engine running.2. Make sure that the vehicle does notmove backward even after the brakepedal is released.3. Then make sure the vehicle startsclimbing the grade by following the normalstarting procedures.

If the Hill start assist system does notoperate as described above, contact withyour SUBARU dealer.

Replacement of brake padand lining

The right front disc brake and the right reardisc brake have audible wear indicatorson the brake pads. If the brake pads wearclose to their service limit, the wearindicator makes a very audible scrapingnoise when the brake pedal is applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each timeyou apply the brake pedal, have the brakepads serviced by your SUBARU dealer assoon as possible.

CAUTION

If you continue to drive despite thescraping noise from the audiblebrake pad wear indicator, it will


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (326,1)



result in the need for costly brakerotor repair or replacement.

& Breaking-in of new brakepads and linings

When replacing the brake pad or lining,use only genuine SUBARU parts. Afterreplacement, the new parts must bebroken in as follows:

! Brake pad and lining

While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brakepedal lightly. Repeat this five or moretimes.

! Parking brake lining

1. Drive the vehicle at a speed ofapproximately 22 mph (35 km/h).2. With the parking brake release buttonpushed in, pull the parking brake leverSLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pulling with aforce of approximately 33 lbs [147 N, 15kg].)3. Drive the vehicle for approximately220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parkingbrake to cool down. Repeat this proce-dure.5. Check the parking brake stroke. If theparking brake stroke is out of the specified

range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nutlocated on the parking brake lever.

Parking brake stroke:

7 – 8 notches / 44 lbs (196 N, 20 kg)

WARNING

A safe location and situation shouldbe selected for break-in driving.

CAUTION

Pulling the parking brake lever tooforcefully may cause the rearwheels to lock. To avoid this, becertain to pull the lever up slowlyand gently.

Parking brake stroke

Check the parking brake stroke accordingto the maintenance schedule in the“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.When the parking brake is properlyadjusted, braking power is fully appliedby pulling the lever up seven to eightnotches gently but firmly (approximately44 lbs [196 N, 20 kg]). If the parking brakelever stroke is not within the specifiedrange, have the brake system checkedand adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.

Black plate (327,1)


Tires and wheels

& Types of tiresYou should be familiar with type of tirespresent on your vehicle.The factory-fitted tires are all-season tires.

! All season tires

All season tires are designed to providean adequate measure of traction, handlingand braking performance in year-rounddriving including snowy and icy roadconditions. However all season tires donot offer as much traction performance aswinter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snowor on icy roads.All season tires are identified by “ALLSEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) onthe tire sidewall.

! Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed capabilitytires best suited for highway driving underdry conditions.Summer tires are inadequate for drivingon slippery roads such as on snow-covered or icy roads.If you drive your vehicle on snow-coveredor icy roads, we strongly recommend theuse of winter (snow) tires.When installing winter tires, be sure toreplace all four tires.

! Winter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving onsnow-covered and icy roads. Howeverwinter tires do not perform as well assummer tires and all season tires on roadsother than snow-covered and icy roads.

& Tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) (if equipped)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-vides the driver with a warning messageby sending a signal from a sensor that isinstalled in each wheel when tire pressureis severely low. The tire pressure monitor-ing system will activate only when thevehicle is driven. Also, this system maynot react immediately to a sudden drop intire pressure (for example, a blow-outcaused by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a warmgarage and will then drive the vehicle incold outside air, the resulting drop in tirepressures may cause the low tire pressurewarning light to come on. To avoid thisproblem when adjusting the tire pressuresin a warm garage, inflate the tires topressures higher than those shown on thetire placard. Specifically, inflate them by anextra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) forevery difference of 108F (5.68C) betweenthe temperature in the garage and thetemperature outside. By way of example,

the following table shows the required tirepressures that correspond to various out-side temperatures when the temperaturein the garage is 608F (15.68C).Example:Tire size: P205/55R16 89V and P205/50R17 88VStandard tire pressures:Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outsidetemperature

Adjusted pressure[psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]

front rear

308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)

108F (−128C) 38(265, 2.65)

37(255, 2.55)

−108F (−238C) 40 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7)

If the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on when you drive the vehicle incold outside air after adjusting the tirepressures in a warm garage, re-adjust thetire pressures using the method describedabove. Then, increase the vehicle speedto at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check tosee that the low tire pressure warning lightgoes off a few minutes later. If the low tirepressure warning light does not go off, thetire pressure monitoring system may not


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (328,1)



be functioning normally. In this event, goto a SUBARU dealer to have the systeminspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction be-tween tires and the road surface causesthe tires to warm up. After illumination ofthe low tire pressure warning light, anyincrease in the tire pressures caused byan increase in the outside air temperatureor by an increase in the temperature in thetires can cause the low tire pressurewarning light to go off.

System resetting is necessary when thewheels are changed (for example, aswitch to snow tires) and new TPMSvalves are installed on the newly fittedwheels. Have this work performed by aSUBARU dealer following wheel replace-ment.

It may not be possible to install TPMSvalves on certain wheels that are on themarket. Therefore, if you change thewheels (for example, a switch to snowtires), use wheels that have the same partnumber as the standard-equipmentwheels. Without four operational TPMSvalve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMSwill not fully function and the warning lightin the instrument panel will illuminatesteadily after blinking for approximatelyone minute.

When a tire is replaced, adjustments arenecessary to ensure continued normaloperation of the tire pressure monitoringsystem. As with wheel replacement, there-fore, you should have the work performedby a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning lightdoes not come on briefly after theignition switch is turned ON or thelight illuminates steadily after blink-ing for approximately one minute,you should have your Tire PressureMonitoring System checked at aSUBARU dealer as soon as possi-ble.

If this light comes on while driving,never brake suddenly and keepdriving straight ahead while gradu-ally reducing speed. Then slowlypull off the road to a safe place.Otherwise an accident involvingserious vehicle damage and seriouspersonal injury could occur.

If this light still comes on whiledriving after adjusting the tire pres-sure, a tire may have significantdamage and a fast leak that causesthe tire to lose air rapidly. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or awheel rim is replaced without theoriginal pressure sensor/transmitterbeing transferred, the low tire pres-sure warning light will illuminatesteadily after blinking for approxi-mately one minute. This indicatesthe TPMS is unable to monitor allfour road wheels. Contact yourSUBARU dealer as soon as possiblefor tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting. If the lightilluminates steadily after blinkingfor approximately one minute,promptly contact a SUBARU dealerto have the system inspected.

& Tire inspectionCheck on a daily basis that the tires arefree from serious damage, nails, andstones. At the same time, check the tiresfor abnormal wear.Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-ately if you find any problem.

NOTE. When the wheels and tires strikecurbs or are subjected to harsh treat-ment as when the vehicle is driven on arough surface, they can suffer damage

Black plate (329,1)


that cannot be seen with the naked eye.This type of damage does not becomeevident until time has passed. Try notto drive over curbs, potholes or onother rough surfaces. If doing so isunavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speeddown to a walking pace or less, andapproach the curbs as squarely aspossible. Also, make sure the tires arenot pressed against the curb when youpark the vehicle.. If you feel unusual vibration whiledriving or find it difficult to steer thevehicle in a straight line, one of thetires and/or wheels may be damaged.Drive slowly to the nearest authorizedSUBARU dealer and have the vehicleinspected.

& Tire pressures and wearMaintaining the correct tire pressureshelps to maximize the tires’ service livesand is essential for good running perfor-mance. Check and, if necessary, adjustthe pressure of each tire (including thespare) at least once a month (for example,during a fuel stop) and before any longjourney.

Check the tire pressures when the tiresare cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjustthe tire pressures to the values shown onthe tire placard. The tire placard is locatedon the door pillar on the driver’s side.

Driving even a short distance warms upthe tires and increases the tire pressures.Also, the tire pressures are affected by theoutside temperature. It is best to check tirepressure outdoors before driving thevehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air insideit expands, causing the tire pressure toincrease. Be careful not to mistakenlyrelease air from a warm tire to reduce itspressure.

NOTE. The air pressure in a tire increasesby approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.. The tires are considered cold whenthe vehicle has been parked for at leastthree hours or has been driven lessthan one mile (1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tires toadjust pressure. Doing so will resultin low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-trollability and ride comfort, and theycause the tires to wear abnormally.


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (330,1)



. Correct tire pressure (tread wornevenly)

Roadholding is good, and steering isresponsive. Rolling resistance is low, sofuel consumption is also lower.

. Abnormally low tire pressure (treadworn at shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-sumption is also higher.

. Abnormally high tire pressure (treadworn in center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tiremagnifies the effects of road-surfacebumps and dips, possibly resulting invehicle damage.

If the tire placard shows tire pressures forthe vehicle when fully loaded, adjust thetire pressures to the values that matchcurrent loading conditions.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-sively low tire pressures can causethe tires to deform severely and torapidly become hot. A sharp in-crease in temperature could causetread separation, and destruction of

Black plate (331,1)


the tires. The resulting loss ofvehicle control could lead to anaccident.

& Wheel balanceEach wheel was correctly balanced whenyour vehicle was new, but the wheels willbecome unbalanced as the tires becomeworn during use. Wheel imbalance causesthe steering wheel to vibrate slightly atcertain vehicle speeds and detracts fromthe vehicle’s straight-line stability. It canalso cause steering and suspension sys-tem problems and abnormal tire wear. Ifyou suspect that the wheels are notcorrectly balanced, have them checkedand adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.Also have them adjusted after tire repairsand after tire rotation.

NOTELoss of correct wheel alignment*causes the tires to wear on one sideand reduces the vehicle’s runningstability. Contact your SUBARU dealerif you notice abnormal tire wear.

*: The suspension system is designed to holdeach wheel at a certain alignment (relative tothe other wheels and to the road) for optimumstraight-line stability and cornering perfor-mance.

& Wear indicators

1) New tread2) Worn tread3) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wearindicator, which becomes visible whenthe depth of the tread grooves decreasesto 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must bereplaced when the tread wear indicatorappears as a solid band across the tread.

WARNING

When a tire’s tread wear indicatorbecomes visible, the tire is wornbeyond the acceptable limit andmust be replaced immediately. Witha tire in this condition, driving athigh speeds in wet weather can

cause the vehicle to hydroplane.The resulting loss of vehicle controlcan lead to an accident.

NOTEFor safety, inspect tire tread regularlyand replace the tires before their treadwear indicators become visible.

& Tire rotation direction mark

Example of tire rotation direction mark1) Front

If the tire has the rotation directionspecification, the tire rotation directionmark is placed on its sidewall.

When you install a tire that has the tirerotation direction mark, install the tire with


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (332,1)



the direction mark facing forward.

& Tire rotation

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec-tional tires1) Front

Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires1) Front

Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. Tomaximize the life of each tire and ensurethat the tires wear uniformly, it is best torotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,500km). Move the tires to the positions shownin the illustration each time they arerotated.

Replace any damaged or unevenly worntires at the time of rotation. After tirerotation, adjust the tires pressures andmake sure the wheel nuts are correctlytightened.

After driving approximately 600 miles(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts againand retighten any nut that has becomeloose.

& Tire replacementThe wheels and tires are important andintegral parts of your vehicle’s design;they cannot be changed arbitrarily. Thetires fitted as standard equipment areoptimally matched to the characteristicsof the vehicle and were selected to givethe best possible combination of runningperformance, ride comfort, and servicelife. It is essential for every tire to have asize and construction matching thoseshown on the tire placard and to have a

speed symbol and load index matchingthose shown on the tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detractsfrom controllability, ride comfort, brakingperformance, speedometer accuracy andodometer accuracy. It also creates incor-rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-priately changes the vehicle’s groundclearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms ofmanufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-struction, and size. You are advised toreplace the tires with new ones that areidentical to those fitted as standard equip-ment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARUrecommends replacing all four tires atthe same time.

WARNING

. All four tires must be the same interms of manufacturer, brand(tread pattern), construction, de-gree of wear, speed symbol, loadindex and size. Mixing tires ofdifferent types, sizes or degreesof wear can result in damage tovehicle’s powertrain. Use of dif-ferent types or sizes of tires canalso dangerously reduce con-

Black plate (333,1)


trollability and braking perfor-mance and can lead to an acci-dent.

. Use only radial tires. Do not useradial tires together with beltedbias tires and/or bias-ply tires.Doing so can dangerously re-duce controllability, resulting inan accident.

& Wheel replacementWhen replacing wheels due, for example,to damage, make sure the replacementwheels match the specifications of thewheels that are fitted as standard equip-ment. Replacement wheels are availablefrom SUBARU dealers.

WARNING

Use only those wheels that arespecified for your vehicle. Wheelsnot meeting specifications couldinterfere with brake caliper opera-tion and may cause the tires to rubagainst the wheel well housing dur-ing turns. The resulting loss ofvehicle control could lead to anaccident.

NOTEWhen any of the wheels are removedand replaced for tire rotation or tochange a flat tire, always check thetightness of the wheel nuts after driv-ing approximately 600 miles (1,000 km).If any nut is loose, tighten it to thespecified torque.

Aluminum wheels

Aluminum wheels can be scratched anddamaged easily. Handle them carefully tomaintain their appearance, performance,and safety.. When any of the wheels are removedand replaced for tire rotation or to changea flat tire, always check the tightness ofthe wheel nuts after driving approximately600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,tighten it to the specified torque.. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,wheel nuts, or tapered surface of thewheel.. Never let the wheel rub against sharpprotrusions or curbs.. Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformlyand completely around the tire, otherwisethe chains may scratch the wheel. Re-member that tire chains should be placedon the front wheels only.. When wheel nuts, balance weights, orthe center cap is replaced, be sure toreplace them with genuine SUBARU partsdesigned for aluminum wheels.


11

Black plate (334,1)



Windshield washer fluid

If you spray washer fluid on the windshieldbut the supply of washer fluid appears todiminish, check the level of washer fluid inthe tank.

Washer fluid level gauge

Remove the washer tank filler cap, thencheck the fluid level indicated by the levelgauge (attached to the inside of the cap).If the level is near the “Low” mark, addfluid until it reaches the “Hi” level on the

level gauge or the “FULL” mark on thetank.Use windshield washer fluid. If windshieldwasher fluid is unavailable use cleanwater.In areas where water freezes in winter,use an anti-freeze type windshield washerfluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluidcontains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-perature varies according to how much itis diluted, as indicated in the followingtable.

Washer FluidConcentration

FreezingTemperature

30% 10.48F (−128C)

50% −48F (−208C)

100% −498F (−458C)

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washerfluid because it could cause paintdamage.

In order to prevent freezing of washerfluid, check the freezing temperatures inthe table above when adjusting the fluidconcentration to the outside temperature.If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

Black plate (335,1)


a different concentration from the oneused previously, purge the old fluid fromthe piping between the reservoir tank andwasher nozzles by operating the washerfor a certain period of time. Otherwise, ifthe concentration of the fluid remaining inthe piping is too low for the outsidetemperature, it may freeze and block thenozzles.

CAUTION

Adjust the washer fluid concentra-tion appropriately for the outsidetemperature. If the concentration isinappropriate, sprayed washer fluidmay freeze on the windshield andobstruct your view, and the fluidmay freeze in the reservoir tank.

Replacement of wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other material onthe windshield or the wiper blade results injerky wiper operation and streaking on theglass. If you cannot remove the streaksafter operating the windshield washer or ifthe wiper operation is jerky, clean theouter surface of the windshield (or rearwindow) and the wiper blades using asponge or soft cloth with a neutraldetergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. Aftercleaning, rinse the windshield and wiperblades with clean water. The windshield isclean if beads do not form when you rinsethe windshield with water.

CAUTION

Do not clean the wiper blades withgasoline or a solvent, such as paintthinner or benzine. This will causedeterioration of the wiper blades.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking evenafter following this method, replace thewiper blades using the following proce-dures:

& Windshield wiper blade as-sembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

1) Stopper

2. Remove the wiper blade assembly byholding its pivot area and pushing it in thedirection shown by the arrow while de-pressing the wiper blade stopper.3. Install the wiper blade assembly to thewiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowlylower it in position.


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (336,1)



& Windshield wiper blade rub-ber

1) Metal support

1. Grasp the locked end of the bladerubber assembly and pull it firmly until thestoppers on the rubber are free of themetal support.

1) Metal spines

2. If the new blade rubber is not providedwith two metal spines, remove the metalspines from the old blade rubber andinstall them in the new blade rubber.

3. Align the claws of the metal support

with the grooves in the rubber and slidethe blade rubber assembly into the metalsupport until it locks.

1) Stopper

4. Be sure to position the claws at theend of the metal support between thestoppers on the rubber as shown. If therubber is not retained properly, the wiperblade may scratch the windshield.

Black plate (337,1)


& Rear window wiper bladeassembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rearwindow.

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-terclockwise.

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly towardyou to remove it from the wiper arm.

& Rear window wiper bladerubber

1. Pull out the end of the blade rubberassembly to unlock it from the plasticsupport.

2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out ofthe plastic support.

1) Metal spines


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (338,1)



3. If the new blade rubber is not providedwith two metal spines, remove the metalspines from the old blade rubber andinstall them in the new blade rubber.

4. Align the claws of the plastic supportwith the grooves in the blade rubberassembly, then slide the blade rubberassembly into place.

Securely retain both ends of the rubberwith the stoppers on the plastic supportends. If the rubber is not retained properly,the wiper may scratch the rear windowglass.5. Install the wiper blade assembly to thewiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowlylower it in position.

Battery

WARNING

. Before beginning work on or nearany battery, be sure to extinguishall cigarettes, matches, and light-ers. Never expose a battery to anopen flame or electric sparks.Batteries give off a gas which ishighly flammable and explosive.

. For safety, in case an explosiondoes occur, wear eye protectionor shield your eyes when work-ing near any battery. Never leanover a battery.

. Do not let battery fluid contacteyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-cause battery fluid is a corrosiveacid. If battery fluid gets on yourskin or in your eyes, immediatelyflush the area with water thor-oughly. Seek medical help imme-diately if acid has entered theeyes.

If battery fluid is accidentallyswallowed, immediately drink alarge amount of milk or water,and seek medical attention im-mediately.

. To lessen the risk of sparks,

Black plate (339,1)


remove rings, metal watchbands,and other metal jewelry. Neverallow metal tools to contact thepositive battery terminal and any-thing connected to it WHILE youare at the same time in contactwith any other metallic portion ofthe vehicle because a short cir-cuit will result.

. Keep everyone including childrenaway from the battery.

. Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area.

. Battery posts, terminals and re-lated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductiveharm. Batteries also containother chemicals known to theState of California to cause can-cer. Wash hands after handling.

1) Cap2) Upper level3) Lower level

It is unnecessary to periodically check thebattery fluid level or periodically refill withdistilled water.However, if the battery fluid level is belowthe lower level, remove the cap. Fill to theupper level with distilled water.

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 ampereswhen charging the battery becauseit will shorten battery life.

Fuses

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one hav-ing a higher rating or with materialother than a fuse because seriousdamage or a fire could result.

The fuses are designed to melt during anoverload to prevent damage to the wiringharness and electrical equipment. Thefuses are located in two fuse boxes.

One is located under the instrument panelbehind the fuse box cover on the driver’sseat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (340,1)



The other one is housed in the enginecompartment.

The spare fuses are stored in the mainfuse box cover in the engine compart-ment.

The fuse puller is stored in the main fusebox in the engine compartment.

1) Good2) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electricalcontrols do not operate, inspect the

corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,replace it.1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”position and turn off all electrical acces-sories.2. Remove the cover.3. Determine which fuse may be blown.The back side of each fuse box cover andthe “Fuses and circuits” section in chapter12 show the circuit for each fuse.

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,replace it with a spare fuse of the samerating.6. If the same fuse blows again, thisindicates that its system has a problem.Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

Black plate (341,1)


Main fuse

Main fuse box

The main fuses are designed to meltduring an overload to prevent damage tothe wiring harness and electrical equip-ment. Check the main fuses if anyelectrical component fails to operate (ex-cept the starter motor) and other fuses aregood. A melted main fuse must bereplaced. Use only replacements with thesame specified rating as the melted mainfuse. If a main fuse blows after it isreplaced, have the electrical systemchecked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealerbefore installing fog lights or any otherelectrical equipment in your vehicle. Suchaccessories may cause the electronicsystem to malfunction if they are incor-rectly installed or if they are not suited forthe vehicle.


11

Black plate (342,1)



Replacing bulbs

A, B: The high mount stop light and brake/tail light of the 5-door models are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARUdealer for replacement.

C: The high mount stop light of the 4-door models is built in the rear spoiler (if equipped). Consult your SUBARU dealer forreplacement.

Black plate (343,1)


Wattage Bulb No.

1) High beam headlight 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)

2) Low beam headlight 12V-55W H11

3) Front turn signal/Parking and front side marker light 12V-27/8W 3457A

4) Map light 12V-8W –

5) Dome light 12V-8W –

6) Front fog light 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)

7) Trunk room light (4-door) 12V-5W (W5W)

8) High mount stop light (4-door, if equipped) 12V-21W (P21W)

9) Rear turn signal light (4-door) 12V-21W (WY21W)

10) Back-up light (4-door) 12V-16W 921

11) Brake/tail and rear side marker light (4-door) 12V-21/5W (W21/5W)

12) Cargo area light (5-door) 12V-5W –

13) Rear side marker light (5-door) 12V-5W 168

14) Rear turn signal light (5-door) 12V-21W (WY21W)

15) Back-up light (5-door) 12V-21W 7440

16) Licence plate light 12V-5W 168 (W5W)

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a newbulb of the specified wattage. Usinga bulb of different wattage couldresult in a fire.

& Headlight

CAUTION

Halogen headlight bulbs becomevery hot while in use. If you touchthe bulb surface with bare hands orgreasy gloves, fingerprints orgrease on the bulb surface willdevelop into hot spots, causing thebulb to break. If there are fingerprints or grease on the bulb surface,wipe them away with a soft clothmoistened with alcohol.

NOTE. If headlight aiming is required, con-sult your SUBARU dealer for properadjustment of the headlight aim.. It may be difficult to replace thebulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by yourSUBARU dealer if necessary.


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (344,1)



! Low beam light bulbs

Right-hand side

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips onthe air intake duct, then remove the airintake duct (right-hand side).

Left-hand side

2. Use a screwdriver to remove thesecured clip of the washer tank. To makeit easy to access the bulb, move thewasher tank to the horizontal direction(left-hand side).

3. Remove the bulb cover, by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Disconnect the electrical connectorfrom the bulb.

5. Remove the bulb from the headlightassembly by turning it counterclockwise.6. Replace the bulb with a new one. Atthis time, do not touch the bulb surface.

Black plate (345,1)


7. To install the bulb to the headlightassembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.8. Reconnect the electrical connector.9. Install the bulb cover.10. Install the air intake duct with clips(right-hand side).11. Set the washer tank to the originalplace and secure it by clip (left-hand side).

! High beam light bulbs

Right-hand side

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips onthe air intake duct, then remove the airintake duct (right-hand side).

Left-hand side

2. Use a screwdriver to remove thesecured clip of the washer tank. To makeit easy to access the bulb, move thewasher tank to the horizontal direction(left-hand side).

3. Disconnect the electrical connectorfrom the bulb.

4. Remove the bulb from the headlightassembly by turning it counterclockwise.5. Replace the bulb with new one. At thistime, use care not to touch the bulbsurface.6. To install the bulb to the headlightassembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.7. Reconnect the electrical connector.8. Install the air intake duct with clips(right-hand side).9. Set the washer tank to the originalplace and secure it by clip (left-hand side).


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (346,1)



& Front turn signal light andparking light

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARUdealer if necessary.

& Front fog light (if equipped)It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARUdealer if necessary.

& Rear combination lights

! 4-door

1. Remove the clip from the rear trunktrim with a screwdriver.2. Open the rear portion of the side trunktrim panel.

1) Brake/tail and rear side marker light2) Rear turn signal light3) Back-up light

3. Remove the bulb socket from the rearcombination light assembly by turning itcounterclockwise.4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket andreplace it with a new one.5. Set the bulb socket into the rearcombination light assembly and turn itclockwise until it locks.6. Secure the rear trunk trim panel withthe clips.

! 5-door

1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, removethe upper and lower screws that securethe rear combination light assembly.

2. Slide the rear combination light as-

Black plate (347,1)


sembly rearward and remove it from thevehicle.

1) Rear side marker light2) Rear turn signal light

3. Remove the bulb socket from the rearcombination light assembly by turning itcounterclockwise.4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket andreplace it with a new one.5. Set the bulb socket into the rearcombination light assembly and turn itclockwise until it locks.

6. Put the rear combination light assem-bly into place while aligning the clip withthe guide on the vehicle.

7. Tighten the upper and lower screws.

& Back-up light (5-door)

1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to thelight cover as shown in the illustration, andpry the light cover off from the rear gatetrim.


– CONTINUED –

11

Black plate (348,1)



2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwiseand remove it.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket andreplace it with a new one.4. Install the bulb socket by turning itclockwise. Install the light cover on therear gate.

& License plate light

1. Insert a finger into the right side of thelicense plate light cover, then press onceto the left and pull out to remove the cover.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and pull out the socket.3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install anew bulb.4. Reinstall the license plate light cover.

& Dome light, map light andcargo area light

Black plate (349,1)


1. Remove the lens by prying the edge ofthe lens with a flat-head screwdriver.2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install anew bulb.3. Reinstall the lens.

& Trunk light

1. Remove the cover by squeezing itssides and pulling it.2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install anew bulb.3. Reinstall the cover.

& High mount stop light

! 4-door

1. Remove the high mount stop lightcover by prying the edge with a screw-driver.2. Remove the bulb socket from the highmount stop light assembly by turning itcounterclockwise.3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install anew bulb.4. Reinstall the cover.

& Other bulbsOther bulbs may be difficult to replace.Have the bulbs replaced by yourSUBARU dealer if necessary.


11

Black plate (2,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

Black plate (23,1)


Specifications..................................................... 12-2Dimensions........................................................ 12-2Engine ............................................................... 12-3Electrical system................................................ 12-3Capacities.......................................................... 12-4Tires .................................................................. 12-5Wheel alignment ................................................ 12-5

Fuses and circuits ............................................. 12-6Fuse panel located in the passengercompartment ................................................... 12-6

Fuse panel located in the enginecompartment ................................................... 12-8

Bulb chart........................................................... 12-9Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-10

Specifications

12

Black plate (352,1)


12-2 Specifications

Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

& Dimensionsin (mm)

Item 4-door 5-door

2.5-liternon-turbo

2.5-liter turbo 2.5-liter non-turbo 2.5-liter turbo

2.5i 2.5i-S WRX WRX-S 2.5i 2.5i-S OUTBACK WRX WRX-S

Drive system AWD

Transmission type AT MT AT MT AT MT AT MT AT MT AT MT AT MT AT MT AT MT

Overall length 180.3 (4,580) 173.8 (4,415)

Overallwidth

4-door 68.5 (1,740) –

5-door – 68.5 (1,740)

Overall height 58.1 (1,475) 58.3 (1,480) 58.1 (1,475)

Wheel base 103.1 (2,620)

Tread Front 58.9 (1,495) 58.7 (1,490) 58.9 (1,495)

Rear 58.9 (1,495) 59.1 (1,500) 58.9 (1,495) 59.1 (1,500)

Ground clearance*1 6.1 (155) 6.3 (160) 6.1 (155)

*1: Measured with vehicle emptyAT: Automatic transmissionMT: Manual transmission

Black plate (353,1)


& Engine

Engine model EJ253(2.5-liter, SOHC, non-turbo)

EJ255(2.5-liter, DOHC, turbo)

Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine

Displacement cc (cu-in) 2,457 (150)

Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.9 6 3.1 (99.5 6 79.0)

Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.4 : 1

Firing order 1 – 3 – 2 – 4

& Electrical system

Battery type and capacity (5HR) MT 12V-48AH (55D23L)

AT 12V-52AH (75D23L)

Alternator Non-turbo models 12V-90A

Turbo models 12V-110A

Spark plugsNon-turbo engine FR5AP-11 (NGK)

Turbo engine SILFR6A (NGK)

AT: Automatic transmissionMT: Manual transmission

Specifications 12-3

– CONTINUED –

12

Black plate (354,1)


12-4 Specifications

& Capacities

Fuel tank 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)

Engine oil 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

Transmission oil (MT) 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt)

Transmission fluid (AT) 10.0 US qt (9.5 liters, 8.4 Imp qt)

Front differential gear oil (AT) 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)

Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)

Power steering fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)

Engine coolant Non-turbo engine MT 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)

AT 7.1 US qt (6.7 liters, 5.9 Imp qt)

Turbo engine MT 7.9 US qt (7.5 liters, 6.6 Imp qt)

AT 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt)

AT: Automatic transmissionMT: Manual transmission

Black plate (355,1)


& Tires

Tire size P205/55R16 89V P205/50R17 88V

Wheel size 16 6 61/2 JJ 17 6 7 JJ

Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Temporaryspare tire

Size T125/70 D17

Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

& Wheel alignment

Item 4-door 5-door

2.5-liter non-turbo 2.5-liter turbo 2.5-liter non-turbo 2.5-liter turbo

2.5i 2.5i-S WRX WRX-S 2.5i 2.5i-S OUT-BACK

WRX WRX-S

Drive system AWD

Toe Front 0 in (0 mm)

Rear 0 in (0 mm)

Camber Front –0810’ –0805’ –0810’

Rear –1805’ –1815’ –1805’ –1815’

Specifications 12-5

12

Black plate (356,1)


12-6 Specifications

Fuses and circuits

& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment

Fusepanel

Fuserating Circuit

1 Empty

2 Empty

3 15A . Door locking

4 10A . Front wiper deicer relay

5 10A . Combination meter

6 7.5A . Remote control rearview mirrors

. Seat heater relay

7 15A . Combination meter. Integrated unit

8 20A . Stop light

9 15A . Front wiper deicer

10 7.5A . Power supply (battery)

11 7.5A . Turn signal unit. Clock

12 15A . Automatic transmissionunit

. Engine control unit

. Integrated unit

13 20A . Accessory power outlet(center console)

14 15A . Position light. Tail light. Rear combination light

15 Empty (FWD connector forAWD AT vehicles)

Black plate (357,1)


Fusepanel

Fuserating Circuit

16 10A . Illumination

17 15A . Seat heaters

18 10A . Back-up light

19 Empty

20 10A . Accessory power outlet(instrument panel)

21 7.5A . Starter relay

22 15A . Air conditioner. Rear window defogger

relay coil

23 15A . Rear wiper. Rear window washer

24 15A . Audio unit. Clock

25 15A . SRS airbag system

26 7.5A . Power window relay. Radiator main fan relay. Tail and illumination re-

lay

27 15A . Blower fan

28 15A . Blower fan

29 15A . Fog light

30 30A . Front wiper

31 7.5A . Auto air conditioner unit. Integrated unit

Fusepanel

Fuserating Circuit

32 Empty

33 7.5A . ABS/Vehicle dynamicscontrol unit

Specifications 12-7

– CONTINUED –

12

Black plate (358,1)


12-8 Specifications

& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment

A) Main fuse

Fusepanel

Fuserating Circuit

1 30A . ABS unit. Vehicle dynamics con-

trol unit

2 25A . Main fan

3 10A . Secondary air combina-tion valve (turbo models)

4 25A . Sub fan

5 Empty

6 Empty

7 30A . Headlight (low beam)

8 15A . Headlight (high beam)

9 20A . Back-up light

10 15A . Horn

11 25A . Rear window defogger. Mirror heater

12 15A . Fuel pump

13 10A . Automatic transmissioncontrol unit

14 7.5A . Engine control unit

15 15A . Turn and hazard warn-ing flasher

16 15A . Tail and illumination re-lay

17 7.5A . Alternator

Black plate (359,1)


Fusepanel

Fuserating Circuit

18 15A . Headlight (right side)

19 15A . Headlight (left side)

Bulb chart

Description Wattage Bulb No.

Headlight

Low beam headlight 12V-55W H11

High beam headlight 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)

Front fog light 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)

Front turn signal/Parking and front sidemarker light

12V-27/8W 3457A

Rear combination light

Rear turn signal light(4-door)

12V-21W (WY21W)

Brake/tail and rear side marker light(4-door)

12V-21/5W (W21/5W)

Back-up light (4-door) 12V-16W 921

Rear side marker light (5-door) 12V-5W 168

Rear turn signal light (5-door) 12V-21W (WY21W)

Back-up light (5-door) 12V-21W 7440

High mount stop light (4-door) 12V-21W (P21W)

License plate light 12V-5W 168 (W5W)

Trunk room light (4-door) 12V-5W W5W

Cargo area light (5-door) 12V-5W –

Dome light 12V-8W –

Map light 12V-8W –

Specifications 12-9

12

Black plate (360,1)


12-10 Specifications

Vehicle identification 1) Vehicle identification number2) Emission control label3) Tire inflation pressure label4) Certification label5) Vehicle identification number plate6) Model number label7) Fuel label

Black plate (25,1)


For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2Tire information.................................................. 13-2

Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-5Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-6Tire care – maintenance and safety practices...... 13-7Vehicle load limit – how to determine.................. 13-8Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle loadcapacities ...................................................... 13-11

Adverse safety consequences of overloading onhandling and stopping and on tires ................ 13-11

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-12Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-12

Treadwear ....................................................... 13-13Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-13Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-13

Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.) ................... 13-14

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

13

Black plate (364,1)


13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

For U.S.A.

The following information has beencompiled according to Code ofFederal Regulations “Title 49, Part575”.

Tire information

& Tire labelingMany markings (e.g. Tire size, TireIdentification Number or TIN) areplaced on the sidewall of a tire bytire manufacturers. These markingscan provide you with useful infor-mation on the tire.

! Tire size

Your vehicle comes equipped withP-Metric tire size. It is important tounderstand the sizing system inselecting the proper tire for yourvehicles. Here is a brief review ofthe tire sizing system with a break-down of its individual elements.

! P Metric

With the P-Metric system, SectionWidth is measured in millimeters.To convert millimeters into inches,divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio(Section Height divided by SectionWidth) helps provide more dimen-sional information about the tiresize.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used onlight duty vehicles such as passen-ger cars(2) Section Width in millimeters(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height7 section width).(4) R = Radial Construction(5) Rim diameter in inches

! Load and Speed Rating Descrip-tions

The load and speed rating descrip-tions will appear following the sizedesignation.They provide two important factsabout the tire. First, the numberdesignation is its load index. Sec-ond, the letter designation indicatesthe tire’s speed rating.

Black plate (365,1)


Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical codewhich specifies the maximum loada tire can carry at the speedindicated by its speed symbol, atmaximum inflation pressure.

For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs(600 kg), “89”means 1,278 lbs (580kg).

WARNING

Load indices apply only to thetire, not to the vehicle. Puttinga load rated tire on any vehicledoes not mean the vehicle canbe loaded up to the tire’s ratedload.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabeticalsystem describing a tire’s capabilityto travel at established and prede-termined speeds.For example, “V” means 149 mph(240 km/h)

WARNING

. Speed ratings apply only tothe tire, not to the vehicle.Putting a speed rated tire onany vehicle does not meanthe vehicle can be operatedat the tire’s rated speed.

. The speed rating is void ifthe tires are worn out, da-maged, repaired, retreaded,or otherwise altered fromtheir original condition. Ift ires are repaired, re-treaded, or otherwise al-tered, they may not be sui-table for original equipmenttire designed loads andspeeds.

! Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN) ismarked on the intended outboardsidewall. The TIN is composed offour groups. Here is a brief reviewof the TIN with a breakdown of itsindividual elements.

(1) Manufacturer’s IdentificationMark(2) Tire Size(3) Tire Type Code(4) Date of ManufactureThe first two figures identify theweek, starting with “01” to representthe first full week of the calendaryear; the second two figures repre-sent the year. For example, 0101means the 1st week of 2001.! Other markings

The following makings are alsoplaced on the sidewall.

! Maximum permissible inflationpressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-sure to which this tire may beinflated. For example, “300 kPa(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3

– CONTINUED –

13

Black plate (366,1)



! Maximum load rating

The load rating at the maximumpermissible weight load for this tire.For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI)MAX. PRESS.”

WARNING

Maximum load rating appliesonly to the tire, not to thevehicle. Putting a load ratedtire on any vehicle does notmean the vehicle can beloaded up to the tire’s ratedload.

! Construction type

Applicable construction of this tire.For example, “TUBELESS STEELBELTED RADIAL”

! Construction

The generic name of each cordmaterial used in the plies (bothsidewall and tread area) of this tire.For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2

STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE-WALL 2 POLYESTER”

! Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG)

For details, refer to the “Uniform tirequality grading standards” section inthis chapter.

Black plate (367,1)


& Recommended tire inflation pressure

! Recommended cold tire inflation pressure

Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires is as follows:

Tire size P205/55R16 89V P205/50R17 88V

Wheel size 16 6 61/2 JJ 17 6 7 JJPressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)Temporaryspare tire

Size T125/70 D17



– CONTINUED –

13

Black plate (368,1)



! Vehicle placard

The vehicle placard is affixed to thedriver’s side B-pillar.

Example:

The vehicle placard shows originaltire size, recommended cold tireinflation pressure on each tire atmaximum loaded vehicle weight,seating capacity and loading infor-mation.! Adverse safety consequences

of under-inflation

Driving at high speeds with exces-sively low tire pressures can causethe tires to flex severely and torapidly become hot. A sharp in-crease in temperature could causetread separation, and failure of thetire(s). Possible resulting loss ofvehicle control could lead to anaccident.! Measuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve proper in-flation

Check and, if necessary, adjust thepressure of each tire (including thespare) at least once a month andbefore any long journey. Check thetire pressures when the tires arecold. Use a pressure gauge toadjust the tire pressures to the

specific values. Driving even ashort distance warms up the tiresand increases the tire pressures.Also, the tire pressures are affectedby the outside temperature. It isbest to check tire pressure out-doors before driving the vehicle.When a tire becomes warm, the airinside it expands, causing the tirepressure to increase. Be careful notto mistakenly release air from awarm tire to reduce its pressure.

& Glossary of tire terminology. Cold tire pressureThe pressure in a tire that has beendriven less than 1 mile or has beenstanding for three hours or more.. Maximum inflation pressureThe maximum cold inflation pres-sure to which a tire may be inflated.. Recommended inflation pres-sureThe cold inflation pressure recom-mended by a vehicle manufacturer.. Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a

Black plate (369,1)


whitewall, bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding thatis higher or deeper than thesame molding on the other side-wall of the tire, or(2) The outward facing sidewallof an asymmetrical tire that hasa particular side that must al-ways face outward when mount-ing on a vehicle.

. Accessory weightThe combined weight (in excess ofthose standard items which may bereplaced) of floor mats, leatherseats and cross bars to the extentthat these items are available asfac to ry - ins ta l l ed equ ipmen t(whether installed or not).. Curb weightThe weight of a motor vehicle withstandard equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant and air conditioning.. Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe sum of curb weight, accessoryweight, vehicle capacity weight and

production options weight.. Normal occupant weight150 lbs (68 kg) times the number ofoccupants (3 occupants).. Occupant distributionDistribution of occupants in a vehi-cle, 2 in front, 1 in rear seat.. Production options weightThe combined weight of thoseinstalled regular production optionsweighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) inexcess of those standards itemswhich they replace, not previouslyconsidered in curb weight or acces-sory weight.. Vehicle capacity weightThe total weight of cargo, luggageand occupants that can be added tothe vehicle.. Vehicle maximum load on a tireLoad on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the maximumloaded vehicle weight and dividingby two.. Vehicle normal load on a tireLoad on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the curb weight,accessory weight, and normal oc-cupant weight and dividing by two.

& Tire care – maintenance andsafety practices

. Check on a daily basis that thetires are free from serious damage,nails, and stones. At the same time,check the tires for abnormal wear.. Inspect the tire tread regularlyand replace the tires before theirtread wear indicators become visi-ble. When a tire’s tread wearindicator becomes visible, the tireis worn beyond the acceptable limitand must be replaced immediately.With a tire in this condition, drivingat even low speeds in wet weathercan cause the vehicle to hydro-plane. Possible resulting loss ofvehicle control can lead to anaccident.. To maximize the life of each tireand ensure that the tires wearuniformly, it is best to rotate the


– CONTINUED –

13

Black plate (370,1)



tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).Rotating the tires involves switch-ing the front and rear tires on theright-hand side of the vehicle andsimilarly switching the front andrear tires on the left-hand side ofthe vehicle. (Each tire must be kepton its original side of the vehicle.)Replace any damaged or unevenlyworn tires at the time of rotation.After tire rotation, adjust the tirepressures and make sure the wheelnuts are correctly tightened. Atightening torque specification anda tightening sequence specificationfor the wheel nuts can be found inthe “Flat tires” section in chapter 9.

& Vehicle load limit – how todetermine

The load capacity of your vehicle isdetermined by weight, not by avail-able cargo space. The load limit ofyour vehicle is shown on thevehicle placard attached to thedriver’s side B-pillar. Locate thestatement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”on your vehicle’s placard.The vehicle placard also showsseating capacity of your vehicle.The total load capacity includes thetotal weight of driver and all pas-sengers and their belongings, anycargo, any optional equipment suchas a trailer hitch, roof rack or bikecarrier, etc., and the tongue load ofa trailer. Therefore cargo capacitycan be calculated by the followingmethod.

Cargo capacity = Load limit − (totalweight of occupants + total weightof optional equipment + tongueload of a trailer (if applicable))

For information about vehicle load-ing, refer to the “Loading yourvehicle” section in chapter 8.

NOTEYour vehicle is neither designednor intended to be used fortrailer towing. Therefore, never

tow a trailer with your vehicle.

! Calculating total and load ca-pacities varying seating con-figurations

Calculate the available load capa-city as shown in the followingexamples:

Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of thevehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), whichis indicated on the vehicle placardwith the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed 900 lbs or408 kg”.

Black plate (371,1)


For example, if the vehicle has oneoccupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300kg).1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-pacity by subtracting the totalweight from the vehicle capacityweight of 900 lbs (408 kg).

3. The result of step 2 shows that afurther 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo canbe carried.

Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing176 lbs (80 kg) now enters thesame vehicle (bringing the numberof occupants to two), the calcula-tions are as follows:1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-pacity.

3. The total weight now exceedsthe capacity weight by 92 lbs (42kg), so the cargo weight must bereduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.

Example 2A

Vehicle capacity weight of thevehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), whichis indicated on the vehicle placard


– CONTINUED –

13

Black plate (372,1)



with the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed 408 kg or900 lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has oneoccupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170kg). In addition, the vehicle is fittedwith a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs(10 kg), to which is attached atrailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).10% of the trailer weight is appliedto the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongueload = 176 lbs (80 kg)).1. Calculate the total weight.


3. The result of step 2 shows that afurther 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo canbe carried.

NOTEYour vehicle is neither designednor intended to be used fortrailer towing. Therefore, nevertow a trailer with your vehicle.

Example 2B

For example, if a person weighing143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the samevehicle (bringing the number ofoccupants to three), and a childrestraint system weighing 11 lbs (5kg) is installed in the vehicle for thechild to use, the calculations are asfollows:1. Calculate the total weight.

Black plate (373,1)



3. The total weight now exceedsthe capacity weight by 32 lbs (15kg), so the cargo weight must bereduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more.


& Determining compatibility oftire and vehicle load capaci-ties

The sum of four tires’ maximumload ratings must exceed the max-imum loaded vehicle weight(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of themaximum load ratings of two fronttires and of two rear tires mustexceed each axle’s maximumloaded capacity (“GAWR”). Originalequipment tires are designed tofulfill those conditions.The maximum loaded vehicleweight is referred to Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). And eachaxle’s maximum loaded capacity isreferred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-ing (GAWR). The GVWR and eachaxle’s GAWR are shown on thevehicle certification label affixed tothe driver’s door.

The GVWR and front and rearGAWRs are determined by not onlythe maximum load rating of tires butalso loaded capacities of the vehi-cle’s suspension, axles and otherparts of the body.Therefore, this means that thevehicle cannot necessarily beloaded up to the tire’s maximumload rating on the tire sidewall.

& Adverse safety conse-quences of overloading onhandling and stopping andon tires

Overloading could affect vehiclehandling, stopping distance, andvehicle and tire performance in thefollowing ways. This could lead toan accident and possibly result insevere personal injury.. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.. Heavy and/or high-mountedloads could increase the risk ofrollover.. Stopping distance will increase.. Brakes could overheat and fail.


– CONTINUED –

13

Black plate (374,1)



. Suspension, bearings, axles andother body parts could break orexperience accelerated wear thatwill shorten vehicle life.. Tires could fail.. Tread separation could occur.. Tire could separate from its rim.

& Steps for Determining Cor-rect Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXpounds” on your vehicle’s placard.2. Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kilograms or XXX pounds.4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. For exam-ple, if the “XXX” amount equals1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will befive- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers inyour vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capa-city is 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 6150) = 650 lbs)5. Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of your ve-hicle.


Uniform tire quality gradingstandards

This information indicates the rela-tive performance of passenger cartires in the area of treadwear,traction, and temperature resis-tance. This is to aid the consumerin making an informed choice in thepurchase of tires.Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewall be-tween tread shoulder and maxi-mum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-perature A

The quality grades apply to newpneumatic tires for use on passen-ger cars. However, they do notapply to deep tread, winter typesnow tires, space-saver or tempor-ary use spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of 12 inchesor less, or to some limited produc-tion tires.

All passenger car tires must con-

Black plate (375,1)


form to Federal Safety Require-ments in addition to these grades.

& TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course.For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and one-half (1-1/2) times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tires de-pends upon the actual conditionsof their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

& Traction AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on spe-

cified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor traction perfor-mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include accel-eration, cornering, hydroplan-ing, or peak traction charac-teristics.

& Temperature A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled con-ditions on a specified indoor labora-tory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passengercar tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of perfor-mance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for thistire is established for a tirethat is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessivespeed, underinflation, or ex-cessive loading, either sepa-rately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possi-ble tire failure.


13

Black plate (376,1)



Reporting safety defects(U.S.A.)

If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately in-form the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) inaddition to notifying Subaru ofAmerica, Inc.If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehi-cles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or Subaru ofAmerica, Inc. To contact NHTSA,you may call the Vehicle SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or writeto: Administrator, NHTSA, 400Seventh Street, SW., Washington,

DC 20590. You can also obtainother information about motor ve-hicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Black plate (27,1)


Index

14

Black plate (2,1)


14-2 Index

AABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-24

Warning light ................................................. 3-19, 7-25Accessories....................................................... 5-4, 11-45Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-6Active head restraint..................................................... 1-4Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-15Air conditioner ............................................................. 4-7Air filtration system..................................................... 4-13Air flow selection.......................................................... 4-2Alarm system ............................................................ 2-14All-Wheel Drive warning light ....................................... 3-21Aluminum wheel cleaning............................................ 10-3Aluminum wheels...................................................... 11-37Antenna system........................................................... 5-2Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-24Arming the system ..................................................... 2-15Armrest....................................................................... 1-6Ashtray ....................................................................... 6-8AT OIL TEMPerature warning light ............................... 3-18Audio control button ................................................... 5-26Audio set .................................................................... 5-5Auto-dimming mirror/compass...................................... 3-37Automatic climate control system ................................... 4-8Automatic transmission ............................................... 7-16

Capacities ............................................................. 12-4Fluid.................................................................... 11-20MANUAL mode ..................................................... 7-19Selector lever ........................................................ 7-17Shift lock release ................................................... 7-22Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP)................. 3-18

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-10

BBattery .................................................................... 11-42

Jump starting ......................................................... 9-10Replacement (Remote keyless entry system) .............. 2-7

Booster seat .............................................................. 1-28Bottle holder ............................................................... 6-6Brake

Assist.................................................................... 7-24Booster ....................................................... 7-23, 11-27Fluid ................................................................... 11-25Pad and lining...................................................... 11-30Parking ....................................................... 7-34, 11-30Pedal .................................................................. 11-28System.................................................................. 7-23

Brake pedalFree play............................................................. 11-28Reserve distance.................................................. 11-28

Brake system............................................................. 7-23Warning light.......................................................... 3-20

Braking ..................................................................... 7-23Tips ...................................................................... 7-23

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings................... 11-30Bulb

Chart .................................................................... 12-9Replacing ............................................................ 11-46

Black plate (3,1)


CCapacities ................................................................. 12-4Cargo area

Cover ................................................................... 6-10Light....................................................................... 6-2Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-11

Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3Center

Console .................................................................. 6-4Ventilators ............................................................... 4-3

Center and side ventilators............................................ 4-3Changing

Flat tire ................................................................... 9-4Oil and oil filter ...................................................... 11-9

Charge warning light .................................................. 3-17CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicatorlamp...................................................................... 3-16

CheckingBrake pedal free play ............................................ 11-28Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-28Clutch function...................................................... 11-28Clutch pedal free play............................................ 11-29Engine oil level ...................................................... 11-8Fluid level ............................... 11-20, 11-24, 11-25, 11-26Gear oil level ........................................................ 11-22

Child restraint systems ............................................... 1-22Installation with A/ELR seatbelt................................ 1-25Lower and tether anchorages .................................. 1-29

Child safety .................................................................... 4Locks ................................................................... 2-19

ChimeKey........................................................................ 3-5Seatbelt......................................................... 1-11, 3-13

CleaningAluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3Interior .................................................................. 10-5Ventilation grille ...................................................... 4-12

Climate control systemAutomatic ............................................................... 4-8Manual................................................................... 4-3

Clock ........................................................................ 3-25Clutch

Fluid ................................................................... 11-26Pedal .................................................................. 11-28

Coin tray .................................................................... 6-4Coolant ................................................................... 11-13Coolant temperature low indicator light .......................... 3-17Cooling system ........................................................ 11-12Corrosion protection............................................ 8-10, 10-4Cruise control ............................................................ 7-36

Set indicator light.................................................... 3-25Cruise control indicator light ......................................... 3-24Cup holder ................................................................. 6-5

Front passenger’s.................................................... 6-5Rear passenger’s .................................................... 6-5

DDaytime running light system ....................................... 3-29Differential gear oil

Front................................................................... 11-21Rear ................................................................... 11-22

Index 14-3

Black plate (4,1)


14-4 Index

Dimensions ............................................................... 12-2Disarming the system ................................................. 2-16Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-24Dome light .................................................................. 6-2Door

Locks ..................................................................... 2-4Open warning light ................................................. 3-21

Drive belts................................................................ 11-18Driving

All-Wheel Drive vehicle ........................................... 3-21Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 7Drinking ..................................................................... 6Drugs ........................................................................ 6Foreign countries ..................................................... 8-4Pets .......................................................................... 7Snowy and icy roads ................................................ 8-9Tips................................................................ 7-15, 8-5Tired or sleepy............................................................ 6

EElectrical system........................................................ 12-3Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)system........................................................... 3-20, 7-26

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-10Engine

Compartment overview ........................................... 11-6Coolant................................................................ 11-13Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ............................ 5, 8-2Hood .................................................................... 11-5Oil........................................................................ 11-8Overheating .......................................................... 9-13

Starting .................................................................. 7-8Stopping................................................................ 7-10

Exterior care .............................................................. 10-2

FFlat tires ..................................................................... 9-4Floor mat.................................................................... 6-9Fluid level

Automatic transmission ......................................... 11-20Brake.................................................................. 11-25Clutch ................................................................. 11-26Power steering ..................................................... 11-24

Fog light switch .......................................................... 3-30Front

Differential gear oil................................................ 11-21Fog light .............................................................. 11-50Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-19Seats ..................................................................... 1-2

Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-4Gauge............................................................ 3-8, 3-12Requirements ......................................................... 7-3

Fuses ..................................................................... 11-43Fuses and circuits ...................................................... 12-6

GGAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................... 8-13Glove box................................................................... 6-4GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................... 8-13

Black plate (5,1)


HHazard warning flasher ........................................... 3-5, 9-2Head restraint adjustment ............................................. 1-4

Rear....................................................................... 1-7Headlight

Flasher ................................................................. 3-28Indicator light......................................................... 3-25

Headlights........................................................ 3-28, 11-47Heater operation .......................................................... 4-5High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-24High mount stop light................................................. 11-53High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-28Hill start assist (MT vehicles) .............................. 7-35, 11-29Hill start assist warning light ........................................ 3-21Horn......................................................................... 3-41Hose and connections ............................................... 11-12

IIgnition switch.............................................................. 3-3

Light....................................................................... 3-5Illuminated entry .......................................................... 2-9Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-29Immobilizer.................................................................. 2-2

Indicator light........................................................... 2-3Indicator light

Cruise control ........................................................ 3-24Cruise control set................................................... 3-25Front fog............................................................... 3-25Headlight .............................................................. 3-25High beam ............................................................ 3-24Security ................................................................ 3-23

Selector lever/Gear position ..................................... 3-24SPORT mode ........................................................ 3-24Traction Control system OFF ................................... 3-22Turn signal ............................................................ 3-24Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................. 3-23Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.......................... 3-22

Indicator lightsVehicle Dynamics Control ........................................ 7-29

Information display...................................................... 3-26Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-36Interior light................................................................. 6-2Internal trunk lid release handle.................................... 2-22

JJack handle ............................................................... 9-18Jump starting ............................................................. 9-10

KKey

Keyless entry system ............................................... 2-7Number .................................................................. 2-2Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-5Replacement........................................................... 2-4

Keys .......................................................................... 2-2

LLeather seat materials................................................. 10-5Light

Cargo area ............................................................. 6-2Control switch ........................................................ 3-27Dome..................................................................... 6-2

Index 14-5

Black plate (6,1)


14-6 Index

Map ....................................................................... 6-3Loading your vehicle .................................................. 8-11Low fuel warning light ................................... 3-8, 3-12, 3-21Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-18Lower and tether anchorage........................................ 1-29

MMain fuse................................................................. 11-45Maintenance

Precautions ........................................................... 11-3Schedule .............................................................. 11-3Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-19Tools .................................................................... 9-18

Malfunction indicator lamp........................................... 3-16Manual

Climate control system ............................................. 4-3Transmission ......................................................... 7-14Transmission oil .................................................... 11-19

Map light..................................................................... 6-3Meters and gauges ................................................ 3-5, 3-9Mirrors...................................................................... 3-36

NNew vehicle break-in driving.......................................... 8-2

OOdometer.................................................................... 3-6Odometer/Tripmeter ................................................... 3-10Off road driving............................................................ 8-6Oil filter..................................................................... 11-9

Oil levelEngine .................................................................. 11-8Front differential gear ............................................ 11-21Manual transmission ............................................. 11-19Rear differential .................................................... 11-22

Oil pressure warning light ............................................ 3-17Outside mirrors .......................................................... 3-38Outside temperature indicator ...................................... 3-26Overheating engine .................................................... 9-13

PParking

Brake.................................................................... 7-34Brake stroke ........................................................ 11-30Tips ...................................................................... 7-34

Parking your vehicle ................................................... 7-34Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4Power

Door locking switch.................................................. 2-6Steering ................................................................ 7-23Steering fluid........................................................ 11-24Windows ............................................................... 2-19

Precautions against vehicle modification................ 1-22, 1-59Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8

RRear

Combination lights ................................................ 11-50Gate ............................................................. 2-23, 9-17Seats ..................................................................... 1-6

Black plate (7,1)


Rear differentialGear oil ............................................................... 11-22

Rear seatFolding down........................................................... 1-8

Rear windowDefogger button ..................................................... 3-34Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 3-33Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-41

RecommendedAutomatic transmission fluid ................................... 11-21Brake fluid............................................................ 11-26Clutch fluid........................................................... 11-27OIL grade andviscosity...................... 11-11, 11-12, 11-20, 11-22, 11-23

Power steering fluid............................................... 11-25Spark plugs.......................................................... 11-18

Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-10Remote keyless entry system ........................................ 2-7Replacement

Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-29Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-39

ReplacingAir cleaner element ............................................... 11-16Battery (remote keyless entry system) ........................ 2-7Lost transmitters (keyless entry system).................... 2-10

Replacing bulbs ........................................................ 11-46Backup light/Tail light ............................................. 11-51Cargo area light .................................................... 11-52Dome light ........................................................... 11-52Front fog light ....................................................... 11-50Front turn signal light............................................. 11-50

Headlight............................................................. 11-47High mount stop light ............................................ 11-53License plate light................................................. 11-52Map light ............................................................. 11-52Parking light......................................................... 11-50Rear combination light .......................................... 11-50Trunk light ........................................................... 11-53

Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-11

SSafety

Precautions when driving............................................. 4Symbol...................................................................... 2Warnings................................................................... 2

SeatFabric ................................................................... 10-5Heater.................................................................... 1-5

Seatbelt......................................................................... 4Maintenance .......................................................... 1-19Pretensioners......................................................... 1-19Safety tips .............................................................. 1-9Warning light and chime .................................. 1-11, 3-13

Seatbelts .................................................................... 1-9Security ID plate.......................................................... 2-3Selector lever............................................................. 7-17

Position indicator .................................................... 3-24Shift lock release........................................................ 7-22Shock sensors ........................................................... 2-18Shopping bag hook...................................................... 6-9Snow tires ................................................................. 8-10Snowy and icy roads ................................................... 8-9

Index 14-7

Black plate (8,1)


14-8 Index

Sounding a panic alarm ................................................ 2-9Spark plugs.............................................................. 11-18Specifications ............................................................ 12-2Speedometer....................................................... 3-6, 3-10SPORT mode indicator light ........................................ 3-24SRS

Curtain airbag........................................................ 1-51Frontal airbag ........................................................ 1-39Side airbag ........................................................... 1-51

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 4, 1-35SRS airbag system

Monitors................................................................ 1-57Servicing............................................................... 1-59Warning light ......................................................... 3-15

Starting the engine....................................................... 7-8State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7Steering wheel

Power................................................................... 7-23Tilt ....................................................................... 3-39Tilt/telescopic......................................................... 3-40

Stopping the engine ................................................... 7-10Storage compartment ................................................... 6-4Sun visors................................................................... 6-3Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-35Synthetic leather upholstery ........................................ 10-5

TTachometer ......................................................... 3-7, 3-11Temperature gauge ...................................................... 3-9Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP)..................... 3-18Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2

Tie-down hooks.......................................................... 9-14Tilt steering wheel....................................................... 3-39Tire

Chains .................................................................. 8-11Inspection............................................................ 11-32Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-33Replacement........................................................ 11-36Rotation .............................................................. 11-36Types.................................................................. 11-31

Tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) ......................................... 3-18, 7-32, 9-9, 11-31

Tires ......................................................................... 12-5Tires and wheels ...................................................... 11-31Top tether anchorages ................................................ 1-32Towing ...................................................................... 9-13

All wheels on the ground ......................................... 9-16Flat-bed truck......................................................... 9-16Tie-down hooks...................................................... 9-14

TrailerTowing .................................................................. 8-15

Trip meter................................................................... 3-6Trunk lid .................................................................... 2-21

Release handle ...................................................... 2-22Trunk light ............................................................... 11-53Turn signal

Indicator lights........................................................ 3-24Lever .................................................................... 3-29

UUnder-floor storage compartment.................................. 6-12

Black plate (9,1)


VValet mode................................................................ 2-16Vanity mirror ................................................................ 6-3Vehicle

Capacity weight ..................................................... 8-12Identification ........................................................ 12-10Symbols .................................................................... 2

Vehicle Dynamics ControlOFF indicator light.................................................. 3-22OFF switch ........................................................... 7-31Operation indicator light .......................................... 3-22System ................................................................. 7-27Warning light ................................................. 3-22, 7-30

Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2

WWarning and indicator lights ........................................ 3-13Warning light

ABS ..................................................................... 3-19All-Wheel Drive...................................................... 3-21Anti-lock Brake System........................................... 3-19AT OIL TEMPerature .............................................. 3-18Brake system ........................................................ 3-20Charge ................................................................. 3-17CHECK ENGINE ................................................... 3-16Door open............................................................. 3-21Hill start assist ....................................................... 3-21Low fuel.................................................. 3-8, 3-12, 3-21Low tire pressure ................................................... 3-18Oil pressure .......................................................... 3-17Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-13

SRS airbag system................................................. 3-15Vehicle Dynamics Control ........................................ 3-22

Warning lightsVehicle Dynamics Control ........................................ 7-30

Warranties ..................................................................... 1Washing .................................................................... 10-2Waxing and polishing .................................................. 10-3Wear indicators ........................................................ 11-35Wheel

Alignment .............................................................. 12-5Aluminum ............................................................ 11-37Balance............................................................... 11-35Replacement........................................................ 11-37

Windows ................................................................... 2-19Windshield

Washer fluid......................................................... 11-38Wiper and washer switches ..................................... 3-32Wiper blades........................................................ 11-39Wiper deicer .......................................................... 3-35

Winter driving.............................................................. 8-8Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-31

Index 14-9

Black plate (1,1)


10

9876

5

4

3

11

12

13

000134

Black plate (2,1)


GAS STATION REFERENCE& Fuel:

! Non-turbo models

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI orhigher.

! Turbo models

Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKIor higher. If premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of91 AKI is not available, regular unleaded gasoline with octanerating of 87 AKI or higher may be temporarily used. Foroptimum engine performance and driveability, it is required thatyou use premium grade unleaded gasoline with an octanerating of 91 AKI or higher.

& Fuel octane ratingThis octane rating is the average of the Research Octane andMotor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the AntiKnock Index (AKI). Refer to the “Fuel” section in this manual.

& Fuel capacity16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)

& Engine oil:Use only API classification SM with the words “ENERGYCONSERVING” and the ILSAC certification mark (starburstmark) displayed on the container.

& Engine oil capacity:4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

& Cold tire pressure:

Tire size P205/55R16 89V P205/50R17 88V

Wheel size 16 6 61/2 JJ 17 6 7 JJ

Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Temporary sparetire

Size T125/70 D17


Documents

2007 WRX & STI Owners Manual